Op 7 User Guide

OrgPlus 7 User Guide
Release 7.1
The material presented in this publication is copyright-protected 2000-2007 by HumanConcepts and may not be reproduced in any form, by any method for any purpose without the prior written consent of HumanConcepts. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. It is against the law to copy the software, except in accordance with the terms of the licensing agreement. OrgPlus is a registered trademark of HumanConcepts. All other trademarks acknowledged.
OrgPlus User Guide
ii
OrgPlus User Guide
Program License Agreement

PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING DESKTOP SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY. THIS AGREEMENT FORMS A LEGALLY BINDING AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU, THE INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY THAT DOWNLOADED OR INSTALLED THE SOFTWARE ("CUSTOMER") AND HUMANCONCEPTS LLC ("HUMANCONCEPTS"). BY CLICKING THE "I ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE" BUTTON DURING SOFTWARE INSTALLATION OR BY USING THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED WITH THIS AGREEMENT, YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, YOU SHOULD NOT INSTALL OR USE THE SOFTWARE, AND YOU SHOULD PROMPTLY DESTROY ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE THAT YOU DOWNLOADED OR COPIED. 1 Grant of License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, HumanConcepts grants to Customer a non-exclusive license to install the object code version of the software provided with this Agreement (the "Software"), on a single computer, and to use the Software on that computer, to create organizational charts relating to your organization. Customer agrees that it shall not use the Software in any other manner. Customer shall not install the Software on a network server; allow any other computer, terminal or device to access or use the Software; or install or use the Software concurrently on more than one computer except as expressly authorized by the level of license you purchased. Customer shall not copy the Software except to make one copy for backup purposes. Customer shall not sublicense its rights under this Agreement, rent or lease the Software, or give anyone else access to the Software. Maximum Number of Employees Charted Depends Upon License Key. Customer acknowledges that HumanConcepts distributes several versions of the Software and that the version of the Software to which Customer has acquired a license key is intended to allow Customer to access certain features. The OrgPlus Express Software limits the number of boxes that can be added to a single chart. The OrgPlus Professional Software is limited to charting the maximum number of employees indicated in HumanConcepts price list at the time you purchased the applicable license key. Customer agrees not to use the OrgPlus Professional Software to chart more than the total maximum number of employees applicable to the particular license key you purchased. Customer agrees that if it uses the OrgPlus Professional Software to chart more than such total maximum number of employees, (a) Customer will pay to HumanConcepts its then-current license fee for the version of the Software that would permit Customer to chart that number of employees (less the fee already paid pursuant to this Agreement), and (b) if Customer does not pay such additional fee to HumanConcepts within fifteen (15) days of demand, HumanConcepts may terminate your license to use the Software without refunding any license fees. Copyright. Customer acknowledges that HumanConcepts or its licensors own the copyright and all other intellectual property rights relating to the Software, and that no title to the Software or such intellectual property rights is transferred to Customer. Customer will not acquire any rights to the Software except the limited license to use the Software as expressly set forth above, and HumanConcepts and its licensors retain all other rights. Customer agrees not to alter or remove the copyright notice, or any other notices of proprietary rights, that appear on and in the Software. In the event HumanConcepts provides services to Customer, including without limitation support or installation services, all right, title and interest in the work product of the services shall vest exclusively in HumanConcepts.
iii
OrgPlus User Guide
Restrictions; Reverse Engineering; Modification. Customer agrees not to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software in whole or in part, or otherwise reconstruct or discover any source code to the Software, or attempt to do so, except and only to the extent that such activity cannot be restricted under applicable law. Customer agrees not to translate or modify the Software in any way or create derivative works of the Software, or attempt to do so. Customer agrees not to use the Software on a service bureau, application service provider, or time sharing basis. Customer shall not use any license key with the Software other than the key provided by HumanConcepts to Customer. Transfer of License. Customer may not assign or transfer its rights or obligations under this Agreement, except that Customer may assign the Agreement to a successor to its business that results from a sale of substantially all of Customers assets, merger, or similar transaction, provided that the assignee agrees in writing to be bound by this Agreement and provided that Customer transfers all copies of the Software and related documentation to the third party or destroys any copies not transferred. HumanConcepts may assign or novate this Agreement freely without notice to Customer. Reporting and Privacy Policy. The Software automatically reports information such as Customers Software license key and Software version number, without notice. This information may be associated with personally identifiable information acquired by HumanConcepts. By using the Software you consent to the collection of such information. The information and this Agreement are subject to the terms and conditions of the HumanConcepts privacy policy located at http://www.humanconcepts.com/privacypolicy/ ("Privacy Policy"). The terms and conditions of the Privacy Policy are incorporated herein by reference, and Customer hereby agrees to such terms. HumanConcepts reserves the right to modify the terms of the Privacy Policy from time to time, and Customers continued use of the Service shall indicate its agreement to such changes. Term of License. The license granted by this Agreement shall continue until terminated, as provided in this Agreement. Customer may terminate the license at any time. HumanConcepts may terminate the license (a) if Customer fails to comply with this Agreement, (b) if Customer does not pay the full license fee when that fee is due, or (c) Customer does not pay any additional license fees that may become due pursuant to Section 2 of this Agreement. Customer agrees, upon any termination of the license, to destroy the Software and all copies thereof in any form. If the Agreement is terminated, the sections related to copyright, liability, disclaimer of warranty, and fees shall remain in effect, in addition to other sections that by their terms are intended to survive. Termination shall not result in a return of fees. Limited Warranty on CD. If the Software was delivered to you on a CD, HumanConcepts warrants that the CD will be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use for 30 days after purchase. During the 30-day period, Customer may return a defective CD to HumanConcepts with proof of purchase, and it will be replaced without charge, unless the disk is damaged by accident or misuse. REPLACEMENT OF A DISK IS CUSTOMERS SOLE REMEDY PURSUANT TO THIS WARRANTY. DISCLAIMER OF OTHER WARRANTIES. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED HEREIN, THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. HUMANCONCEPTS, AND ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS, HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL ADDITIONAL WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HUMANCONCEPTS DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE WITHOUT ERROR OR INTERRUPTION.
iv
OrgPlus User Guide
10 Limitation of Liability. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HUMANCONCEPTS (OR ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS) BE LIABLE TO CUSTOMER OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF DATA, OR COST OF COVER, WHETHER ALLEGED AS A BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORTIOUS CONDUCT OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION NEGLIGENCE, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT EVEN IF HUMANCONCEPTS (OR ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS) HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL HUMANCONCEPTS (OR ITS LICENSORS OR SUPPLIERS) AGGREGATE LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE LICENSE FEES PAID BY CUSTOMER TO HUMANCONCEPTS DURING THE ONE-YEAR PERIOD PRECEDING THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH LIABILITY, AND IF THE SOFTWARE WAS PROVIDED TO CUSTOMER FREE OF CHARGE, IN NO EVENT SHALL SUCH AGGREGATE LIABILITY EXCEED FIVE DOLLARS (US$5.00). IN THE EVENT OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF ANY SERVICES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION SUPPORT, IN NO EVENT WILL HUMANCONCEPTS AGGREGATE LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE FEES PAID BY CUSTOMER TO HUMANCONCEPTS FOR THE EFFECTED SERVICES FOR THAT QUARTER. CUSTOMER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR BACKING UP ALL DATA ASSOCIATED WITH ITS USE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND HUMANCONCEPTS (AND ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST DATA OR ERRORS IN DATA CAUSED BY THE SOFTWARE. 11 Support Agreement. Customer acknowledges that HumanConcepts shall not be obligated to provide support or maintenance related to Customers use of the Software. In the event HumanConcepts in its discretion provides support and/or maintenance to the Customer, such support and/or maintenance shall be provided pursuant to HumanConcepts then-current current support terms.
OrgPlus User Guide
12 General Provisions. a) Severability. In the event any provision of this Agreement is determined to be invalid or unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to the maximum extent permitted, and the Parties agree that the other provisions of this Agreement shall not be affected and shall continue to be enforced. The Parties agree that this Agreement is the entire agreement between Customer and HumanConcepts relating to its subject matter, and it supersedes any prior agreements, representations, or communications, whether written or oral, relating to that subject matter. b) Choice of Law and Venue. This Agreement shall be governed by the internal laws of the State of California, without respect to its conflicts of law rules. The Parties agree that this Agreement shall not be governed by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. The Parties agree that any suit or proceeding arising out of or relating to this Agreement will be brought only in the US District Court for the Northern District of California or the California Superior Court for Marin County, and each shall submit to the exclusive personal and subject matter jurisdiction and venue of such courts. c) Export. Customer acknowledges that United States (including without limitation US Export Administration Regulations) and foreign laws prohibit the export/re-export or transfer of products and technical data of US origin, including software, and Customer agrees not to export or re-export the Software or related technology without the appropriate US and foreign government clearance. d) Waiver. No term or provision hereof will be considered waived by either Party, and no breach excused by either party, unless such waiver or consent is in writing signed by both Parties. No consent by either party to, or waiver of, a breach by either party, whether express or implied, will constitute a consent to, waiver of, or excuse of any other, different, or subsequent breach by either Party. e) Force Majeure. Neither Party will be liable for any failure or delay in performance under this Agreement which might be due, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, to any contingency, delay, failure, or cause of, any nature beyond the reasonable control of such party, including, without limitation, fire, explosion, earthquake, storm, flood, strike, war, insurrection, riot, act of God, epidemic, government action, network outage, or acts or failures to act on the part of any third party. In the event of the happening of such a cause, the party whose performance is so affected will give prompt, written notice to the other Party, stating the period of time the same is expected to continue. f) Notices. Any notice provided for or permitted under this Agreement will be treated as having been given when (a) delivered personally, (b) sent by confirmed telex or telecopy, (c) sent by commercial overnight courier with written verification of receipt, or (d) mailed postage prepaid by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested, to the party to be notified. Notices to HumanConcepts shall be sent to its then-current principal place of business and notices to Customer shall be sent to Customers address appearing in HumanConcepts records, or to such other place of which the other party has been notified in accordance with the provisions of this section. Any notices will be treated as having been received upon the earlier of actual receipt or five (5) days after posting. g) Relationship of Parties. There is no relationship of agency, partnership, joint venture, employment or franchise between the parties. Neither party has the authority to bind the other or to incur any obligation on its behalf. No other party except HumanConcepts and Customer shall be construed as a third party beneficiary to this Agreement or in privity to enforce the provisions of this Agreement at law or in equity.
vi
OrgPlus User Guide
About This Guide

This guide provides an in-depth description of how to use OrgPlus 7. This guide is intended for new and experienced users. It includes both step-by-step tutorials and a detailed reference to all functionality. Chapter 1, Introduction, provides an overview of OrgPlus. Chapter 2, Installation and Registration, describes how to install and register OrgPlus on your PC. Chapter 3, Tutorials, provides step-by-steps lessons on how to use OrgPlus. Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Charting, provides an introduction to OrgPlus functionality. Chapter 5, Working with Charts: Navigation and Visualization, provides further charting instruction and explains how to navigate within your charts and define their visual appearance. Chapter 6, Working with Charts: Utilities, provides detailed description and instructions for using the tools available in OrgPlus. Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting, describes advanced OrgPlus charting techniques. Chapter 8, OrgPlus Panels, describes the OrgPlus panels designed to help you navigate, search and analyze your organizational charts. Chapter 9, Importing and Exporting Data, describes how to build charts using data imported from external sources such as Excel spreadsheets or relational databases. Chapter 10, Publishing your Chart, describes how to publish charts to standard desktop and web formats such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft PowerPoint, Adobe PDF, and HTML. Charts can also be published to the OrgPlus web browser plug-in. Chapter 11, Automation, explains how to automate some of the tasks you perform with OrgPlus. Appendix A, Window Structure and Command Reference, describes the OrgPlus main window and provides an overview for all menu and toolbar options. Appendix B, Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts, describes keyboard and mouse shortcuts. Appendix C, Tips and Tricks, reviews time saving functions and techniques. Appendix D, Troubleshooting, presents possible solutions should you encounter problems using OrgPlus.
About This Guide
vii
OrgPlus User Guide
Appendix E, Off-line Registration Process, describes how to register OrgPlus by email, by fax or by phone. Appendix F, Command Line Reference, discusses how to use OrgPlus from the command prompt, which enables you to build scripts and complex automation tasks. Appendix G, Glossary, provides definitions of terms used in this guide. Additional documentation can also be found at our website: www.orgplus.com.
Typographic Conventions
The following typographic conventions appear in this guide: Names of keyboard keys are enclosed by angle brackets (<>), (for example, Press <Enter>). Press <Alt>+<A> means to simultaneously hold down the <Alt> key on the keyboard and press the letter <A>). Buttons and tabs on the screen are shown in bold (for example, Click OK). Information that you enter appears in bold face, (for example, Type A:\setup). Sub-menu instructions are separated by a pipe (|), (for example, Show | Hidden Boxes means to select the Show menu item and select the Hidden Boxes sub-menu item). Sections that describe functionality available to OrgPlus Express users are marked with this icon .
OrgPlus Desktop Products

Whether you work in a small company or large institution, OrgPlus is the easiest and most powerful way to chart and manage the structure of your organization. The OrgPlus family of products is designed to meet the needs of a variety of different types of users.
OrgPlus Standard
OrgPlus Standard allows users to manually create professional organizational charts of any size and includes intelligent tools for easy drag-and-drop scenario planning.
OrgPlus Professional
OrgPlus Professional includes features that are not available in OrgPlus Standard. These features allow you hook OrgPlus Professional into an external data source and then automatically distribute organizational chart to your company. The key features in OrgPlus Professional are: viii Import: The ability to import data from external files or databases. Typographic Conventions
OrgPlus User Guide
Publish: The ability to publish charts to other formats including PDF, PowerPoint, Word, HTML and the OrgPlus Web Browser Plug-in. Automation: The ability to schedule data refresh and chart publishing to automate the distribution and maintenance of charts.
OrgPlus Express
OrgPlus Express is a basic organizational charting application that does not include many of the powerful features found in OrgPlus Standard and Professional. Consequently not all the sections in this guide are applicable to OrgPlus Express users. The sections in this guide that are applicable to OrgPlus Express users are indicated by the OrgPlus Express icon .
OrgPlus Reader
OrgPlus Reader is a free application that allows anyone to open, view and print OrgPlus documents. OrgPlus Reader is a read-only version of OrgPlus that allows you to share charts with other people in your organization. OrgPlus Reader is downloadable from our website (http://www.orgplus.com).
OrgPlus Enterprise Products

HumanConcepts also offers products intended for enterprise customers. Contact sales@orgplus.com for more information.
OrgPlus Enterprise
OrgPlus Enterprise is a web-based solution for organizational charting. Any person in your organization can access organizational information using nothing more than a web browser. OrgPlus Enterprise solves the deployment, security, visualization and distribution issues associated with enterprise level organizational charting and is designed to integrate into your existing enterprise infrastructure.
OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted

OrgPlus Enterprise is available as a hosted solution. OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted provides the industry's leading enterprise-class organizational charting solution, without the cost of installing, upgrading, and maintaining a server in-house. Using our secure server, OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted enables organizations of all sizes to instantly create, view, share, and manage organizational charts.
ix
OrgPlus User Guide
OrgPlus User Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 1, Introduction............................................................................. 1-1
Overview ............................................................................................................. 1-1 About OrgPlus ...................................................................................................... 1-2 The OrgPlus Solution ............................................................................................. 1-3 OrgPlus Features .................................................................................................. 1-6 OrgPlus 7 Highlights ............................................................................................ 1-21 OrgPlus 7.0.1 Highlights....................................................................................... 1-26 OrgPlus 7.1 Highlights ......................................................................................... 1-26
Chapter 2, Installation and Registration ................................................... 2-1

Overview ............................................................................................................. 2-1 System Requirements............................................................................................ 2-2 Standard vs. Professional ....................................................................................... 2-3 OrgPlus Express.................................................................................................... 2-3 Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-3 Registration ......................................................................................................... 2-6 Starting OrgPlus ................................................................................................. 2-11 Customer Support............................................................................................... 2-13
Chapter 3, Tutorials................................................................................... 3-1

Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-2 Tutorial 1: Creating Basic Charts ............................................................................. 3-2 Tutorial 2: Formatting and Printing Charts ................................................................ 3-9 Tutorial 3: Using Directories, Reports and Profiles.................................................... 3-16 Tutorial 4: Working with Sub-Charts ...................................................................... 3-27 Tutorial 5: Creating Charts from External Data ........................................................ 3-31 Tutorial 6: Publishing Charts................................................................................. 3-38
Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Charting........................................ 4-1

Overview ............................................................................................................. 4-1 Opening Projects................................................................................................... 4-2 Creating Projects .................................................................................................. 4-2 Saving and Closing Projects.................................................................................... 4-4 Adding and Deleting Boxes ..................................................................................... 4-6 Selecting Objects .................................................................................................. 4-7 Table of Contents xi
OrgPlus User Guide
Moving Objects ................................................................................................... 4-12 Entering Field Information .................................................................................... 4-15 Defining and Displaying Fields............................................................................... 4-17 Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures .................................................. 4-35 Formatting Charts ............................................................................................... 4-49 Applying Chart Styles .......................................................................................... 4-54 Quick Chart Panel ............................................................................................... 4-58 Using Cut/Copy/Paste .......................................................................................... 4-64 Printing ............................................................................................................. 4-65
Chapter 5, Working with Charts: Navigation and Visualization.................. 5-1

Viewing Charts ..................................................................................................... 5-1 Hiding Boxes and Lines .......................................................................................... 5-5 Basic Visualization Techniques ................................................................................ 5-6 Working with Groups ............................................................................................. 5-8
Chapter 6, Working with Charts: Utilities .................................................. 6-1

Overview ............................................................................................................. 6-1 Using Grids and Rulers........................................................................................... 6-2 Working with the Photo Manager ............................................................................. 6-2 Comparing Charts ................................................................................................. 6-5 Sorting Boxes....................................................................................................... 6-8 Using Find and Replace .......................................................................................... 6-9 Spell Check ........................................................................................................ 6-13 Inserting Comments ............................................................................................ 6-14 Setting OrgPlus Options ....................................................................................... 6-15
Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting................................. 7-1

Overview ............................................................................................................. 7-2 Using the Master Page ........................................................................................... 7-2 Adding Headers and Footers ................................................................................... 7-3 Adding AutoText Elements...................................................................................... 7-4 Adding Free Floating Objects .................................................................................. 7-6 Adding Hyperlinks to Objects ................................................................................ 7-12 Adding Auxiliary Lines.......................................................................................... 7-13 Adding Legends .................................................................................................. 7-14 Creating and Modifying Templates ......................................................................... 7-18 xii Table of Contents
OrgPlus User Guide
Using Templates ................................................................................................. 7-20 Defining Dynamic Fields ....................................................................................... 7-24 Using Formulas................................................................................................... 7-30 Using Constants.................................................................................................. 7-32 Working with Sub-charts ...................................................................................... 7-36 Working with Multiple Charts ................................................................................ 7-41 Advanced Chart Layout ........................................................................................ 7-44 Multi-record Boxes .............................................................................................. 7-47 Conditional Formatting......................................................................................... 7-49 Chart Rules ........................................................................................................ 7-53 Creating Off-page References ............................................................................... 7-57
Chapter 8, OrgPlus Panels ......................................................................... 8-1

Overview ............................................................................................................. 8-1 Working with Reports ............................................................................................ 8-2 Working with Directories ...................................................................................... 8-12 Working with Profiles ........................................................................................... 8-20 Working with Trees ............................................................................................. 8-31 Searching Charts ................................................................................................ 8-34 Working with Comments ...................................................................................... 8-40
Chapter 9, Importing and Exporting Data.................................................. 9-1

Overview ............................................................................................................. 9-1 Importing Data ..................................................................................................... 9-2 Advanced Import ................................................................................................ 9-25 Refreshing Data .................................................................................................. 9-42 Exporting Data ................................................................................................... 9-47 Push Data .......................................................................................................... 9-50 Consolidation ..................................................................................................... 9-52
Chapter 10, Publishing your Chart........................................................... 10-1

Overview ........................................................................................................... 10-1 Publishing .......................................................................................................... 10-2 E-mailing a Chart File ........................................................................................ 10-14
Chapter 11, Automation .......................................................................... 11-1

Overview ........................................................................................................... 11-1 Republishing ...................................................................................................... 11-2 Table of Contents xiii
OrgPlus User Guide
Scheduling Tasks ................................................................................................ 11-3 OrgPlus Enterprise .............................................................................................. 11-9
Appendix A, Window Structure and Command Reference.......................... A-1

Main Window........................................................................................................ A-2 Menu Bar ............................................................................................................. A-3 Toolbars ............................................................................................................ A-15 Panels ............................................................................................................... A-24 Chart Selection Tabs ........................................................................................... A-30 Status Bar ......................................................................................................... A-31
Appendix B, Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts ............................................. B-1

Using Right-Click Menus......................................................................................... B-1 Using Keyboard Shortcuts ...................................................................................... B-2 Using the Function and Control Keys ........................................................................ B-6
Appendix C, Tips and Tricks....................................................................... C-1

Extra-Wide Manager Boxes.....................................................................................C-2 Modified Co-manager Style.....................................................................................C-3 Modified List Style.................................................................................................C-4 Multiple Topmost Boxes .........................................................................................C-5 Multiple People in a Box - Employees Listed by Function .............................................C-6 Multiple Charts on a Page.......................................................................................C-7 Repositioning Boxes within the Same Level ...............................................................C-8 Staggering Boxes on the Same Level .......................................................................C-8
Appendix D, Troubleshooting ....................................................................D-1

Overview .............................................................................................................D-1 Installation ..........................................................................................................D-2 Printing ...............................................................................................................D-2 Using OrgPlus with Other Applications ......................................................................D-5 Calculations .........................................................................................................D-6 Disk Space...........................................................................................................D-7 Memory & Resources .............................................................................................D-7
Appendix E, Off-line Registration .............................................................. E-1

Registering by Email.............................................................................................. E-2 Registering by Fax ................................................................................................ E-2 Registering by Phone............................................................................................. E-3 xiv Table of Contents
OrgPlus User Guide
Appendix F, Command Line Reference ...................................................... F-1

Overview ............................................................................................................. F-1
Appendix G, Glossary ................................................................................ G-1 Index .........................................................................................................I-1
Table of Contents
xv
OrgPlus User Guide
xvi
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
In this chapter
Overview About OrgPlus The OrgPlus Solution OrgPlus Features OrgPlus 7 Highlights OrgPlus 7.0.1 Highlights OrgPlus 7.1 Highlights page 1-1 page 1-2 page 1-3 page 1-6 Page 1-21 Page 1-26 Page 1-26
Overview
OrgPlus is the industry leader in organizational charting software. For over a decade, OrgPlus has been used for managing organizational charts and supporting critical business decisions. With over 30 new features OrgPlus 7 is the most powerful organizational charting tool available.
1-1
OrgPlus User Guide
About OrgPlus
Whether you work in a small company or large institution, OrgPlus is the easiest way to chart and manage the structure of your organization. OrgPlus helps you create professional looking organization charts quickly and easily. You can also use OrgPlus to create almost any tree diagram, such as a work breakdown or a parts explosion. OrgPlus has become an essential management tool for millions of professionals throughout the world. Over 400 of the Fortune 500 have selected OrgPlus to meet their charting needs. OrgPlus is designed from the ground up to help you create and manage hierarchical charts. OrgPlus gives you: High performance handling of large data sets Sophisticated formatting Drawing tools that enable you to add pictures and annotations Data visualization tools, such as reports and directories Sophisticated printing, exporting and publishing features Easy navigation of complex charts Robust data import from external sources, such as Excel, ODBC, OLE DB, SQL Server, Oracle, PeopleSoft, SAP, and LDAP (Active Directory)
Sample charts, included with the OrgPlus installation, illustrate interesting ways in which OrgPlus can be used.
1-2
About OrgPlus
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
The OrgPlus Solution

OrgPlus is designed to handle each step in the organizational charting process. OrgPlus handles data import from external systems and automates distribution of data to standard desktop formats (Microsoft PowerPoint or Word), to the web, or to hard copy. OrgPlus can even be used to feed updated data back into business systems. The following diagram illustrates how OrgPlus can be used in the HR environment.
OrgPlus empowers organizations to create reliable business processes around the discipline of managing and communicating organizational structure and change. The benefits of OrgPlus are as follows:
Communicate Organizational Information to Managers

Human Resource or IT departments can create organizational charts automatically from HR databases and distribute them to management. This process is automated using OrgPlus Professional. Charts may contain sensitive information such as salary, gender, tenure and other information needed for decision-making purposes.
1-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Communicate Organizational Information to Employees

OrgPlus Professional is used for communicating organizational charts and corporate directories to the company intranet or shared network. OrgPlus Professional creates pre-defined charts directly from an HR database, either on a scheduled basis, or whenever initiated by a chart administrator. Sensitive information can be distributed securely to managers using existing network security. Non-sensitive information is presented in both an organizational chart format and as a corporate directory that can be shared across the organization. Charts are communicated to employees by publishing them for web or shared-network viewing. Employees with OrgPlus Standard or Professional can select specific chart branches and save to the OPX file format, where they can be used for planning or publishing to MS-Word, PowerPoint, or HTML or PDF formats. Organizational chart or corporate directory information can also be exported to Excel. OrgPlus is the ideal way to distribute corporate information. Posting charts to the web, your corporate intranet or a shared network drive makes them a company-wide information source that connects every employee.
Organizational Planning and What If Scenario Analysis

Managers select the charts published by HR or IT specific to their departments and use them as a baseline for planning, budgets and scenarios. Managers may need to communicate and solicit feedback from their employees to build a future plan. They use OrgPlus Professional or OrgPlus Standard. They then provide scenarios back to executive management for approval. This may take multiple iterations, and OrgPlus integrates with MS-Excel to easily translate organizational chart data into budgets, and with MS-Word and PowerPoint software for communicating.
1-4
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
OrgPlus has built-in tools for performing spreadsheet functions, such as rollup summaries of salaries and headcount. When boxes include salary information, moving an employee between departments automatically updates budget totals.
Analysis Tool
By adding additional information such as office asset allocations, you can use OrgPlus to help you with asset management.
1-5
OrgPlus User Guide
OrgPlus Features
OrgPlus has many powerful features including:
Fast Chart Creation

You can import data from a database, spreadsheet, or start from scratch using OrgPlus' intelligent drawing tools. OrgPlus completely automates chart creation.
Powerful Chart Formatting

With OrgPlus, your charts keep pace with your changing organization. You can rearrange boxes by cutting and pasting, or dragging and dropping. You can rearrange the information within boxes manually, or save time by applying pre-defined templates. OrgPlus automatically preserves uniform sizing and spacing, and shows you an accurate print preview.
Compare Charts
OrgPlus allows you to compare two charts. After comparison, OrgPlus generates a report containing the differences between the two charts.
Master Page
The Master Page feature enables you to define a transparent background page that is used for all the chart pages (similar to the feature available in Microsoft PowerPoint). The master page can include, for example, a corporate logo or photographs, and elements such as page numbers and the date the chart was last updated.
1-6
OrgPlus Features
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
Sophisticated Box Layout

Data fields including pictures and photos can be rearranged and formatted within a box to meet almost any design or reporting requirements. OrgPlus also allows you to set the background color and border style for any cell within a box. Field labels in boxes can be placed anywhere in a box (above, below, left, or right of the corresponding field). OrgPlus also allows you to create fixed size boxes and fixed size columns within boxes.
Multi-Record Boxes
You can create boxes that contain more then one record. For example, the entire sales team for an organization can be represented in a single box:
OrgPlus Features
1-7
OrgPlus User Guide
Mapped Fields
Mapped fields allow you to map from one value to another value. For example, USA = www.mycompany.com/flags/usflag.jpg. Value US Maps to /images/usflag.jpg Result
CA
/images/caflag.jpg
NL
/images/nlflag.jpg
CN
/images/cnflag.jpg
Symbols Library
The My Charts folder contains a library of images that you can use in your charts. The image library is located in the My Documents/My Charts/Symbols folder on your computer.
Hotspots
OrgPlus enables you to define any area within a box as a hotspot. When a user moves the cursor over a hotspot a profile is dynamically displayed.
1-8
OrgPlus Features
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
Quick Chart Creator

The fastest way to get started with OrgPlus is to use the Quick Chart panel. The Quick Chart feature provides all the controls you need to create basic organizational charts in one easy to use panel.
Templates
Templates provide a pre-defined starting point for setting up the look and feel of new or existing charts. OrgPlus supplies a variety of design, box and branch templates that can be used to quickly create professional looking charts.
OrgPlus Features
1-9
OrgPlus User Guide
Legends
You can add legends to your charts. Each legend contains one or more color coded legend entries to help end users understand your charts.
OrgUnit Charts
Create a chart of Org Units (or departments) from the hierarchy shown in the subcharts panel.
1-10
OrgPlus Features
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
Optimized Charts
Charts can be optimized to fit on one or more pages, making charts easier to read, copy, and distribute. OrgPlus can automatically create compact charts by arranging boxes in the most space-efficient manner.
Chart Orientation
OrgPlus supports inverted charts and charts that are oriented left to right and right to left.
OrgPlus Features
1-11
OrgPlus User Guide
Multi-column Chart Styles

OrgPlus supports multiple subordinate rows under a single manager including the ability to maintain banding of employees within rows.
Chart Style Rules

Chart Style Rules enable you to change chart branch styles based on you own rules. For example, any box containing an employee with the word Assistant in their title can automatically be reformatted to an assistant style. Style Rules also enable you to group and demote boxes based on user defined rules.
Consolidation
Some organizations want to combine multiple organizational charts into a single chart. One common scenario is that each division within a company is responsible for maintaining their own organizational chart using OrgPlus. Using the consolidation feature, each divisions chart can be combined into a single master chart. Note: This feature is available only in OrgPlus Professional.
Conditional Formatting
Conditional formatting enables you to dynamically apply formatting to a subset of a chart that meets a set of user-defined criteria. After importing data, conditional formats can be applied to a chart to format any boxes meeting the criteria. For example, any box containing an employee who has more than 10 vacation days could have a thick red border.
1-12
OrgPlus Features
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
Free Form Tool

OrgPlus automatically positions chart boxes based on the selected branch style. From time to time, automatic positioning of chart boxes may not meet your charting requirements. The free form tool your chart. allows you to arbitrarily position boxes within
Sub-charting
OrgPlus includes sub-charting as an integral part of the charting process. Previewing and checking sub-charts prior to publishing ensures that published charts are always right the first time.
Dotted Line Reporting Relationships

In many companies, a single individual may appear in an organizational chart multiple times. Individuals of this type have dotted line reporting relationships to one or more managers. OrgPlus enables you to easily navigate through all occurrences of a dotted line report.
Groups
The Groups feature enables you to define a subset of a chart that meets a set of user-defined criteria. All boxes that do not belong to this subset (or group) are then shaded when this group is selected. This enhances both chart presentation and analysis. For example, a group of all sales people who have met sales goals can easily be visualized.
Conditional Formulas
You can specify which boxes are to be included or excluded from a calculation by using a conditional formula. For example, you can specify the inclusion of only permanent (versus temporary) employees in a calculation.
OrgPlus Features
1-13
OrgPlus User Guide
Managing Large Amounts of Complex Data

Large charts can be subdivided into sub-charts. For example, an organization with ten divisions can be presented as eleven sub-charts one for the executive team, and one for each division. This picture shows a chart before and after sub-charting, and how sub-charts are navigated.
Importing Data from External Sources

OrgPlus ensures that you are always working with the latest information. OrgPlus connects directly to your existing databases using an LDAP, SQL Server, ODBC or Oracle Connection Wizard, or to a spreadsheet or text file. Data can be refreshed at any time, either manually or on a scheduled basis.
Orphan Management
If your data does not contain hierarchy information or your data contains a large number of unassigned positions, OrgPlus makes orphan management easy by allowing you to drag and drop employee records into your charts or sub-charts.
OLE DB Support
OrgPlus supports data import from any OLE DB compatible data source. Note: This feature is available only in OrgPlus Professional.
Direct Access to SAP

OrgPlus allows you to import data directly from SAP using the SAP HR-OCI (Organizational Charting Interface). SAP HR-OCI guarantees compatibility with all future versions of SAP and does not require you to load custom software into your SAP environment. Note: SAP integration requires purchase of the OrgPlus SAP HR-OCI adapter.
1-14
OrgPlus Features
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
Data Synchronization
OrgPlus can refresh data from an underlying data source, such as an Excel spreadsheet, LDAP or relational database. No matter how an organization changes, OrgPlus can maintain chart formatting and publishing parameters.
OrgPlus Features
1-15
OrgPlus User Guide
Advanced Search
Perform advanced search functions. The Search Panel displays a tabular list all records based on a user defined query. The search panel is useful for finding any set of employees, data mining and succession planning.
Reports
OrgPlus enables you to create both static and dynamic reports from your underlying data. Reports can include summaries and allow you to sort and group data as required. Navigating through the chart dynamically updates the report based on current cursor position.
Constants (what-if analysis)

OrgPlus allows you to define constants that you can use in formulas, conditional formats and chart rules. Changing the value of a constant will update every chart element that references that constant. For example, you can define a conditional format that sets the color of a box based upon whether an employee was hired before or after a specific date. If you reference a constant called cutoff date in the conditional format, you can now easily visualize the impact of changing the cutoff date to different values.
1-16
OrgPlus Features
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
Multiple Charts per Project and Matrix Reporting

OrgPlus projects can now contain multiple charts similar to the Microsoft Excel workbook and worksheet concept. Each chart within a project can show a unique view that displays different data fields, contains different formatting, and may even contain a different hierarchy. For example, in an organization that uses matrix reporting, each chart within a project may contain a different project team with its own unique hierarchy.
Directories
Directories provide a tabular list of information for a selected box and its descendants. Clicking a box in the chart displays a directory. Conversely, selecting an entry in a directory locates the corresponding box in the chart. You can use the directory to send an email or you can update data in the directory (in the same way that you edit data in a spreadsheet).
OrgPlus Features
1-17
OrgPlus User Guide
Profiles
The Profile View is a great place to show additional information about a box without cluttering the organizational chart, for example, an employee photo or additional contact information such as mobile phone or pager numbers can be shown in a profile.
1-18
OrgPlus Features
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
Find by Photo and Photo Manager

The Find by Photo feature enables you to find any employee by browsing photo thumbnails. Selecting a photo displays the corresponding box in the chart. Photo Manager intelligently inserts photos into chart boxes. With Photo Manager, the process of managing photos in a chart is almost effortless.
XML Support
Developers can generate XML files that can be loaded directly into OrgViewer. Please contact op.support@orgplus.com for a detailed specification.
Publishing to and Integration with Microsoft Office

OrgPlus is the only organizational charting program that works seamlessly with Microsoft products, such as PowerPoint and Word. Charts can also be embedded in Microsoft products. Embedded charts can be edited via a double click and/or set to automatically update whenever the underlying chart is updated in OrgPlus.
Microsoft Office Toolbar

You can create OrgPlus charts in Microsoft Office applications (Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Visio). The OrgPlus toolbar in Microsoft Office applications enables you to create and edit charts directly in Office documents.
OrgPlus Features
1-19
OrgPlus User Guide
Automation
You can set the Import and Publish processes to run automatically according to a schedule. For example, you can automatically refresh the data every Friday and publish updated charts to established locations on Monday morning.
Web Integration
Posting your charts to the web, your corporate intranet or a shared network drive helps to reduce the involvement of your IT department. Once posted, your charts become a company-wide information source that connects every employee. Anyone with network or intranet access rights can easily view, search and print published charts using OrgPlus Plug-in. If you prefer, you can publish your charts directly to HTML.
Localization
OrgPlus is Unicode enabled; data from almost any language can be imported into OrgPlus.
508 Compliance
OrgPlus desktop products are 508 compliant (U.S. Government standard for designing software to meet the needs of people with disabilities).
1-20
OrgPlus Features
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
OrgPlus Enterprise Integration

The automation features of OrgPlus and Push Data functionality make it easy push charts to OrgPlus Enterprise. See Chapter 11, Automation for more details.
OrgPlus 7 Highlights
Microsoft Vista and Office 2007 Compatibility
OrgPlus 7 is fully compatible with Microsofts latest operating system, Vista, and Microsoft Office 2007. In fact, OrgPlus 7 has earned the Certified for Windows Vista logo. The Certified for Windows Vista logo is a compatibility designation for applications and devices that have passed a rigorous testing program on computers running Windows Vista.
Add Comments
Annotate your organization charts with comments. Comments are useful when collaborating with other OrgPlus users. OrgPlus 7 Reader also supports viewing of comments.
Enhanced HTML Publishing

OrgPlus 7 HTML publishing has been significantly improved. Now with more sophisticated toolbars and panels, sharing your organization charts on the web is easier than ever. HTML publishing includes better printing quality and even optionally allows users to download an OrgPlus project file directly from any HTML page.
1-21
OrgPlus User Guide
Tree Panel
The new tree panel is a fast and easy way to change your organizational structure or edit chart data. Quickly add, delete, and edit records. Move records across departments with ease.
Automatic E-mail Distribution

OrgPlus 7 can automatically email up-to-date published organization charts (PDF, PowerPoint and Word) to a designated list of email recipients on a scheduled basis or at the push of a button. Define different distribution lists per organization chart file, and keep everyone up to date on the latest organization structure additions, changes, and open positions.
1-22
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
Improved Profiles
You can now edit data directly in profiles. You can also navigate from box to box using next and previous buttons. In addition, you can apply conditional formats to fields within profiles to highlight or hide fields as necessary. Conditional formatting in profiles allows you to dynamically format your data to bring attention to certain employee information based on specific conditions. For example, a significantly improved rating can be indicated by a gold star.
Composite Profiles
Combine multiple profile views into a single, multi-tab profile view to provide detailed information about any box. You can also conditionally show or hide any individual profile tabs based on the selected box. For example, show benefits detail only for permanent employees.
Enhanced Chart Printing

OrgPlus 7 printing is better than ever. You now have more control over how master page elements are scaled when printing charts. Make logos and titles the perfect size no matter how much your chart is scaled up or down to fit on a page. Use rulers to save formatting time when outputting to large format printers and plotters.
Improved Templates and Sample Charts

OrgPlus 7 contains new sample charts and chart templates to help you create professional looking charts quickly and easily.
1-23
OrgPlus User Guide
Off-page References
You can now include hyperlinks in your chart that allow you to navigate from any box to another box, sub-chart, chart tab or even to an entirely separate OrgPlus project file.
Sub-chart Arrow Labels

You can label sub-chart arrows with names or numbers to make navigation easier and improve the value of printed and published charts.
Improved Duplicate Reporting Management

You can now include a list of alternate (matrix or dotted-line) managers directly in chart boxes. In addition, OrgPlus 7 also allows you to easily navigate directly to a specific occurrence of an employee that appears multiple times in a chart.
Improved Conditional Formats

With OrgPlus 7 you can define conditional formatting at a more granular level. For example, you can base the box border style on one condition and the border color on another condition.
Automatic Legends
OrgPlus 7 can now automatically create legends from any sub-set of defined conditional formats.
1-24
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
Improved Picture Formatting

OrgPlus 7 gives you more control over picture scaling and even allows you to add borders and shadows to pictures in chart boxes.
Improved Hotspots
OrgPlus 7 improves hotspot interaction. You can edit the data directly in a hotspot. You can also configure a hotspot for an entire box or for just a field in the box.
Rulers and Grids

You can turn on the rulers and grid display to more accurately place free-floating objects such as pictures, shapes, and text in your chart. Rulers allow you to more accurately position chart elements for printed output especially to large format printers and plotters.
Improved Orphan Handling

OrgPlus 7 makes handling orphan records (records that have no or missing reporting relationship), easier than ever. Simply drag your orphan records into the chart and OrgPlus maintains their positioning.
Enhanced Groups
OrgPlus 7 now supports creating groups based off of formula calculations. For example, create a group of all managers with 5 or more direct subordinates.
Improved Formatting for Number Fields

You now have greater control over the formatting of number fields with the ability to specify any number of leading zeros.
Word Wrap Enhancements

OrgPlus now gives you more control over text wrapping and truncation
Shared Conditions
Define conditions once and use them in conditional formats, chart rules, groups and profiles. OrgPlus 7 Highlights 1-25
OrgPlus User Guide
Group Peers
You can group peers automatically during data import. For example, peers can be grouped by title, job code or location.
OrgPlus 7.0.1 Highlights

OrgPlus 7.0.1 contains the following enhancements:
Improved Memory Usage

OrgPlus uses less system memory especially when editing large charts.
Performance Tuning
OrgPlus 7.0.1 is faster than OrgPlus 7.0.
Enhanced Find and Replace

The replace function now allows you to replace blank fields.
OrgPlus 7.1 Highlights

OrgPlus 7.1 contains the following enhancements:
Enhanced Box Sizing

You now have more control over how boxes are sized within your charts. For example, a minimum and maximum width can be specified for any set of boxes within your chart.
Publish Enhancements
OrgPlus now allows you to publish charts directly to PowerPoint 2007 and Word 2007 formats. Publishing to Office 2007 applications is up to 50 times faster than publishing to older versions of Microsoft Office.
Data Import Performance Enhancements

OrgPlus can now be configured to use only the first row of a data source to determine field types. This speeds import for larger data sets.
Improved Control of In-box Picture Sizing

OrgPlus 7.1 provides improved control of sizing of pictures and frames in chart boxes.
Compare Charts Enhancement

You can now include chart comments in your compare charts reports. 1-26 OrgPlus 7.0.1 Highlights
Introduction
CHAPTER 1
Enhanced SAP Import

OrgPlus now supports position to position hierarchies in addition to the existing support for Org Unit to Org Unit hierarchies.
1-27
OrgPlus User Guide
1-28
Chapter 2 Installation and Registration

In this chapter
Overview System Requirements Standard vs. Professional OrgPlus Express Installation Installation Options Starting OrgPlus Customer Support page 2-1 page 2-2 page 2-3 page 2-3 page 2-3 page 2-5 page 2-11 page 2-13
Overview
This chapter covers installing, registering, and starting OrgPlus. If you did not download OrgPlus, your package should contain: OrgPlus CD OrgPlus User Guide (this book) Product Registration Card
2-1
OrgPlus User Guide
System Requirements
Your system must meet the following requirements for OrgPlus to operate properly. Processor: A modern processor (at least 500MHz)
Minimum Memory: For Windows 2000/XP: 256MB For Windows Vista: 512MB (1GB recommended)
Minimum Hard Disk Space: 80MB of free disk space
CD-ROM or DVD Drive: Required to install from CD-ROM
Operating System: Windows 2000 (SP4) Windows XP (SP2) Windows Vista
Environment: Administrator rights required to install OrgPlus Internet connection recommended for product activation
Minimum Graphics Requirements: 1024X768 resolution (1280 x 1024 recommended)
Microsoft Office: Office 2000 (SP3) Office XP (SP3) Office 2003 (SP2) Office 2007
Internet Browser: Internet Explorer 6 Internet Explorer 7
2-2
System Requirements
Installation and Registration

CHAPTER 2
Standard vs. Professional

OrgPlus Professional includes features that are not available in OrgPlus Standard. The following functions are available only with an OrgPlus Professional license: Import: The ability to import data from external files or databases. Publish: The ability to publish charts to other formats including PDF, PowerPoint, Word, HTML, and OrgPlus Plug-in. Automation: The ability to schedule data refresh and chart publishing to automate chart distribution.
The maximum number of records that can be imported into OrgPlus is determined by the license purchased.
OrgPlus Express
OrgPlus Express is intended for users who need to create single page charts within Microsoft Office applications (Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Visio). OrgPlus Express is the clear choice for users dissatisfied with the limited organizational charting capabilities that Microsoft Office applications offer. OrgPlus Express can be used only from within Microsoft Office applications and has a limited set of features. Users who have more sophisticated charting needs or who need to create larger charts should consider OrgPlus Standard or Professional.
Installation
In order to use OrgPlus you must install it on your hard disk. You cannot run OrgPlus directly from your original OrgPlus CD. You can copy the OrgPlus setup file to a network drive, if you intend to install on multiple computers. After installing OrgPlus, you must register and unlock the application before you can start using it.
Standard vs. Professional
2-3
OrgPlus User Guide
To install OrgPlus from the CD:

1 Insert the OrgPlus CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation does not start automatically, click Run in the Windows Start menu and enter D:\OrgPlus\Setup (where D is the letter of your CD-ROM drive) and then press the Enter key to display the OrgPlus Setup dialog box.
Click Next and follow the instructions displayed in each dialog box presented by the installer. Proceed through each step, then click Finish to complete the installation.
You have now installed OrgPlus on your system. Store the original OrgPlus CD in a safe place in case you have to reinstall.
To install OrgPlus from a network:

1 2 3 If you have an OrgPlus CD, copy the CD to a directory on your server. Navigate to the folder containing OrgPlus and double-click the setup.exe file. Follow the installation instructions described in the previous procedure.
2-4
Installation

CHAPTER 2
Installation Options
By default, the OrgPlus installation process adds the OrgPlus Toolbar to your Microsoft Office applicationsWord, Excel, PowerPoint, Visioenabling you to create OrgPlus charts from within Microsoft Office applications. You can turn this feature off during installation by turning off the Enable OrgPlus Toolbar in MS Office Applications checkbox.
Installation
2-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Registration
When you first launch OrgPlus, you will be prompted to register: If you purchased your copy of OrgPlus from HumanConcepts, proceed to the section, If you purchased OrgPlus directly from HumanConcepts on page 2-7. If you purchased your copy of OrgPlus from any other Vendor and have Internet connectivity, you are prompted to register online. Proceed to the section If you purchased OrgPlus from any other Vendor on page 2-8. If you do not have Internet connectivity, you can register by email, fax, or phone. For more information on these registration options, see Appendix E, Offline Registration. Registered users receive product update notifications and other important OrgPlus announcements. Frequently Asked Questions about Registration on page 2-10 provides solutions to problems you may experience while registering OrgPlus.
2-6
Registration

CHAPTER 2
If you purchased OrgPlus directly from HumanConcepts

This section describes how to unlock OrgPlus using the Unlock Code that is included on the invoice sent to the email address you provided when you ordered OrgPlus.
To unlock OrgPlus:
1 Double-click the OrgPlus icon on your desktop to display the Unlock/Register OrgPlus dialog box.
2 3 4
Enter your Unlock Code in the Unlock/Product Code field. Enter your email address in the Email field. Click Next. If you entered the code correctly, you will be informed that you have successfully unlocked OrgPlus. Click Close to begin using OrgPlus. Note: If you do not enter the same email address entered at the time of purchase, you are prompted to enter registration information. You are also prompted to enter a password for your HumanConcepts account.
Registration
2-7
OrgPlus User Guide
If you purchased OrgPlus from any other Vendor

This section describes the online registration process for OrgPlus when purchased from a vendor other than HumanConcepts. The Product Code is located on the Registration Information card. OrgPlus may not be able to access the Internet (for example, if you are behind a firewall). If this happens, see Appendix E, Offline Registration.
To register and unlock OrgPlus:

1 Double-click the OrgPlus icon on your desktop to display the Unlock/Register OrgPlus dialog box.
2-8
Registration

CHAPTER 2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Enter your Product Code in the Unlock/Product Code field. Enter your email address in the Email field. Click Next. You are prompted to enter a password for your HumanConcepts account. Enter and confirm the password then click OK. Click Next. Enter the requested registration information and click Next after you complete each page. Fields marked with an asterisk * are required. After receiving your registration information, we will e-mail you an Unlock Code. After you receive the e-mail, click Close to display the Enter Your Unlock Code dialog box.
Enter the Unlock Code (from the e-mail) and click Next. If you entered the code correctly, you will be informed that you have successfully unlocked OrgPlus. Click Close to begin using OrgPlus.
Registration
2-9
OrgPlus User Guide
Frequently Asked Questions about Registration

What is a Product Code or an Unlock Code? The Product Code tells HumanConcepts which version of the software you purchased. The Unlock Code is used to unlock the software for use. If you purchased directly from HumanConcepts, you do not need a Product Code. Where is my Product Code? If you purchased directly from HumanConcepts, you do not have or need a Product Code. If you purchased from any other vendor, your Product Code is located on a sticker on the front of the Registration Information Card. Where is my Unlock Code? When you purchase directly from HumanConcepts, your Unlock Code is noted on your invoice (a link to your invoice can be found in the order confirmation email). If you purchased OrgPlus through a third-party, the Unlock Code will be sent to you via email when you register OrgPlus. I thought I already registered. Why dont you have my information? Our registration system uses your email address to locate your information. If you have changed email addresses or you registered more than two years ago, you will need to re-register. I received a message that I cannot connect to the OrgPlus server. The most common reason for this is due to a corporate firewall. You can register via email by selecting Register by email in the Registration Options dialog box. As a last resort you can contact support for assistance at www.orgplus.com/support/. I faxed in my registration information. I havent had a response. Please allow 2 business days for responses to fax registration requests. Our company procurement agent bought the software. I dont have the Unlock Code or the Product Code. You need to obtain the Unlock Code from the individual whose email address was used during the ordering process. If your company purchased OrgPlus from a third-party dealer, the Product Code is located on the Registration Information Card.
2-10
Registration

CHAPTER 2
My Unlock Code or Product Code doesnt work. Please contact support for assistance at www.orgplus.com/support/.
Starting OrgPlus
In this section
Launching OrgPlus Learning OrgPlus OrgPlus Help page 2-11 page 2-11 page 2-12
Launching OrgPlus
To start OrgPlus and begin working on a chart:
Select All Programs | HumanConcepts | OrgPlus 7 from the windows Start menu. Or Double-click the OrgPlus icon on your desktop.
Learning OrgPlus
We recommend the following approach: Go through Chapter 3, Tutorials. Each tutorial takes about 20 minutes. Use Appendix A, Window Structure and Command Reference, to familiarize yourself with the OrgPlus menus and toolbars. Look at some of the sample charts by selecting Welcome to OrgPlus from the Help menu. Start making charts! For more information see Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Charting. Use the online resource center at www.orgplus.com/support/.
Starting OrgPlus
2-11
OrgPlus User Guide
OrgPlus Help
Use the Help menu to access the following help options: Help Menu Item Index Keyboard Commands Description Display the Help Index. (F1) Display a list of hot keys and their functions. Display information about menu commands and toolbar buttons. Display instructions for using the Help system. Display the Welcome panel, which provides access to sample files and useful links for first time users. Display online documentation to help with evaluation, installation, training, and support. Display an online guided tour. Display online tutorials. Access the online store.
Using Help Welcome to OrgPlus
Resource Center
OrgPlus Guided Tour OrgPlus Tutorials Upgrade Your OrgPlus OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted Support System Info
Access online technical support.
Display information about your computer system. This information helps us provide you with technical support. Display information about which version of OrgPlus you are using.
About OrgPlus
2-12
Starting OrgPlus

CHAPTER 2
Customer Support
In this section
Technical Support Checklist Electronic Support Standard 90-Day Technical Support from HumanConcepts Online Store page 2-13 page 2-14 page 2-14 page 2-15
Technical Support Checklist

For the fastest response to your technical questions, complete the following checklist before you contact HumanConcepts Technical Support: Before calling, please check the User Guide. Be ready to tell the technician what youve tried. Record the exact sequence of events that created the problem. Make sure that you can reproduce the problem by following the same series of steps. Know the results of any steps you have undertaken to solve the problem. Record the exact wording of any error messages. Be sure to give your name and return email address or fax number if you prefer a reply via email or fax. If you are phoning, make sure you have access to your computer. Be ready to supply the product name and version. (Select About OrgPlus from the Help menu.) Be ready to supply the system information. (Select System Info from the Help menu.)
Customer Support
2-13
OrgPlus User Guide
Electronic Support
Electronic support is available 24 hours a day, free of charge, on the HumanConcepts Web site. You can access the Web site in the following ways: From the OrgPlus main window: Select OrgPlus Online Support from the Help menu. Via the Web browser at: www.orgplus.com/support/.
Links to a variety of self-service tools and product support options are offered to assist you with OrgPlus, including: Frequently Asked Questions Product Support Forums Knowledge Base Software Installation Instructions Quick Start Guide On-line Registration Customer Support
Standard 90-Day Technical Support from HumanConcepts

You can obtain no-charge technical support in North America for 90 days after purchase via a phone call. If you are located outside the North America please visit our Web site for country-specific contact information. Technical Support hours are from 8:30 a.m. to 8:30 p.m. Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. All calls after the 90-day period are on a pay basis. A variety of support plans are available. Service Via World Wide Web Mailing Address Address/number www.orgplus.com/support/ HumanConcepts 3 Harbor Drive, Suite 200 Sausalito, CA 94965 USA 1-415332-3030 1-415332-1010
Phone Number Fax Number
2-14
Customer Support

CHAPTER 2
Online Store
Our online store is open 24 hours a day/7 days a week. You can contact our sales team from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Pacific Time (GMT 8.00), Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. Service Via Sales Address/number 1-415332-3030 (Please call this number for pricing, product information or replacement disks.) Sales Inquiries Online Store General Information sales@orgplus.com store.orgplus.com www.orgplus.com
Customer Support
2-15
OrgPlus User Guide
2-16
Customer Support
Chapter 3 Tutorials
In this chapter
Overview Tutorial 1: Creating Basic Charts Tutorial 2: Formatting and Printing Charts Tutorial 3: Using Directories, Reports and Profiles Tutorial 4: Working with Sub-Charts Tutorial 5: Creating Charts from External Data Tutorial 6: Publishing Charts page 3-2 page 3-2 page 3-9 page 3-16 page 3-27 page 3-31 page 3-38
3-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Overview
This chapter provides step-by-step tutorials that show you how to create charts, starting with a very basic chart and then building up to the more complex charts. Three versions of the desktop product are available: OrgPlus Express OrgPlus Standard OrgPlus Professional
Tutorials 1 and 2 are intended for use with all OrgPlus desktop products. Tutorials 3 and 4 are for use only with OrgPlus Standard and Professional. Tutorials 5 and 6 show you how to use the more advanced features of OrgPlus that are available only in OrgPlus Professional. General Note: For ease of explanation, the procedure steps are numbered consecutively within each tutorial, continuing to increment from procedure to procedure.
Tutorial 1: Creating Basic Charts

In this tutorial you will learn how to create a chart.
In this tutorial
Creating New Charts Entering Field Information Adding and Deleting Boxes Changing Branch Styles Saving your Work page 3-2 page 3-4 page 3-5 page 3-7 page 3-8
Tip: You can press the <F1> key at any time for application help.
Creating New Charts

Charts can be created directly in OrgPlus or from within Microsoft Office products (Word, Visio, Excel and PowerPoint). OrgPlus Express users can create charts ONLY from within Microsoft Office products. If you are an OrgPlus Express user or you want to create charts within an Microsoft Office application please start this tutorial with step 4 on page 3-3.
3-2
Overview
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
If OrgPlus is not already running, double-click the OrgPlus 7 icon desktop or from the Windows Start menu select: All Programs | HumanConcepts | OrgPlus 7
on your
Select New from the File menu to display the New Project dialog box.
Select Blank from the list of templates and click OK. You can also try selecting one of the other chart templates. The OrgPlus main window displays a blank chart. Continue with step 6 in the section Entering Field Information on page 3-4.
Alternately, to create a chart in a Microsoft Office application, launch Microsoft Word (or any other Microsoft Office application) and click the New Chart icon on the toolbar.
3-3
OrgPlus User Guide
The Microsoft Office application (in this tutorial Microsoft Word) opens and displays a new chart.
Note: In Microsoft Office 2003 and earlier, the OrgPlus toolbar appears automatically if you selected that option at installation. To display the OrgPlus toolbar icons in Microsoft Office 2007, select the Add-Ins Tab. 5 Double-click the chart to edit it in OrgPlus.
Entering Field Information

When you start a new project in OrgPlus, a single box appears on the screen. You will now enter some information into it. 6 7 8 Click the Select tool Select the topmost box. Click the box again to edit the contents. Click <Name> if it is not already highlighted and type Chris Phillips. .
3-4
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
Click <Title> and type President and CEO.
Tip: Use the <Tab> key to advance to the next field.
Adding and Deleting Boxes

To add boxes to your chart, select the type of box you want to add from the Insert toolbar (on the left), then click any existing box. There are five types of boxes:
Subordinate Left Co-Worker Right Co-Worker Manager Assistant
Adding Assistants
10 Select the Assistant tool an assistant.
,
then select the box containing Chris Philips to add
3-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Adding Subordinates
11 Select the Subordinate tool add a subordinate. and select the box containing Chris Philips to
12 Click the Select tool
13 Select the box you just created. 14 Click the box again to edit the contents. Click <Name> if it is not already highlighted and type Lynn Brewer. 15 Click <Title> and type CFO. 16 Select the Right co-worker tool , and then click four times on the box containing Lynn Brewer. Four co-worker boxes are added.
Tips: The Left co-worker tool The Manager tool adds boxes to the left of the selected box.
creates a Manager box directly above the selected box.
Deleting Boxes
17 Click the Select tool .
3-6
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
18 Select one of the subordinate boxes that you just created. 19 Press <Delete> to delete the selected box..
Adding More Boxes

20 Add subordinates using the Subordinate tool diagram. , as shown in the following
Changing Branch Styles

You may want to change the branch style for aesthetic or space reasons. OrgPlus offers a large variety of branch styles, which can be applied to any branch in your chart or the entire chart. 21 Make sure the Select tool is selected.
22 Select Lynn Brewers subordinates by double-clicking on one of the boxes containing Lynns subordinates.
23 Click the Styles button Tutorial 1: Creating Basic Charts
at the bottom of the window. 3-7
OrgPlus User Guide
24 Select
(one column vertical style).
The boxes under Lynn Brewer are reformatted as shown below:
Select other sets of subordinates by double clicking them and then change their styles to match the diagram below. Remember to use the Styles button subordinates has been selected. to change the style once a set of
25 Optionally you can enter the names and titles as shown above.
Saving your Work

You should save your work periodically. 26 Select Save from the File menu.
3-8
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
If your chart is embedded in a Microsoft Office document, click the Save at the top of the Microsoft Office application.
icon
If you have never saved the current chart before, a Save As dialog box appears. Enter a file name and click Save. Congratulations! You have completed Tutorial 1.
Tutorial 2: Formatting and Printing Charts

In this tutorial, you will learn how to create the following chart. To create this chart you will have to define an additional field (beyond name and title) and you will also need to use box and chart formatting options.
In this tutorial
Opening an Existing Chart Formatting Boxes Adding Fields Displaying Fields Adding Chart Titles Printing Charts page 3-10 page 3-10 page 3-12 page 3-13 page 3-15 page 3-15
3-9
OrgPlus User Guide
Opening an Existing Chart

To save time open an existing unformatted chart. Charts can be edited directly in OrgPlus or from within Microsoft Office products (Word, Visio, Excel, and PowerPoint). 1 Select Open from the File menu to display the Open dialog box.
Select the file Tutorial2.opx and then click Open. Note: If you do not see the My Charts directory, click the My Documents icon on the left side of the dialog box and then double-click the My Charts folder. Continue with step 3 in the section Formatting Boxes on page 3-10.
Formatting Boxes
You can format any box in a chart. 3 Using the Select tool, select the box containing Chris Philips.
Select Box Properties from the Format menu.
3-10
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
Make sure the Color and Lines tab is selected. Select the Fill Color and Border Style shown below, and then click OK.
Select the executive team by double-clicking on any of the Level 2 boxes.
Select Box Properties from the Format menu.
3-11
OrgPlus User Guide
Make sure the Color and Lines tab is selected. Select the Box Shape, Color and Border style as shown below, and then click OK.
Now, try to set the format for Corinne Spear to match the format shown below.
Adding Fields
You can add additional fields to your charts at any time. In this exercise you will add an Org Unit field. 10 Click the Define Fields tool 11 Click Add to add a new field. or select Define Fields from the Data menu.
3-12
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
12 Type Org Unit.
13 Click OK. You will be prompted to add the new field to all boxes. 14 Click No. You want to only display the new field in the boxes representing the executive team.
Displaying Fields
In order to show the Org Unit field in the executive teams boxes, you will use the Layout tab in the Box Properties dialog box. 15 Select the executive team by double-clicking on any of the Level 2 boxes.
3-13
OrgPlus User Guide
16 Click the Box Layout tool or select Box Properties from the Format menu and then select the Box Layout tab.
17 Drag the Org Unit field to just below the Title field. Wait until you see the symbol before releasing the mouse button.
Note: If you want to remove a field from a box, drag the field out of the box (shown in the Box Layout tab) and back into the field list. 18 Select the Line tool
.
3-14
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
19 Position the cursor between the Title and Org Unit rows. The cursor changes to a symbol. Click to place the line.
20 Click OK. Notice that the Org Unit field is added to the selected boxes. 21 Type the Org Unit field in each box as follows:
Adding Chart Titles

Each chart contains a Title area. 22 Highlight the chart title, Tutorial 2. 23 Use the Text toolbar to set font, font size, font style, and font color. Select the settings shown below.
Printing Charts
You must have a configured local or network printer in order to perform this step. 24 Select Print from the File menu to display the Print dialog box. 25 Click OK to print. Note: OrgPlus Express users can only print from within Microsoft Office applications. Congratulations! You have completed Tutorial 2.
3-15
OrgPlus User Guide
Tutorial 3: Using Directories, Reports and Profiles

In this tutorial you will learn how to create and use directories, reports and profiles.
In this tutorial
Opening Charts Working with Directories Working with Reports Working with Profiles page 3-16 page 3-16 page 3-20 page 3-24
Opening Charts
To save time you will open an existing chart. 1 2 Select Open from the File menu. Select the file Tutorial3.opx, and click Open. Note: If you do not see the My Charts directory, click the My Documents icon on the left side of the dialog box and then double-click the My Charts folder.
Working with Directories

First you have to create a directory. 3 4 Select Directory from the View menu. Click the link Click here to create a Directory to display the Directory Settings dialog box.
3-16
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
Note: For this tutorial you are going to use the default Directory formatting. 5 Type Contact Info into the Directory name field.
3-17
OrgPlus User Guide
By default OrgPlus includes all fields when you create a new directory. In this exercise you are going to create a directory that does not include salary and employee type information. Select Salary and click Remove. Then select Employee Type and click Remove.
Click OK.
Displaying Directories
You can use a directory to display chart information in a tabular format. 8 9 Click the Select tool .
Select the box containing Chris Philips.
3-18
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
The Directory panel displays a directory containing Chris Philips and all his subordinates. Click other boxes in the chart to dynamically update the directory.
Editing Chart Contents using the Directory

You can edit chart data using the directory. 10 Select the box containing Chris Philips. Notice that the corresponding directory entry is also selected.
3-19
OrgPlus User Guide
11 Now locate the row in the directory containing Sue Watkins. Click the cell containing Sue Watkins, and type Tom Wilson.
Notice that the corresponding box in the chart is also changed.
Working with Reports

The following exercises will show you how to create reports. 12 Select Reports from the View menu. 13 Click the link Click here to create a Report to display the Report Settings dialog box.
14 Type Salary Report into the Report name field. 3-20 Tutorial 3: Using Directories, Reports and Profiles
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
15 Select Name and click the Add button. 16 Select Title and click the Add button. 17 Select Salary and click the Add button.
18 Select the Report Summary tab and then select the Salary checkbox. This will add a salary total to your report.
3-21
OrgPlus User Guide
19 Click OK.
Displaying Reports
You can now create a dynamic report based by selecting boxes. 20 Select the box containing Becci Seuberling. The Salary Report for Becci's team appears in the Reports panel. Click other boxes in the chart to see other dynamic reports.
3-22
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
Exporting Report Data

You can export a report to a spreadsheet. 21 Select the box containing Becci Seuberling, then click the Export to Excel button .
OrgPlus creates an Excel spreadsheet containing the report information.
3-23
OrgPlus User Guide
Working with Profiles

The following exercises show you how to create and display a profile. 22 Select Profile from the View menu. 23 Click the link Click here to create a Profile to display the Profile Settings dialog box.
24 Type Employee Detail into the Profile Name field. 25 Select Salary and click Remove.
3-24
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
26 Select Employee Type and click Remove.
27 Click OK.
3-25
OrgPlus User Guide
Using Profiles
This exercise shows how to display additional information about a selected box using the profile you just created. 28 Select any box in the chart. Notice that the Profile panel displays employee detail for that box.
Congratulations! You have completed Tutorial 3.
3-26
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
Tutorial 4: Working with Sub-Charts

In this tutorial you will learn how to divide a large chart into sub-charts. As you can see from the following picture, sub-charts provide a mechanism that makes it easier to distribute and visualize large amounts of data.
In this tutorial
Opening Charts Creating Sub-charts Navigating within Sub-charts Inserting or Removing Sub-chart Breaks page 3-27 page 3-28 page 3-29 page 3-30
Opening Charts
To save time you will open an existing chart. 1 2 Select Open from the File menu. Select the file Tutorial4.opx and click Open.
3-27
OrgPlus User Guide
Note: If you do not see the My Charts directory, click the My Documents icon on the left side of the dialog box and then double-click the My Charts folder.
Creating Sub-charts
You will now divide the chart into sub-charts. 3 Select Sub-chart | Create Sub-charts from the Insert menu to display the Create Sub-charts dialog box.
4 5 6
Select Using Field and select Department from the drop-down list. Select From Field and select Department from the drop-down list. Click OK. OrgPlus displays the first page of the chart showing only the executive team. Notice the sub-chart navigation arrows at the bottom of each second-level box.
3-28
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
Navigating within Sub-charts

You can navigate within the sub-charts using sub-chart navigation arrows or the Sub-charts panel. 7 Navigate up or down your chart hierarchy by clicking on any sub-chart arrow ( or ).
3-29
OrgPlus User Guide
Select Sub-charts from the View menu to display the Sub-charts panel. Click any entry in the Sub-charts panel to display the corresponding sub-chart.
Inserting or Removing Sub-chart Breaks

You can also insert or remove sub-charts manually. 9 Select the Finance sub-chart from the Sub-charts panel.
10 Select the box containing Aaron Lyon.
3-30
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
11 Select Sub-chart | Insert Sub-chart Break from the Insert menu. Notice that Aaron Lyon's team now appears in a separate sub-chart.
12 To remove the sub-chart break you just created, select the box containing Aaron Lyon. 13 Select the Sub-chart | Remove Sub-chart Break menu Insert. Notice that Aaron Lyons team is now recombined with its parent sub-chart. Congratulations! You have completed Tutorial 4.
Tutorial 5: Creating Charts from External Data

In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Build a new chart from data imported from an external source. In this tutorial you will use a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Apply a template to a chart to achieve a professional look. Refresh (re-import) a chart data from an external data source. Refreshing allows you to keep a chart in sync with its underlying external data source.
In this tutorial you will use the spreadsheet, Tutorial5.xls.
In this tutorial
Using the Import Wizard Applying Templates Saving Imported Charts Refreshing Charts page 3-32 page 3-36 page 3-37 page 3-37
3-31
OrgPlus User Guide
Using the Import Wizard

In this exercise you will build a chart from imported data. 1 Select Import Data from the File menu to display the Select Data Source dialog box.
Note: If you do not see the My Charts directory, click the Human Concepts icon in the left margin, then select the Documents file folder then the My Documents icon. 2 Select the Tutorial5.xls file and click Open.
3-32
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
OrgPlus displays the Import Wizard XLS Sheet Selection dialog.
This dialog box allows you to select a worksheet within the Excel file (Sheet1, Sheet2, or Sheet3) and to specify whether the first row of data contains column names or data records.
3-33
OrgPlus User Guide
Click Next to display the Import Wizard - Data Settings dialog box.
This dialog box enables you to define settings associated with each field in your import file. You can choose whether to include or exclude a field from your chart (gray columns are excluded). You can rename a field, or specify field settings such as whether a field represents a hyperlink.
3-34
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
Click Next to display the Import Wizard - Verify Hierarchy dialog box.
This dialog box allows you to verify that your chart hierarchy will be created properly. In order to build a chart from imported data, OrgPlus requires two fields: a Position field, which uniquely identifies each box, and a Reports To field, which tells OrgPlus to whom the box reports. OrgPlus automatically identifies the fields to be used as Position and Reports To. However, you can use this window to verify that the correct fields have been chosen and that there are no errors in the source data. 5 6 Click Finish to complete the data import. You will be prompted to sub-chart. Click No.
3-35
OrgPlus User Guide
OrgPlus displays the chart you have created:
Applying Templates
You can automatically format your chart using one of the included templates. 7 If the templates panel is not displayed, select Templates from the View menu.
Drag any design template into the chart. OrgPlus immediately applies the template formatting to the chart.
3-36
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
Saving Imported Charts

You must save your chart after importing. 9 Select Save from the File menu to display the Save As dialog box.
10 Enter the file name myImportedChart then click Save.
Refreshing Charts
Any chart that was generated from an external data source using the Import wizard can be refreshed (re-imported) from the original source. Note: You will need Microsoft Excel installed on your computer to complete this exercise. 11 Use Microsoft Excel to open Tutorial5.xls. The file is located in the My Document/My Charts folder. 12 In this worksheet, delete the row containing Tina Nomura. (Click row 5, as indicated, and select Delete from the Edit Menu).
13 Now save and close the spreadsheet. (Select Save from the File menu and then Close from the File menu.) 14 In OrgPlus, select Refresh Data from the Data menu. You will be prompted to continue. Click Yes. 15 When the refresh is complete, you will be prompted to view a log of the changes. Click No.
3-37
OrgPlus User Guide
A look at the newly refreshed chart confirms that the change was made. (The box containing Tina Nomura was removed from the chart.)
Tutorial 6: Publishing Charts

OrgPlus enables you to publish your chart to Microsoft PowerPoint, Microsoft Word, HTML, Adobe PDF, directly to a printer, or to our OrgPlus browser Plug-in. In this tutorial you will learn how to publish to OrgPlus Plug-in and PowerPoint.
In this tutorial
Opening Charts Publishing to the OrgPlus Publishing to PowerPoint page 3-38 page 3-39 page 3-41
Opening Charts
To save time you will open an existing chart. 1 2 3-38 Select Open from the File menu. Select the file Tutorial6.opx and click Open. Tutorial 6: Publishing Charts
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
Note: If you do not see the My Charts directory, click the My Documents icon on the left side of the dialog box and then double-click the My Charts folder.
Publishing to the OrgPlus Plug-in

The OrgPlus Plug-in is a free browser Plug-in, which enables anyone with a network or intranet to easily view, search and print published charts. 3 Select Publish To | OrgPlus Plug-in from the File menu. OrgPlus displays the Publish Option Page dialog box.
In this exercise, the default options are not changed. You can try republishing with different options.
3-39
OrgPlus User Guide
Click Next on each page and click Finish on the last page. OrgPlus generates and opens the Plug-in file for viewing.
3-40
Tutorials
CHAPTER 3
Publishing to PowerPoint
OrgPlus is the only organizational charting program that works seamlessly with Microsoft products such as PowerPoint or Word. You can embed charts in Microsoft products and edit them by double-clicking. You can also configure them to update automatically whenever you update the underlying chart in OrgPlus. 1 Select Publish To| PowerPoint from the File menu. OrgPlus displays the Publish Option Page dialog box.
In this exercise, the options are not changed. You can try republishing with different options.
3-41
OrgPlus User Guide
Click Next on each page and then Finish on the last page.
3-42
Chapter 4 Working with Charts: Basic Charting

In this chapter
Overview Opening Projects Creating Projects Saving and Closing Projects Adding and Deleting Boxes Selecting Objects Moving Objects Entering Field Information Defining and Displaying Fields Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures Formatting Charts Applying Chart Styles Quick Chart Panel Using Cut/Copy/Paste Printing Page 4-1 Page 4-2 Page 4-2 Page 4-4 Page 4-6 Page 4-7 Page 4-12 Page 4-15 Page 4-17 Page 4-35 Page 4-49 Page 4-54 Page 4-58 Page 4-64 Page 4-65
Overview
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of basic chart operations. After reviewing this chapter you will be able to create a new chart, open a chart, save a chart, select and move chart elements, and use cut, copy, and paste change your charts. Functionality is described in progressive steps. For example, you will learn how to add boxes to a chart, how to add and remove fields in those boxes, and how to format those boxes.
4-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Opening Projects
This section describes how to open an existing project for viewing or editing.
To open an existing project:

1 2 Select Open from the File menu. Choose a file and click Open to display its contents in an OrgPlus window.
Opening Projects from Earlier Versions in OrgPlus 7

OrgPlus 7 has backwards compatibility with earlier versions of OrgPlus. When you open a project saved in an earlier version, OrgPlus 7 automatically converts it to an OrgPlus 7 file. OrgPlus 7 saves files in versions 5, 6, or 7, but it open projects created with versions earlier than version 4.
Creating Projects
This section describes how to create a new project and begins with a brief overview of key concepts that you must understand in order to create a new project. This is followed by a detailed description of chart creation techniques.
In this section
Understanding Projects, Charts, and Templates Creating New Projects page 4-2 page 4-3
Understanding Projects, Charts, and Templates

The following is a brief overview of some of the concepts used in OrgPlus.
About Projects and Charts

An OrgPlus project contains one or more charts stored on disk as a single file. Multiple charts per project allow you to create different views of the same data. For example, one chart within a project could show the current structure of an organization while another chart could display the proposed structure of an organization.
About Templates
A template defines all the formatting parameters for a chart. Applying a template sets the formats for chart elements, such as boxes and lines. Using templates saves you the effort of formatting each individual chart element. Using templates in OrgPlus is similar to using templates in Microsoft PowerPoint or Word.
4-2
Opening Projects
Working with Charts: Basic Charting

CHAPTER 4
About the File Formats Used by OrgPlus

The following file types are used by OrgPlus 7: Extension .opx .opxt .ovx Description OrgPlus 7 Project File OrgPlus 7 Template File OrgPlus 7 Plug-in (browser Plug-in file)
The following file types can be opened in OrgPlus 7: Extension .opx .opxt .ovx Description OrgPlus 4/5/6 Project Files OrgPlus 5/6 Template Files OrgPlus 6 Plug-in Files
Note: OrgPlus 7 files cannot be opened using an older version of OrgPlus.
Creating New Projects

When you create a new project, you can select a template or just create a blank project.
To create a new project:

1 Select New from the File menu to display the New Project dialog box.
Choose a template. The Preview pane of the dialog box displays an example of the selected template. 4-3
Creating Projects
OrgPlus User Guide
Note: Click the New from file button to browse for OrgPlus files or templates that are not shown in the New Project dialog box. 3 Click OK to create a new project using the selected template.
Note: You can also click the Create Blank Project button project.
to create a new
Saving and Closing Projects

This section describes how to save and close projects.
In this section
Saving Your Work Closing Projects page 4-4 page 4-6
Saving Your Work

You should periodically save your work.
To save changes:
4-4 At any time, select Save from the File menu. Saving and Closing Projects

CHAPTER 4
Note: If you have not previously saved the current chart, a Save As dialog box is displayed. Enter the file name and then click Save.
To save a copy of your project:

1 2 3 4 Select Save As from the File menu. The Save As dialog box is displayed. Navigate to the folder where you want to save your file. Enter the file name in the File Name field. Click Save. The file is saved. Note: You can save your chart in various file formats. Select Save As from the File menu and use the Save as type drop-down list. The following options are available: OrgPlus 7 File OrgPlus 7 Template File OrgPlus 6 File OrgPlus 6 Template File OrgPlus 5 File OrgPlus 5 Template File OrgPlus XML HTML Document JPEG File TIFF File GIF File PNG File Windows Bitmap Windows Metafile Windows Enhanced Metafile Note: Saving an OrgPlus 7 file as an OrgPlus 6, OrgPlus 5, or XML file may result in loss of elements associated with new application features such as comments and e-mail categories. Note: You can save a sub-set of your project. Select Save As from the File menu and use the Save what drop-down list. Select from the following options: Project (default): Saves the entire project. Chart: Saves only the current chart, as identified by the Chart tab.
Saving and Closing Projects
4-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Sub-chart: Saves only the currently displayed sub-chart. Selection: Saves only the selected elements from the currently displayed chart (for example, selected boxes).
Closing Projects
This section describes how to close the current project.
To close projects:
Select Close from the File menu. If any changes were made to the project since it was last saved, you are prompted to save before closing.

Boxes are the building blocks of a chart. OrgPlus automatically draws the connecting lines between boxes.
In this section
Adding Boxes Deleting Boxes page 4-6 page 4-7
Adding Boxes
Use one of the insert box tools to add boxes to your chart.
To add a new box:

1 Choose one of the following insert box tools. Manager: Adds a manager above the selected box. Assistant: Adds an assistant below the selected box. Subordinate: Adds a subordinate below the selected box. Peer - Left Co-worker: Adds a co-worker to the left of the selected box. Peer - Right Co-worker: Adds a co-worker to the right of the selected box. 2 Move the mouse pointer over the box to which the new box is to be attached. Notice that the mouse pointer changes to indicate how the new box will be attached. Click the box.
4-6

CHAPTER 4
Note: You can add multiple boxes to a chart by clicking an insert box tool multiple times and then adding boxes as described above.
Deleting Boxes
You can delete unwanted boxes.
To delete a box:
1 2 3 4 Click the Select tool .
Move the mouse pointer over the box you want to delete. Click the box. Press <Delete>.
Selecting Objects
This section describes how to select objects. You can select sets of objects or fields. You can apply changes to your selected set. For example, you can change the border style for all selected boxes.
In this section
Selecting Boxes Selecting Connecting Lines Selecting All Objects of the Same Type Selecting Fields Selecting Levels page 4-8 page 4-7 page 4-9 page 4-9 page 4-10
Selecting Objects
4-7
OrgPlus User Guide
Selecting Boxes
This section describes how to select boxes. You must select boxes before you can change their formatting or content.
To select boxes:
Click an individual box. Use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple boxes. Or Use Select, Select Fields, Select Levels, or Find from the Edit menu. Or Use the mouse to drag a rectangle around all the boxes you want to select.
Note: Right-click any box and choose Select Boxes with Similar Formatting from the context menu to quickly select all boxes on the page that have the same format.
Selecting Connecting Lines

OrgPlus automatically draws the connecting lines between boxes. You can select connecting lines in order to apply formatting, or to hide or show lines between specific boxes.
To select connecting lines:

Click individual lines to select. Use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple lines. Or Select Select | All Connecting Lines from the Edit menu to select all connecting lines in the chart. Or Select Select | All Hidden Connecting Lines from the Edit menu to select all hidden connecting lines in the chart. Or Use the mouse to drag a rectangle around all the desired connecting lines.
4-8
Selecting Objects

CHAPTER 4
Selecting All Objects of the Same Type

You can select the following sets of objects: All: Selects all objects. All Assistants: Selects all assistant boxes. All Co-managers: Selects all boxes that share the same subordinates. All Managers: Selects all boxes to which subordinate or assistant boxes are attached. All Non-managers: Selects all non-manager boxes. Direct Reports: Select the boxes at the level immediately below the selected box. Peers: Selects the boxes at the same level as the selected position, which report to the same manager. Branch: Selects all boxes that are descendants of the selected box, as well as that box. Lowest Level: Selects all boxes that are on the lowest displayed level. All Locked Boxes: Selects all boxes that are marked as locked. All Hidden Boxes: Selects all boxes that are hidden. All Connecting Lines: Select all connecting lines between boxes. All Hidden Connecting Lines: Selects all the hidden connecting lines. All Free Floating Objects: Selects all the free floating objects. All Anchored Objects: Selects all the free floating objects that are anchored to boxes. All Multi-record boxes: Select all boxes that are formatted as multi-record boxes. All Single record boxes: Select all boxes that are not formatted as multirecord boxes.
To select a set of objects:

Choose Select | <Choose an option> from the Edit menu.
Selecting Fields
OrgPlus enables you to select boxes and fields.
To select fields in all boxes:

1 Choose Select Fields from the Edit menu to display the Select Fields dialog box.
Selecting Objects
4-9
OrgPlus User Guide
2 3
Select by clicking the checkboxes to the left of the fields or use the Check All button to select all fields. Click OK to highlight the selected fields in the chart, as shown in the following example. Any formatting changes you make, such as font style or size, apply to the all the selected fields.
To select any field in the boxes:

Click the Select Field tool then select fields by clicking within boxes. Fields become highlighted as you select them. Use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to make multiple selections.
Selecting Levels
You can select all the boxes on a level.
To select boxes on a level:

1 Choose Select Levels from the Edit menu to display the Levels to Select dialog box.
4-10
Selecting Objects

CHAPTER 4
2 3
Select levels by selecting the checkbox to the left of each level or use the Check All button to select all levels. Click OK to select the boxes on the specified levels. In the following example, Level 2 is selected.
Selecting Objects
4-11
OrgPlus User Guide
Moving Objects
This section describes the various methods of moving objects.
In this section
Moving Boxes by Dragging and Dropping Moving Free Objects by Dragging and Dropping Free Dragging Boxes page 4-12 page 4-13 Page 4-13
Moving Boxes by Dragging and Dropping

You can drag selected boxes to new locations in the chart. When you move a box, all its descendant boxes and any associated anchored objects move with it. OrgPlus automatically reformats the chart.
To move chart boxes:

1 2 Click the box you want to move and drag it over another box. As you drag the pointer over other boxes, the mouse pointer changes to indicate how the selected box will be moved 3 A Left arrow-head indicates that the box is to be placed on the left of the box you are over. A Right arrow-head indicates that the box is to be placed on the right of the box you are over. A Subordinate box (as shown in the example below) indicates that the box is to be placed below the box you are over.
When you are satisfied with the position of the box release the mouse button. The box is placed in its new position.
4-12
Moving Objects

CHAPTER 4
The following example shows the changes to the chart when Lisa de Jong and her subordinate are moved to Tina Nomura's team.
Moving Free Objects by Dragging and Dropping

You can drag any free object to a new position in the chart.
To move free floating objects:

1 2 Click the object you want to move and drag it to its new position. Release the mouse button. The object is moved to the new position.
Free Dragging Boxes

OrgPlus automatically positions chart boxes based on the selected branch style. From time to time, automatic positioning of chart boxes may not meet your charting requirements. The free form tool your chart. allows you to arbitrarily position boxes within
Moving Objects
4-13
OrgPlus User Guide
To use the free form tool:

1 2 Select the Free Form tool .
Click and drag any chart box to a new location. To force a box to be horizontal or vertical constrained, hold down <Shift> while dragging the box.
To control a boxs connection to the chart, right-click a box and select an option from the Connect menu item:
See examples of these options in the table below. Top:
Left:
Bottom:
Right:
4-14
Moving Objects

CHAPTER 4
Optionally, you can flip the connecting lines. Right-click a box and select the Flip Connecting Lines menu item. Before Flip
After Flip
Make sure to click the Select tool
to exit free form mode.
Note: To return a box to its original position right-click that box and select Snap to Chart.

Once you have created a box, you must enter information into it.
To enter information into box fields:

1 2 3 Choose the Select tool Click a box to select it. Click a field (for example, Name or Title) and then type the information, as required. .
Press <Tab> to advance to the next field.
4-15
OrgPlus User Guide
Optimizing Files
You can optimize your chart files before sharing with other users. One easy way to share charts is with OrgPlus Reader. OrgPlus Reader is a free Windows application that enables you to view, search, and print charts generated with OrgPlus Standard, OrgPlus Professional, and OrgPlus Enterprise.
To optimize your chart:

1 2 3 4 Select Save As from the File menu. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save your file. Enter a file name in the File Name field. Click the Settings button to display the Save As Settings dialog box.
Select from the following options: Embed Referenced Pictures: This option embeds all referenced pictures into the saved file which allows you to share your chart with users that do not have access to your intranet or local computer hard drive. Convert Formulas to Values: Converting formulas to values not only enhances performance but ensures that formula results are maintained even if you save only a sub-set of your chart (Save what drop-down list). Exclude unused fields: This option reduces field size. Exclude comments: This option removes comments from the saved output. Remove reference to data source: This option removes any references to the data source used to import the data into your chart.
Click Save.
4-16

CHAPTER 4
Defining and Displaying Fields

This section describes how to define fields and display them in boxes.
In this section
Adding and Deleting Fields Displaying Fields in Boxes Inserting Pictures into Boxes Modifying Box Layout page 4-17 page 4-28 page 4-30 page 4-31
Adding and Deleting Fields

This section describes how to define and delete fields. A box can contain any number of fields. A field represents information, such as name title, phone number, and so on.
In this section
Adding Fields Defining Field Properties Adding Predefined Fields Deleting Fields Handling Duplicate Records Mapped Fields page 4-17 page 4-19 page 4-23 page 4-24 Page 4-24 Page 4-27
Adding Fields
This section describes how to add fields.
To add fields:
1 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu. OrgPlus displays the Define Fields dialog box.
4-17
OrgPlus User Guide
Click Add to add a field.
3 4
Enter a name in the new empty field in the Name column. Click the Type column to display and choose from a drop-down list of field types: Text Date Picture Defining and Displaying Fields
4-18

CHAPTER 4
Number Formula
If the field type is Text, Number, or Formula, you can also specify a Category. Click the Category column to display and choose from a drop-down list of categories. For fields of type Text, select the applicable category, such as Title, Persons Name, Zip Code, and so on. For fields of type Number or Formula, select the applicable category, such as Number, Money, or Percentage.
6 7 8 9
Select Hyperlinked if you want the field to be a hyperlink. For example, an e-mail address or web page. Click the Format button types have formatting options. Click the Formula button to specify how a field is displayed. Not all field to define a formula for a field.
Click OK. OrgPlus asks if you want to apply the newly created field(s) to all chart boxes. Click Yes to add. If you click No you can then selectively add fields later.
Defining Field Properties

OrgPlus offers a number of options for formatting fields.
To format Name fields:

1 2 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu. OrgPlus displays the Define Fields dialog box. Select the name field that you want to format and then click the Format button .
4-19
OrgPlus User Guide
OrgPlus displays the Name Formats dialog box.
Choose a format and click OK.
To format Number fields:

1 2 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu to display the Define Fields dialog box. Select the number field that you want to format and click the Format button . OrgPlus displays a dialog box based on the Category of the field (Number, Percentage, or Money).
4-20

CHAPTER 4
Define the format from the following options: Decimal Separator: Select the character to be used to represent the decimal point. Decimal Digits: Specify the number of digits to be shown to the right of the decimal point. Thousand: Specify the number of digits that are delimited between each thousands separator. Thousand Separator: Specify the character to be used as a thousands separator. Negative Order: Specify the format of negative numbers. Trailing Zero: Specify the number of zeros to the right of the decimal point. Custom Format: Select a number of leading zeros from the drop-down list. Zero before decimal: Place a zero before a fractional amount (0.01 vs .01). Positive Order: Select how to format currency amounts ($1.1 or $1,1 or 1.1 $ or 1.1$). (This option is available only when the Money category is selected.) Money Symbol: Select a currency symbol (for example, "$"). (This option is available only when the Money category is selected.)
Click OK to save your settings.
To format Date fields:

1 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu. OrgPlus displays the Define Fields dialog box.
4-21
OrgPlus User Guide
Select the field that you want to format and click the Format button display the Date Format dialog box.
to
Choose a format and click OK.
To format E-mail fields:

1 2 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu. OrgPlus displays the Define Fields dialog box. Select an E-mail field and click the Format button Format dialog box. to display the E-mail
3 4
Select from the drop-down list to specify the primary e-mail address. Click OK.
4-22

CHAPTER 4
Note: You must apply the E-mail category to the e-mail field to use the E-mail Group feature. See Using Groups for E-mail Distribution in Chapter 5. You can define more than one e-mail field, and designate a specific e-mail field as the primary one used for E-mail Distribution, E-mail Group, etc.
Adding Predefined Fields

Predefined fields make adding new fields to your chart a one step process. When you add a predefined field, all parameters (Type, Format, Category, and so on) are automatically configured.
To add Predefined fields:

1 2 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu. OrgPlus displays the Define Fields dialog box. Click Predefined to display the Select Fields dialog box.
3 4 5 6
Choose a field and click Add. Repeat this step to add additional fields. Click Close. Click OK. OrgPlus asks if you want to add the new field(s) to all chart boxes. Click Yes to add, or click No if you want to selectively add fields later.
4-23
OrgPlus User Guide
Deleting Fields
You can delete any field. Deleting a field removes the field from any boxes in which it is displayed.
To delete fields:
1 2 3 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu. OrgPlus displays the Define Fields dialog box. Select the field that you want to delete. Click Delete. A warning message asks you to confirm that you want to permanently delete the field. Click Yes to delete or No to cancel the action.
Handling Duplicate Records

Your organizational charts may contain people who report to more than one manager. An employee reporting to more than one manager typically has a dotted line reporting relationship to the secondary manager. The chart below contains an employee who appears in more than one box in an organizational chart:
Note: Any person who appears more than once in your organizational chart has an icon in lower right corner of their box. Click this icon to navigate to the next occurrence of that person.
To identify dotted line reports in your chart

1 Select the Duplicates button in the Define Fields dialog box to display the Identify Duplicates dialog box.
4-24

CHAPTER 4
2 3 4 5
Click the Identify duplicate records checkbox. Use the Key drop-down menu to select the key field for identifying your duplicate records. Select the Automatically Update checkbox if you want the when manual edits are made to a chart. icon in chart boxes
Select the Show Alternate Managers checkbox to show information about alternate managers. Alternate manager information can be shown using one of two methods.
As Callout Displays the duplicates icon in charts. When you click the icon, a callout displays the alternate managers to whom the employee reports.
As part of box Displays the alternate manager information inside the box.
4-25
OrgPlus User Guide
6 7 8
If alternate manager information is shown, you can specify which fields are displayed using the Field 1 and Field 2 drop-down lists. If you are displaying alternate manager information inside the box, use the Format... button to specify the formatting of in-box text. Click OK.
4-26

CHAPTER 4
Mapped Fields
This section explains how to create mapped fields. You can use mapped fields to map field values to pictures. For example:
Value US France Germany
Maps to \symbols\us_flag.png \symbols\fr_flag.png \symbols\de_flag.png
Result
In fact, OrgPlus includes a directory of images that you can include in your charts. The image directory is located in the Symbols folder in your My Charts directory. The My Charts directory is located in your My Documents folder.
To create a mapped field

1 2 3 Select the Add Mapped Field button in the Define Fields dialog box. Name the field and specify its Type and Category. Click the Options button to display the Mapping dialog box.
Click the Map Using: drop-down list to select the field you are mapping. 4-27
OrgPlus User Guide
Click the Add button to define each mapping pair. For example, you can map US to Flag_USA and CA to Flag_Canada. Use the Delete button to delete mapping pairs. Use the Default checkbox to specify the default mapping. The default mapping is used if a matching value cannot be found. Click OK. Note: You can import a list of mapping pairs using the Import button.
6 7
Displaying Fields in Boxes

You have complete control over which fields are displayed in any box. You can also add static text and picture objects to boxes.
Adding or Removing Fields from Boxes

This section describes how to add or remove fields from boxes.
To add or remove fields:

1 2 With your chart open, select the box(es) to which you want to add fields. Click the Edit Box Layout tool or select Box Properties from the Format menu. OrgPlus displays the Box Properties dialog box.
4-28

CHAPTER 4
Click the Layout tab to display the layout of the selected box(es):
To add a field, select the field in the left pane and drag it to the right into the Box Layout area. You can place a field anywhere in the box. To add a static text box, select the Text Box field and drag it into the Box Layout area. Click the text box and type to set the contents. To add a static picture, select the Picture field and drag it into the Box Layout area. Double-click the added picture to select a file (or a reference to a file). To remove a field, select a field from the Box Layout area and drag it to the Available Fields area. You can reposition a field within the box by selecting a field and dragging it to a new location. You can set the format of a field or text box by selecting the field and then clicking the Cell Format button. Options include font selection, alignment, shadow and borders and shading.
Click OK to update the selected boxes.
4-29
OrgPlus User Guide
Note: If you want your box changes to apply to the entire chart, select Entire chart in the Apply to area. If you want your changes to the box to apply to the active subchart, select Active sub-chart in the Apply to area. Otherwise your changes are only applied to the Selected box(es).
Inserting Pictures into Boxes

This section explains how to manually insert pictures into a box. You can also insert pictures into boxes automatically using Photo Manager. For more information refer to Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting. A box must contain a Picture field before you can insert a picture into it. For more information refer to Adding and Deleting Fields on page 4-17. Note: You can also add a static picture to any box or group of boxes. The difference between a static picture and picture field is that the static picture is shared among all boxes with the same layout; a picture field can contain a different picture in each box.
To insert a picture field into a box:

1 2 3 Select a box containing a Picture field. Right-click the Picture field and choose Select Picture from the context menu to display the Select Picture dialog box. Choose a picture and click Open to add the picture to the box. Note: Click the down-arrow on the right of the Open button and select Open as Link to link the picture in your chart. Linked pictures are not included in chart files; only a reference to the picture is included.
4-30

CHAPTER 4
Format the picture as required. For more information see on page 4-47.
Modifying Box Layout

OrgPlus enables you to modify the layout of fields in boxes.
In this section
Editing Box Layout Adding Columns Merging Cells Adding Labels to Fields Adding Lines Adding Hotspots Adjusting Margins page 4-31 page 4-32 Page 4-33 Page 4-33 Page 4-34 Page 4-34 Page 4-35
Editing Box Layout

You can edit the layout of boxes in your chart.
To edit box layout:

1 2 3 4 With your chart open, select a set of boxes. Select Box Properties from the Format menu to display the Box Properties dialog box. Click the Layout tab. Modify the layout of your boxes by following the instructions detailed in following sections: Adding Columns, page 4-32 Merging Cells, page 4-32 Adding Labels to Fields, page 4-33 Adding Lines, page 4-34 4-31
OrgPlus User Guide
Adding Hotspots, page 4-34 Adjusting Margins, page 4-35
Adding Columns
You can create boxes that contain multiple columns.
To add columns:
1 Select Layout Options button.
Select the number of columns using the Number of Columns selector. Note: By default columns are automatically sized (Autosize is selected). When using automatic sizing in conjunction with vertical branch styles, you may want to select the Include Peers checkbox. If you select the Fixed radio button, you can use the Show Columns checkbox to enable visual column size adjustment in the Box Layout dialog box. Note: If boxes are set to a fixed size, you can also determine whether cells truncate longer contents. See Fixed Size Boxes on page 4-37.
Click OK. You can now place fields in any cell in the Box Layout area.
4-32

CHAPTER 4
Merging Cells
You can merge two cells that are in different columns to achieve certain box layouts.
To merge cells:
1 2 3 4 5 Select two or more adjoining cells. Select the Cell Format button. Click the Options tab in the Cell Format dialog box. Select the Merge Cells checkbox. Click OK.
Adding Labels to Fields

You can display a label with any field (Name: Smith, Joy).
To display or hide a label:

1 2 3 4 5 Choose a field in the Box Layout area. Select the Cell Format button. Click the Options tab in the Cell Format dialog box. Check or uncheck the Show Label checkbox. Click OK. Note: In the options dialog, you can also change the character used as the label separator. You can even modify a label name if needed. Note: You can also use a Text Box to display a field label. A text box can be positioned above, below, left or right or any field. To make a Text Box into a Label: Add a Text Box Select Cell Format Select the Options tab Select the Field Label checkbox
4-33
OrgPlus User Guide
Adding Lines
You can draw horizontal or vertical lines between fields. Two line formats are available. One that extends to the border of the box and one that leaves a gap between the end of the line and the border.
To draw lines between rows or columns in the box:

1 2 Choose a Line tool ( or
).
Position the cursor between a row or column (the cursor is represented by the symbol for horizontal lines and by the place the line in the box symbol for vertical lines), and click to
To change the line type:

Select a line tool and click the line you want to change.
To change the line type or remove a line:

Click an existing line with the line tool.
Adding Hotspots
You can make any displayed field a hotspot. When you move the mouse cursor over a hotspot, OrgPlus highlights the hotspot field and displays the profile assigned to the box.
You can edit chart information by modifying the profile fields, and you can follow any hyperlink in the profile. For example, if you edit a field in the profile that also appears in the box, OrgPlus changes that field in the box to match your edits. Clicking a hyperlinked e-mail address in the profile launches your e-mail application.
To create or clear a hotspot:

1 2 Choose a field in the Box Layout area. Click the Hotspots button.
4-34

CHAPTER 4
3 4 5 6
Check the Make Hotspot checkbox in the Hotspot Properties dialog. Select a profile using the Hotspot Profile selector. Specify whether you want the hotspot to apply to the selected field or the entire box. Click OK. Note: See the Profiles section in Chapter 8 for more information on creating profiles.
Adjusting Margins
To adjust margins:
1 2 3 4 Select the Layout Options button. In the Margins area, adjust the Left, Right, Top, and/or Bottom margins, as required. To enable visual margin adjustment in the Box Layout dialog box, select the Show Margins checkbox. Click OK.
Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures

This section describes how to apply formatting to elements in your chart.
In this section
Formatting Boxes Formatting Lines Formatting Text Formatting Fields Formatting Pictures page 4-36 page 4-41 page 4-44 Page 4-47 page 4-48
4-35
OrgPlus User Guide
Formatting Boxes
You can format any box whether it is a free-floating object or part of a chart.
In this section
Resizing Boxes Defining Box Shape, Color and Lines Defining Box Shadows page 4-36 page 4-39 page 4-40
Resizing Boxes
This section describes how to define the minimum requirements for sizing boxes.
To resize a box:
1 2 With your chart open, select one or more boxes. Click any one of the eight resizing handles on a selected box and drag to the resize the boxes. Note: When you enable automatic width resizing, you cannot resize a box smaller than the fields contained within it. See Fixed Size Boxes on page 4-37 for more information on controlling box size.
To manually resize a box:

1 With your chart open, select one or more boxes. You can drag the control points on the selected box to resize or enter a specific size in inches (as detailed in the following steps). Select Box Properties from the Format menu. The Box Properties dialog box is displayed. Click the Box Sizing tab.
2 3
4-36

CHAPTER 4
Note: by default box sizing is based on the contents of the box. Both Auto Width and Auto Height are turned on. 4 Select a box width sizing option: 5 6 Auto Width automatically sizes selected boxes. Fixed Width forces the selected boxes to a specific width. Min/Max Width forces the selected boxes to a width that is bounded by a minimum and a maximum value.
To set a minimum box Height select the Minimum Height radio button and specify a height. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.
Fixed Size Boxes

By default, boxes are automatically resized to accommodate the longest displayed field. You can control box sizing by enabling word wrap or by forcing the box to a fixed width. If you force a box to a fixed width, longer fields within the box will be truncated. When using word wrap, you can set a limit on the number of lines the text can wrap to.
4-37
OrgPlus User Guide
To enable word wrap:

1 With your chart open, select one or more boxes. Note: You can also enable word wrap for a single field within any box. 2 Select Font from the Format menu to display the Font Properties dialog box.
3 4 5 6 4-38
Select the Alignment tab. Select the Word Wrap checkbox. Use the Limit drop-down list to specify the maximum number of lines that can be used when wrapping text. Click OK. Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures

CHAPTER 4
To set a box to a fixed width:

1 2 3 4 5 With your chart open, select one or more boxes. Select Box Properties from the Format menu. Select the Box Sizing tab. Select the Fixed Width radio button. Click OK. Note: You can specify whether a field is truncated using ellipses by selecting the Truncate text for fixed size boxes checkbox in the Options tab in the Cell Format dialog (Box Layout tab in Box Properties dialog).
Defining Box Shape, Color and Lines

This section explains how to define the box shape, background color, line style and color, and shadow style of boxes or free floating objects
To format colors and lines:

1 With your chart open, select one or more boxes. Note: Right-click any box and choose Select Boxes with Similar Formatting from the context menu to quickly select all boxes on the page that have the same format. 2 3 Select Box Properties from the Format menu to display the Box Properties dialog box. Click the Color and Lines tab.
4-39
OrgPlus User Guide
Define any of the following: Fill area:

Box shape: Select a box shape. Color: Select a background color. Color: Select the border line color. Dashed: Select the line type. Border Style: Select the border style.
Border area:

Defining Box Shadows

You can define the shadow style of boxes or free-floating objects.
To format the shadow style:

1 2 With your chart open, select one or more boxes. Select Box Properties on from Format menu to display the Box Properties dialog box. Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures
4-40

CHAPTER 4
Click the Shadow tab.
Define the following:

Shadow Style: Select the shadow style. Direction: Select a shadow direction (enabled only when a shadow is selected). Shadow Color: Select a shadow color (enabled only when a shadow is selected). Highlight Color: Select the shadow highlight color (enabled only for certain shadow styles). Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset: Select the horizontal and vertical depth of the shadow.
4-41
OrgPlus User Guide
Formatting Lines
You can format any line whether it is an auxiliary line, a free-floating object, or a connecting line between boxes in a chart. An auxiliary line is a line that you can draw between any two boxes in your chart to indicate a reporting relationship between them.
To format connecting lines:

1 2 3 With your chart open, select one or more lines. Select Line Properties from the Format menu to display the Line Properties dialog box. Click the Color and Lines tab.
Line area:

Color: Select the line color. Dashed: Select the line type. Line Weight: Select the line thickness.
Note: You can also specify a custom line thickness using the button in the Line Weight drop-down list. 4-42 Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures

CHAPTER 4
Arrows area:
Style: Select an arrow style.
Click the Shadow tab.

Shadow Style: Select a shadow style. Direction: Select a shadow direction (enabled only when a shadow is selected). Shadow Color: Select a shadow color (enabled only when a shadow is selected). Highlight Color: Select the shadow highlight color (enabled only for certain shadow styles). Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset: Select the horizontal and vertical depth of the shadow.
4-43
OrgPlus User Guide
Formatting Text
You can format any text in your chart whether it is a field in a box or a free-floating text object.
To format text:
1 2 Select any text or any box containing text. Select Font from the Format menu to display the Font Properties dialog box.
3 4 5
Make sure the Font tab is selected. Define the font, font style, and size of the text. You can also select the Font Color and opt to Underline or Strike-Out the text. Under Apply to: select a radio button to specify how to apply your formatting. Note: You can make your formatting choices apply automatically to all new instances of the applicable fields by selecting the Default for new objects checkbox. Note: You can click the Apply button at any time to apply you changes to the chart. The dialog will remain open.
4-44

CHAPTER 4
Select the Shadow tab.

Shadow Style: Select a shadow style. Direction: Select a shadow direction (enabled only when a shadow is selected). Shadow Color: Select a shadow color (enabled only when a shadow is selected). Highlight Color: Select the shadow highlight color (enabled only for certain shadow styles).
7 8
Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset: Select the horizontal and vertical depth of the shadow. Select the Alignment tab.
4-45
OrgPlus User Guide
Define the Horizontal and Vertical Alignment.
10 Select the Word Wrap checkbox if you want to wrap the text within a box rather than extend the box to accommodate the text. You can limit the number of lines text will wrap by using the Limit: drop-down. 11 Click OK when finished.
4-46

CHAPTER 4
Formatting Fields
The Format Fields dialog gives you a quick way to format any set of fields displayed within your chart.
To format fields:
1 With your chart open, select Format Fields from the Format menu to display the Format Fields dialog box.
Select fields by clicking on the associated checkboxes. Note: You can use the Check All and Clear All buttons to check or clear all fields.
3 4 5
Specify your formatting options using the Font, Shadow, and Alignment tabs. Refer to Formatting Text on page 4-44 Under Apply to: select a radio button to specify how to apply your formatting. Click the Apply button. You can immediately see your formatting applied in the chart. Note: You can click the Apply button at any time to apply your changes to the chart. The dialog will remain open.
4-47
OrgPlus User Guide
Click OK.
Formatting Pictures
You can format a picture whether it is a free-floating object or a field in a box. Note: This topic explains formatting pictures in boxes. For information about formatting free-floating objects, see Adding Free Floating Objects in Chapter 7.
To resize a picture:
1 2 With your chart open, select a picture. Click any one of the eight resizing handles on the selected picture and drag to resize it.
To modify picture properties:

1 2 Select any box (containing a picture). Select a picture within that box. Right-click on the picture and select the Picture Properties menu item to display the Picture Properties dialog box. Make sure the Picture tab is selected.
Select one of the Frame/Picture options: Autoframe: This option forces the picture frame to fit around the specified picture Height and Width.
4-48

CHAPTER 4
Autoscale: This option scales the picture to fit in the specified picture frame Height and Width. Manual: This option allows you to independently specify both the picture size and the picture frame size.
Autoframe
Autoscale
Manual
Specify Horizontal and Vertical Alignment of the picture in the picture field: Horizontal Alignment: Select the Left, Center, or Right radio button to specify the horizontal alignment. Vertical Alignment: Select the Top, Center, or Bottom radio button to specify the vertical alignment.
5 6
To select another image use the Modify button. Click OK.
Formatting Charts
OrgPlus enables you to apply background, border or shadow formatting to a chart. OrgPlus also enables you to set the orientation of a chart.
To apply formatting to charts:

1 With your chart open, select Chart Properties | Color and Lines from the Format menu. The Chart Properties dialog box is displayed.
Formatting Charts
4-49
OrgPlus User Guide
Define Background properties, as required:
Color: Use the drop-down control to set the background to a specific color, gradient, texture, or picture. Border Style: Select the border style. Dashed: Select the line type. Color: Select the line color.
Define Border properties as required:

Use the Apply to radio buttons to apply your specifications to either the Entire chart or to the Active sub-chart only.
Select the Shadow tab.
4-50
Formatting Charts

CHAPTER 4
Define the following, as required:

Shadow Style: Select a shadow style. Direction: Select a shadow direction (enabled only when a shadow is selected). Shadow Color: Select a shadow color (enabled only when a shadow is selected). Highlight Color: Select the shadow highlight color (enabled only for certain shadow styles). Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset: Select the horizontal and vertical depth of the shadow. Use the Apply to radio buttons to apply your specifications to either the Entire chart or to the Active sub-chart only.
Formatting Charts
4-51
OrgPlus User Guide
Select the Orientation tab.
Orientation: Select how you want the chart to be drawn. The orientation options are left to right, right to left, top to bottom, or bottom to top. Subordinate Alignment: Select how subordinates boxes are to be aligned with respect to their manager.
Note: You can set only one orientation per chart. The orientation you define applies to all sub-charts contained within a chart. 4 Select the Sub-chart Arrows tab.
4-52
Formatting Charts

CHAPTER 4
5 6
Specify your preferred style for Sub-chart Arrows from the styles shown. Specify a Fill Color and a Border Color for your Sub-chart Arrows: By default, the fill and border color of your arrows correspond to the associated box. To specify different colors, uncheck the Use Box Colors checkbox and specify a Fill Color and Border Color for all sub-chart arrows.
Optionally, you can add labels to sub-charts arrows. Labeling sub-chart arrows enhances navigation within the chart and improves the usability of your printed and published charts. Select the Show Label checkbox and then select the label type and label position. Click the Font button to modify font properties for the label if needed.
Note: You can select only one sub-chart arrow style per chart. The sub-chart arrow style you select applies to all sub-charts contained within a chart. Note: You can change how sub-charts are numbered by setting base and increment values using the Advanced options dialog.
Formatting Charts
4-53
OrgPlus User Guide
Select the Advanced tab.
By default each box with one or more subordinate boxes shows a + control in its lower right corner when its subordinates are hidden and a control when its subordinates are shown. You can turn off this functionality by unchecking the Enable Expand/Collapse of branches checkbox. Turning off display of Expand/Collapse controls reduces the amount of display space required for chart box.
10 Select the Use Uniform box sizing checkbox to force the size of all boxes in a chart to the same size, and select the Max width checkbox to specify a maximum uniform size. 11 Click OK to apply the changes.
Applying Chart Styles

This section describes how to change chart branch styles.
4-54

CHAPTER 4
Changing Chart Styles

You can change the layout of any group of boxes within your chart by selecting from one of the chart styles. There are four types of chart styles: Chart Styles: Arranges peer boxes relative to their immediate manager.
Assistant Styles: Arranges assistant boxes relative to their immediate manager.
Co-Manager Styles: Groups a set of boxes as co-managers.
Advanced Styles: If required, you can use advanced styles to arrange peer boxes in multi-column styles relative to their immediate manager.
4-55
OrgPlus User Guide
Note: You can also define Chart Rules that enable you to change branch styles within a chart based on a condition. For example, if an employees title includes the word assistant, you can create a rule that changes the branch style to an assistant style. See Chart Rules in Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting for more information. The following procedure describes how to change chart styles. Note: OrgPlus Express has a limited set of chart styles.
To change chart styles:

1 2 Select the boxes for which you want to change the style. Select Chart Styles from the Format menu to display the Chart Style options.
Choose a chart style from the displayed chart style options. The following example shows the effect of applying the the assistants of Chris Phillips. assistant chart style to
4-56

CHAPTER 4
To use advanced chart styles:

1 2 Select the boxes for which you want to change the style. Select Chart Styles from the Format menu. The Chart Style options are displayed (as in step 2 of previous procedure).
Select Advanced Chart Styles dialog box.
to display the Advanced Chart Styles
Advanced Style: Select multi-column tree pair . Alignment: Select how peer boxes are to be aligned.
or multi-column
Maximum number of boxes per row: Select the maximum number of boxes that can be located on any row within a style group. Maintain banding: Selecting this option ensures that each box stays on its current row when other boxes are added or deleted. This is useful if rows are used to represent seniority. For example, the first row might contain permanent employees while the second row contains temporary employees. Note: Right-click a box within a multi-column style and select the Action menu to promote or demote a box if the Maintain Banding option is selected.
Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
4-57
OrgPlus User Guide
Quick Chart Panel

The Quick Chart panel provides an easy way to get started with OrgPlus. It is the fastest way to create basic organizational charts. The Quick Chart panel is intended for first time users and contains only a small sub-set of the features available in the OrgPlus application.
In this section
Adding and Deleting Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel Moving Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel Editing Box Content Using the Quick Chart Panel Formatting Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel Adding Fields Using the Quick Chart Panel Box Layout Using the Quick Chart Panel Applying Templates Using the Quick Chart Panel Changing Branch Styles Using the Quick Chart Panel Page 4-58 Page 4-59 Page 4-60 Page 4-60 Page 4-61 Page 4-62 Page 4-63 Page 4-63
Adding and Deleting Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel

OrgPlus includes five types of boxes: Subordinate Left Co-Worker Right Co-Worker Manager Assistant
4-58
Quick Chart Panel

CHAPTER 4
To add boxes to your chart, select a box in the chart, then use the buttons at the top of the Quick Chart panel to specify the type of box you are adding.
To delete a box use the
button.
Moving Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel

To move boxes within your chart, select a box and then use the move buttons in the Quick Chart panel to reposition the selected box as desired.
Quick Chart Panel
4-59
OrgPlus User Guide
Editing Box Content Using the Quick Chart Panel

To edit the content of a box, select a box and then select Edit Box Contents button. You can now type information into the first field. Use the <Tab> key to advance to the next field.
Formatting Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel

To format a box within your chart, select a box and then use the Edit Box Format button in the Quick Chart panel to format the selected box as desired. The Format Box button displays the Box Properties dialog. Use the options in the Color & Lines tab to select different box shapes, fill colors and border options (style, dash, and color).
4-60
Quick Chart Panel

CHAPTER 4
Adding Fields Using the Quick Chart Panel

You can add additional fields to your charts at any time.
To add a field:
1 2 3 Select the Edit Box Fields button in the Quick Chart Panel. (define fields icon)
Click Add to add a new field. Type a field name (such as Org Unit).
4 5
Click OK. You will be prompted to add the new field to all boxes. Click Yes to add the field to all boxes or click No to add the field without displaying it in your chart.
Quick Chart Panel
4-61
OrgPlus User Guide
Box Layout Using the Quick Chart Panel

To specify which fields are shown in a box, select the Edit Box Layout button in the Quick Chart panel. OrgPlus displays the Layout panel in the Box Properties dialog box. The layout panel is where you specify which fields are displayed in any given box.
To display a field in a box:

1 Drag a field (for example Org Unit) into the box until you see the release the mouse button. See Adding Fields Using the Quick Chart Panel. symbol, then
4-62
Quick Chart Panel

CHAPTER 4
If you want to remove a field from a box, drag the field out of the box (shown in the Layout tab) and back into the field list. Note: You can apply the layout changes to all boxes in the chart by selecting the Entire chart radio button. 2 Click OK. Notice that the field is added to the selected boxes. You can now define the value of this field for each box in your chart (see Editing Box Content Using the Quick Chart Panel). Note: You can select more than one box at a time using shift-click.
Applying Templates Using the Quick Chart Panel

Templates provide a quick way to format your chart. You can apply box, branch, and design templates to your chart using the templates panel.
Changing Branch Styles Using the Quick Chart Panel

You may want to change the branch style for aesthetic or space reasons. OrgPlus offers a large variety of branch styles, which can be applied to any branch in your chart or the entire chart.
To change the branch style:

1 2 Choose the Select tool .
Select all the subordinates for a manager (Lynn Brewer in the example below) by double-clicking one of the subordinate boxes.
Click the Styles button
at the bottom of the window. 4-63
Quick Chart Panel
OrgPlus User Guide
Select any style ( for example
).
The boxes under the manager are reformatted as shown below:
Using Cut/Copy/Paste
This section describes how you can use the cut, copy, and paste within OrgPlus.
In this section
Moving Boxes and Free Floating Objects by Cutting and Pasting Copying Contents and Format page 4-64 page 4-65
Moving Boxes and Free Floating Objects by Cutting and Pasting

You can cut and paste one or more boxes from one location to another in a chart. You can also use this technique to move boxes from one chart to another.
To move boxes by cutting (or copying) and pasting:

1 With your chart open, select the boxes you want to move. To select multiple objects, press <Shift> and click each object, or drag an outline around them if they are next to each other in the chart. 2 3 Select Cut or Copy from the Edit menu. Select the box to which you want the boxes attached and select Paste from the Edit menu. The selected box(es) are moved.
4-64
Using Cut/Copy/Paste

CHAPTER 4
To move free objects by cutting (or copying) and pasting:

1 With your chart open, choose the free floating objects you want to move. To select multiple objects, press <Shift> and click each object, or drag an outline around them if they are next to each other in the chart. 2 3 Select Cut or Copy from the Edit menu. Select Paste from the Edit menu. The selected object(s) are moved.
Copying Contents and Format

You can copy only the contents of a box or only the formatting for a box.
To copy box contents:

1 2 3 With your chart open, choose the box you want to copy. Select Copy Contents from the Edit menu. The content of the selected box is copied. Choose the target boxes and select Paste from the Edit menu. The content of the selected box is pasted into the target box.
To copy box format:

1 2 3 With your chart open, choose the box you want to copy. Select Copy Format from the Edit menu. The format of the selected box is copied. Choose the target boxes and click Paste from the Edit menu. The target boxes are reformatted.
Printing
This section describes how print charts.
In this section
Defining Page Setup Using Print Preview Printing Charts page 4-66 page 4-69 page 4-70
Printing
4-65
OrgPlus User Guide
Defining Page Setup

This section describes how to define the page settings for your chart.
To define page setup:

1 Select Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.
In the Page tab, define the following: Orientation: Select Portrait or Landscape. Scaling: Defines the number pages your chart should be allowed to span. Select from the following options:
Adjust to: Specify the percentage of actual size in which the chart should be printed. Or Fit to: Specify the number of pages over which the chart should span.
4-66
Printing

CHAPTER 4
Uniform Scaling for all sub-charts: Apply the same scaling to all sub-charts. Uniform scaling ensures that every chart box has the same scaling in the printed output. Uniform Scaling for all master page elements: Apply the same scaling to the master page based the percentage you specify in the Scale to: drop-down. Uniform scaling ensures that every master page elements has the same scaling on each printed page. This is an important option when sub-charts or chart tabs within a project are printed using multiple print jobs. Include an Overlap Between Chart Pages: Enables the printed pages of charts that span multiple pages to overlap in order to facilitate binding to a final document. Print comments as displayed on charts: If the chart contains comments, this option will print the comments as they are displayed on the chart.
Paper Size: Define the paper size. Page Order: Select the order in which the pages of the chart are printed:
Down, then Over down. Over, then Down to right.
: Prints the left-most segments first, from top
: Prints the top-most segments first, from left
Apply to: Specify whether these settings apply to the Entire Project or only the Current Chart.
Printing
4-67
OrgPlus User Guide
Select the Margins tab.
Define the margin settings as follows:
Margins: Enter the minimum values for the Top, Left, Right and Bottom margins. You can also set margins by dragging margin lines in the Page Setup dialog box. Or Use the Minimum Margins for this Printer: Select this option to use the minimum margin settings for your printer. Center Chart on Page: Select how to center the chart content on each page. Select Horizontally or Vertically or both. Apply to: Specify whether these settings apply to the Entire Project or only the Current Chart.
Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
Note: The Options button allows you to modify printer specific settings. 4-68 Printing

CHAPTER 4
Using Print Preview

You can preview how your chart will look when it is printed.
To Print Preview:
Select Print Preview from the File menu. The Preview dialog box, which includes standard Print Preview functionality, is displayed.
Printing
4-69
OrgPlus User Guide
Printing Charts
OrgPlus enables you to print out your charts.
To print your charts:

1 2 3 4 Select Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box is displayed. Choose the printer. Define the printing options, such as, Print Range and Number of Copies. In the Print what section, select from the following options: 5 Entire Project: Prints all the charts in the project. Current Chart: Prints the current chart. Active Sub-chart: Prints the currently active sub-chart. Selection: Prints the chart segment that includes the selected boxes.
Click Print all linked documents if you want to print documents linked to OLE objects in your chart. If you click Print All Linked Documents OrgPlus checks your chart for OLE objects that are linked to documents. If OrgPlus finds any documents, it prompts you to select which of documents you want printed.
Click Include navigation arrows if you want to include the arrows indicating sub charts in your printed chart. The Include navigation arrows checkbox appears only if your chart contains sub charts.
Click OK to start printing.
4-70
Printing
Chapter 5 Working with Charts: Navigation and Visualization

In this chapter
Viewing Charts Hiding Boxes and Lines Basic Visualization Techniques Working with Groups Page 5-1 Page 5-5 Page 5-6 Page 5-8
Viewing Charts
This section describes how you can view and navigate charts.
In this section
Zooming and Panning Using the Thumbnail Window Showing Selected Branches Using Full Screen Mode page 5-1 page 5-3 page 5-4 page 5-4
Zooming and Panning

The following Zoom and Pan tools are available in OrgPlus: Zoom In and Zoom Out enable you to increase or decrease the magnification of your chart. If you have a wheel on your mouse you can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel. Zoom Wheel makes your mouse wheel a zoom tool. Rolling the wheel forward zooms in, rolling backward zooms out. tool allows you to click and drag to define a rectangle. When Zoom Rect you release the mouse button the selected area is magnified.
5-1
OrgPlus User Guide
The Pan tool enables you to pan the chart within its window by clicking and dragging the mouse as required. Fit to Window single window. scales the chart so that its entire content is visible in a
The Scale drop-down list zoom factors.
allows you to choose from a list of
The following menu items can be accessed by selecting Zoom from the View menu. Fit to Width: Scales the chart so that the width of chart fits in the window. Fit to Window: Scales the chart so that its entire content is visible in the window. Actual Size: Scales the chart so that the boxes appear at the size in which they will print. Zoom To: Displays the Zoom dialog box. Select the zoom options and click OK.
5-2
Viewing Charts
Working with Charts: Navigation and Visualization

CHAPTER 5
Using the Thumbnail Window

The thumbnail view is useful for navigating large charts.
To open the thumbnail window:

1 Click the Thumbnail button to display a thumbnail window.
Viewing Charts
5-3
OrgPlus User Guide
The red rectangle corresponds to the portion of the chart that is displayed in the main window. As you drag the red rectangle in the thumbnail, the displayed chart is updated accordingly. Note: The red rectangle in the thumbnail window changes as zoom and pan tools are used.
Click the
button in the thumbnail window to close.
Showing Selected Branches

You can temporarily hide all boxes in a chart that are not contained in a selected branch using this feature.
To show a selected branch:

Click the Show Branch button is displayed. . A chart containing only the selected branch
Click the Show Branch button
again to show the entire chart.
Using Full Screen Mode

You can enlarge the work area to fill the entire monitor area, similar to the Full Screen mode in a PowerPoint slide show.
To use full screen mode:

Click the Full Screen toolbar button to enter/exit Full Screen mode. Note: Press <Esc> to exit Full Screen mode.
5-4
Viewing Charts

CHAPTER 5
Hiding Boxes and Lines

Hidden boxes remain part of a chart but are not visible. When boxes are hidden, connecting lines are adjusted accordingly.
In this section
Hiding Boxes and Lines Showing Boxes and Lines page 5-5 page 5-5

Only chart boxes and lines can be hidden.
To hide boxes or lines:

1 2 Select the boxes or lines you want to hide. Select Hide from the Format menu. The selected boxes or lines are hidden.
Showing Boxes and Lines

You can show hidden boxes and lines, making them visible again. This option is enabled only when the selected objects are already hidden.
To show hidden boxes and lines:

1 2 3 Select the hidden boxes or lines you want to unhide. Select Show from the Format menu. The selected boxes or lines are shown. Note: Select the menu item Hidden Boxes or Hidden Lines from the Show menu to temporarily show hidden boxes and lines.
5-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Basic Visualization Techniques

This section describes techniques you can use to determine the visual appearance of your charts and some navigational features you can use.
In this section
Showing Hidden Objects Showing Levels Finding by Photo page 5-6. page 5-7. page 5-7.
Showing Hidden Objects

When creating a chart you may need to reveal various elements that are not to be included in the final output.
In this section
Showing Hidden Boxes, Lines, Fields, and Comments Showing or Hiding Symbols Showing Page Lines page 5-6 page 5-7 page 5-7
Showing Hidden Boxes, Lines, Fields, and Comments

You can show hidden boxes and lines as necessary. You can also temporarily display all defined fields in a box. To temporarily show or hide boxes: Select Show | Hidden Boxes from the View menu. To temporarily show or hide lines: Select Show | Hidden Lines from the View menu. To temporarily show or hide hidden fields: Select Show | Hidden Fields from the View menu. To show comments: select Show | Comments from the View menu.
5-6

CHAPTER 5
Showing or Hiding Symbols

A box may contain one or more symbols. Symbols include elements such as sub-chart arrows and expand/collapse branch.
To show or hide symbols: Select Show | Symbols from the View menu.
Showing Page Lines

Pages lines demarcate header and footer areas, print margins, and page breaks.
To show or hide page lines: Select Show | Page Lines from the View menu.
Showing Levels
A chart consists of one or more levels. You can limit the number of levels displayed at any given time.
To specify the number of levels to display: Select Show Levels from the View menu and select the number of levels to display.
Finding by Photo
This feature enables you to find boxes in your chart by selecting photos. The Find by Photo dialog box displays the first picture field in each box in your chart.
5-7
OrgPlus User Guide
To locate a chart box using Find by Photo:

1 Select Find by Photo from the Edit menu. The Find By Photo dialog box is displayed.
In the Search Where section, select the scope of the search: Entire Chart: Lists all the pictures in the chart. Active Sub-chart: Lists only pictures in the current sub-chart. Selection: Lists only the pictures in the current selection.
3 4
Selecting any photo scrolls the box containing that picture into view. Click Close to close the Find By Photo dialog box.
Note: Like all panels in OrgPlus, you may dock the Find by Photo dialog box to any side of the OrgPlus window.
Working with Groups

The Groups feature enables you to define a sub-set of a chart that meets a set of user-defined criteria. All boxes that do not belong to this sub-set (or group) are then shaded when this group is selected.
In this section
Creating New Groups Applying Groups Editing, Copying, Deleting, and Ordering Groups page 5-9 page 5-11 page 5-11
5-8
Working with Groups

CHAPTER 5
Creating New Groups

This section describes how to create new groups.
To create new groups:

1 Select Groups | Manage Groups from the Chart menu, or click the Manage Groups button . The Manage Groups dialog box is displayed.
Click Add to display the Manage Group Properties dialog box.
Enter the group name in the Group Name field. 5-9
Working with Groups
OrgPlus User Guide
Enter the group selection criteria. You can use a formula to define a group using the Field Name, Comparison, and Contents fields. For complex formulas use the And/Or operators to expand or contract your criteria. See Using Formulas in Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting for more information. Note: Use the Constants button to include any defined constants in your selection criteria. See Using Constants in Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting for more information.
Click the Group Display Options tab.
Define the display options as follows: Boxes:

Gray boxes not in group: Grays boxes that do not belong to the group. Hide boxes not in group (preserve hierarchy): Hides boxes that do not belong to the group unless the box is required to maintain the hierarchy of the chart.
Content:
Hide content if not in group: Hides the content of boxes that do not belong to the group. Gray content if not in group: Grays the content of boxes that do not belong to the group.
Click OK to create the group.
5-10
Working with Groups

CHAPTER 5
Click Close. The Manage Groups dialog box is closed.
Applying Groups
You can apply a group to the displayed chart.
To apply a group:
Select Groups | <Required Group> from the Chart menu, or select the group from the Groups drop-down list on the toolbar. The boxes in the chart are redrawn to indicate which boxes belong to the current group. Note: If you do not want to apply a group, select Groups | All Boxes from the Chart menu.
Editing, Copying, Deleting, and Ordering Groups

You may want to edit, delete, or reorder groups.
To edit group settings:

1 Select Groups | Manage Groups from the Chart menu, or click the Manage Groups button defined groups. 2 3 . The Manage Groups dialog box is displayed listing all
Select the group you want to edit and click Edit. Click Close when finished.
To copy a group:
1 Select Groups | Manage Groups from the Chart menu, or click the Manage Groups button defined groups. 2 . The Manage Groups dialog box is displayed listing all
Select the group you want to copy and click Copy. Note: OrgPlus adds your new group to the group list. The default name of your new group is the same as the original you copied, but with an incremental number appended to it. For example, if you copy a report named MyGroup, the default name of your copy is Copy of Mygroup. You can rename groups in the Manage Groups dialog box.
Click Close when finished.
To delete groups:
1 2 3 From the Manage Groups dialog box, select the required group to be deleted and click Delete. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click OK to delete the group. Click Close when finished. 5-11
Working with Groups
OrgPlus User Guide
To change the ordering of groups:

1 From the Manage Groups dialog box, select a group and click: Move Up to move the group up one position in the list. Or Move Down to move the group down one position in the list. 2 Click Close when finished.
Using Groups for E-mail Distribution

You can create an e-mail distribution list based on any defined group. For example, you can send an e-mail to: All engineers in the San Francisco office All full-time employees that participate in the retirement plan
Creating a Distribution List Based on a Group

You can create e-mail distribution lists composed of group members.
Specifying the e-mail address field:

In order to use this feature, your chart must include an e-mail field. Note: See Defining Field Properties in Chapter 4 for detailed information on defining the e-mail address field.
To create a distribution list for a group:

1 With your chart displayed, select Groups | E-mail Groups from the Chart Menu or click the E-mail Groups icon Group dialog box. on the Toolbar to display the E-mail
5-12
Working with Groups

CHAPTER 5
Under Send Using, select an outgoing e-mail option: E-mail Client Select this option to use your default e-mail client. SMTP Select this option to use Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Your e-mail will be sent according to the SMTP settings defined for OrgPlus. Note: You can configure SMTP settings by selecting the Options menu item from the Tools menu. See Using the Options Panel in Chapter 6, Working with Charts: Utilities.
All the members of the current group are automatically included. You can add or remove recipients using the To, CC, and BCC buttons. You can also manually enter e-mail addresses. Multiple e-mail addresses should be must separated by semi-colons. Optionally you can attach a copy of the current chart by selecting the Attach Chart checkbox. Use the Setting button to make sure the chart is optimized properly. See Chapter 4, Working with Charts, Basic Charting for additional details. Enter the Subject and Body text of the e-mail. Click OK to send.
5 6
Working with Groups
5-13
OrgPlus User Guide
5-14
Working with Groups
Chapter 6 Working with Charts: Utilities

In this chapter
Overview Using Grids and Rulers Working with the Photo Manager Comparing Charts Sorting Boxes Using Find and Replace Spell Check Inserting Comments Setting OrgPlus Options page 6-1 Page 6-2 page 6-2 Page 6-5 page 6-5 Page 6-9 Page 6-13 Page 6-14 Page 6-15
Overview
This chapter describes some of the useful utility functions that are included in OrgPlus.
6-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Using Grids and Rulers

Grids and rulers provide a visual aid for the placement of objects on the OrgPlus page. The lines of the grid crisscross the work surface like those on traditional graph paper. When you place a free-floating object on the page, it snaps into place according to its position on the grid. The rulers along the left and top edges measure the page in inches. Note: Rulers are especially useful for outputting charts to large format printers and plotters. Use the Page Setup menu from the File menu to set the paper size. Select the Adjust to: radio button and set scaling to 100% to get WYSIWYG output.
Displaying the Grids and Rulers

To display the grid, select Grid from the View menu. To display the rulers, select Ruler from the View menu. Note: Grids and rulers do not appear in printed charts.
Working with the Photo Manager

This section describes how to place pictures in box fields using the Photo Manager. Pictures added using Photo Manager can be synchronized with the original data source.
Inserting Pictures Using Photo Manager

The Photo Manager can import pictures into chart boxes. The Pictures fields in each box can be automatically populated from an external source. This is useful if you maintain a set of pictures with a logical naming convention. These pictures may be stored on a local or network drive, HTTP or FTP server. Photo Manager identifies photos according to a flexible naming convention. The same naming convention must be used for identifying all pictures.
To import/refresh photos to your chart:

1 With your chart open, select Photo Manager from the Data menu. If the chart has no Pictures fields defined, the following Photo Manager message is displayed.
6-2
Using Grids and Rulers
Working with Charts: Utilities

CHAPTER 6
Select Add Field to all the boxes in your chart if you want new Pictures fields to be added to all the boxes in your chart and click Yes to continue. If you click No the action is cancelled. The Photo Manager dialog box is displayed.
Define your settings as follows: Choose photo column: Select a destination field. Only fields of type Photo are listed. Target location: Select the source location of the photo files (Disk/Network, FTP or HTTP). Enter the path or use the browse button to specify a location. 6-3
Working with the Photo Manager
OrgPlus User Guide
Note: You can specify whether to embed or link picture files to your chart. Linked files result in a smaller file size; however, if you share your OrgPlus file with other users they may not have access to the linked picture files. Photo Generator: Specify the naming convention used to name the source pictures files: Pictures Field: Select a field to be used to generate the source picture file names. For example, source files can be named according to the contents of the Name field or the Title field. Name template: Select how the picture file name should be constructed. For example: if a field has the name Adam Smith, selecting: 4 Last.bmp generates Smith.bmp. First.bmp generates Adam.bmp. FLast.bmp generates ASmith.bmp. FirstL.bmp generates AdamS.bmp. FirstLast.bmp generates AdamSmith.bmp
File type: Select the file type from the drop-down list.
Import photos up to level: Select the number levels for the photo manager to import.
Click Generate to match boxes in the chart with picture files from the source. The results of this action are shown in the table at the bottom of the dialog box.
The symbol indicates that a match was found. The missing photo.
symbol indicates a
Note: You can view a preview of the picture that corresponds to a row by selecting that row in the table. 5 Click the Photo Size tab if you want to change the default scale, size and alignment before importing each picture. Note: Importing large photos into your chart can affect performance. We recommend that you create smaller versions of photos before importing. 6 6-4 Click OK to import the photos into your chart. Working with the Photo Manager

CHAPTER 6
Comparing Charts
OrgPlus allows you to compare two charts. After comparison a report containing the differences between the two charts is generated. Comparing the following charts:
Would result in the following delta report:
Comparing Charts
6-5
OrgPlus User Guide
To compare two charts:

1 Select Compare Charts from the Chart menu to display the Compare Charts dialog box.
Use the Browse button in the Compare (Project) area to select any OrgPlus file or select the Use Current Project checkbox to select the displayed chart. If the selected project contains multiple tabs, use the Chart Tab drop-down list to select a chart. Use the Browse button in the To (Project) area to select any OrgPlus file or select the Use Current Project checkbox to select the displayed chart. If the selected project contains multiple tabs, use the Chart Tab drop-down list to select a chart. Use the Unique Field drop down list to select the field (in each chart) that will be used to match boxes between the two charts (i.e. email address or employee ID). Define the information to Include in the delta report: Headers: Output field names in the first row of the report. File Info: Output path and file name information in the report. Previous Values: Include columns showing the previous value of a field in the delta report. Comments: Include a column showing how comments differ between the two files. Comparing Charts
6-6

CHAPTER 6
Select Fields: Select which fields to include in the delta report.
Note: By default, the delta report is automatically displayed after the comparison is complete. Clear the View delta reports checkbox if you do not wish to display the report after comparison. 6 7 8 Click OK in the Compare Charts dialog box to display the Windows Save As dialog box. Specify a file name and file type for your comparison report. Click Save.
Comparing Charts
6-7
OrgPlus User Guide
Sorting Boxes
Subordinate boxes that report to the same manager can be sorted.
To sort boxes in your chart:

1 2 Select the boxes to sort. If you do not select any boxes, all boxes within the current sub-chart are sorted. Select Sort from the Data menu. The Sort dialog box is displayed.
Define the sort parameters: Sort by: Select the field name by which to sort and then select Ascending or Descending. Then by: If required, select a second level of sorting and then select Ascending or Descending. Then by: If required, select a third level of sorting and then select Ascending or Descending.
In the Sort what section, select from: Entire Chart: Sorts all the chart boxes. Active sub-chart: Sorts only the boxes in the currently displayed sub-chart. Selection: Sorts only the selected boxes.
5 6-8
Select OK to perform the sort. Sorting Boxes

CHAPTER 6
Using Find and Replace

You can perform simple or advanced searches using the Find command. The Replace command enables you to replace some or all occurrences of a specified string with another string. Note: You can view a tabular list of all records that match a simple or complex set of criteria using the Search panel. See Searches in Chapter 8, Reports, Profiles, Directories, and Searches for more information.
In this section
Using Find Using Advanced Find Using Find and Replace Using Advanced Find and Replace page 6-9 page 6-10 page 6-11 page 6-12
Using Find
You can search for occurrences of a specific string.
To perform a simple find:

1 Select Find from the Edit menu. The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed.
2 3
Enter the search string in the Find What field. Select the search mode: Select All Matching Boxes: Selects all boxes that contain the search string. Go to First Matching Box: Selects the first box that contains the search string.
6-9
OrgPlus User Guide
Depending on the selected search mode, click Find Next or Find All. You can continue to click Find Next until you reach the bottom of the chart or you find the desired occurrence of a string. Note: Press <Enter> to search for the next occurrence. Press <Shift>+<Ctrl>+<G> to search backwards.
Using Advanced Find

You can search for every occurrence of strings based on a set of conditions.
To perform an advanced find:

1 2 Select Find from the Edit menu. The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed. Select the Advanced Find button.
Define the first search criteria expression by selecting from the Field Name and Comparison drop-down lists. Then enter the search string in the Contents field. Define any additional search criteria in the second and subsequent lines by selecting the And/OR search condition for each line. Select Match Case to find only words that are capitalized the same way as the text in the Contents field. Select Whole Word Only to find only complete words that match the Contents field entries. In the Search where area, select from the following options: Entire Chart: Searches the entire chart. Active sub-chart: Confines the search to the currently displayed sub-chart. Selection: Confines the search to the selected boxes.
4 5 6 7
6-10

CHAPTER 6
Select the search mode: Select All Matching Boxes: Select all the boxes that contain the search string. Go to First Matching Box: Selects the first box that contains the search string.
Depending on the selected search mode, click Find Next or Find All. You can continue to click Find Next until you reach the bottom of the chart or you find the desired box.

You can replace any text string with another text string.
To replace text in chart boxes:

1 Select Replace from the Edit menu. The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed.
2 3 4
Enter the search string in the Find What field. Enter the replacement string in the Replace With field. Start your find and replace operation as follows: Click Replace All to replace all instances of the old text with the new text. Click Replace to replace the current instance and continue to the next instance. Click Find Next to find the next instance of the text.
Repeat the previous step until the message Search Completed is displayed, or click Cancel to stop the search at any point.
6-11
OrgPlus User Guide
Using Advanced Find and Replace

Use the Replace command to find and replace specific text in your chart.
To replace text in chart boxes:

1 2 3 4 Select Replace from the Edit menu. The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed. Enter the search string in the Find What field. Enter the replacement string in the Replace With field. Click More. The expanded Find and Replace dialog box is displayed.
Define the Replace Options: Limit the replace operation to a single field by selecting from the Replace In drop-down list. To replace a blank field select the Replace blank fields checkbox. Select Match Case to find only words that are capitalized the same way as the text in the Contents field. Select Whole Word Only to find only complete words that match the Find What field entries.
In the Search where area, select from the following options: 5 6-12 Entire Chart: Searches the entire chart. Active sub-chart: Confines the search to the currently displayed sub-chart. Selection: Confines the search to the selected boxes.
Start your find and replace as follows: Using Find and Replace

CHAPTER 6
Click Replace All to replace all instances of the old text with the new text. Click Replace to replace the current instance and continue to the next instance. Click Find Next to find the next instance of the text. 6 Repeat previous step until the message Search Completed is displayed, or click Close to stop the search at any point.
Spell Check
You can check the spelling of text in your chart.
To spell check:
1 Select Spell Check from the Tools menu. The Spelling dialog box is displayed.
2 3 4
Select the fields to spell check. Select Spell Check text objects if you want to spell check text that is not contained in chart boxes (free floating text object, titles, and so on). In the Check what area, select the scope of the spell check: Entire Chart: Applies the spell check to all chart boxes. Active sub-chart: Applies the spell check to the currently displayed sub-chart. Selection: Applies the spell check to only selected boxes.
5 6 Spell Check
Click OK to start the spell check. If a word that is not in the spelling dictionary is encountered, the standard Microsoft Office Spell Check dialog box is displayed. A message is displayed confirming the end of the spell check.0 6-13
OrgPlus User Guide
Inserting Comments
OrgPlus enables you to insert comments in a chart. This can be a useful tool for collaboration, allowing a chart owner to get input from others. Comments can also be viewed in OrgPlus Reader.
To insert a comment:
Select a box in your chart and select Comment from the Insert menu.
Note: When you add a comment, the comment author is shown in the title bar. The author is automatically set by Windows when a chart is created. If needed, you can change the author by selecting Project Properties from the File Menu (Summary tab).
To view and edit comments:

1 2 3 Any box with an attached comment has a red triangle in the upper right corner. Move the mouse cursor over the triangle to view a comment. Double-click on the triangle to edit the comment. Use the delete key to delete the selected comment. Note: Use the Text toolbar to specify font, size, and formatting for your comments.
Note: A list of all comments can be viewed using the Comments panel. See Chapter 8 for more details.
6-14
Inserting Comments

CHAPTER 6
Setting OrgPlus Options

This section describes the options available in OrgPlus and explains how you can set them according to your preferences.
In this section
Using the Options Panel Protecting Projects Page 6-15 Page 6-18
Using the Options Panel

The Options panel gives you control over some of the default behaviors of OrgPlus.
To modify OrgPlus Preferences:

1 Select Options from the Tools menu to display the Preferences tab of the Options dialog box.
Modify any of the following options in the Preferences tab: On application start, open the last project saved: Opens the last saved project the next time you launch OrgPlus.
6-15
OrgPlus User Guide
Automatically check for OrgPlus news and special offers: Keeps you informed of news and special offers from OrgPlus. Optimize Layout for New Sub-charts: Optimizes the layout of any sub-charts you create. With this option selected, OrgPlus minimizes the number of pages and optimizes the distribution of boxes on a page. Microsoft Office Toolbar: Enables you to specify which MS Office applications will include the OrgPlus toolbar. The OrgPlus toolbar allows you to create organizational charts directly in MS Office applications. Use OrgPlus to edit embedded charts created with MS OrgChart: By default, embedded charts created with MS OrgChart are opened in OrgPlus. If you want to edit these charts with MS OrgChart, turn this checkbox off. Use Fixed line widths for embedded objects: Microsoft Office does not fully support dashed lines. Select this option if you use dashed lines in your charts. Recently used file list: Sets the number of entries listed in the recently used file list in the File menu. 3 Click the New Projects tab.
Specify your preferences for the new project Properties: Default: Applies the blank template, which has minimal formatting.
6-16

CHAPTER 6
Take from Current Chart: Applies the design template used in the currently active chart. Apply Template: Allows you to choose a template to apply to new projects. Use the Select Template drop-down list to select a template to apply. You can view a preview of the selected template on the right side of the dialog. 5 Select the default style for Sub-chart Arrows and specify color and label options. Use Box Colors: Applies the chart box border and fill colors to your sub-chart arrows. Fill Color and Border Color: You can choose a fill color and/or border color from the drop-down menus. Show Label: To include a label with your sub-chart arrows click this checkbox and select the label from the drop-down list. If you add a label, select either Position Left or Position Right to specify the label location relative to the arrow. Click the Font button to set the Font Properties for the label. Note: The Advanced button enables you to change the numbering scheme used for sub-charts. Please see Formatting Charts in Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Charting for additional details. 6 Select the SMTP tab to display the SMTP Options. Setting up STMP allows you to automatically e-mail charts after publishing to PDF, PowerPoint or Word. For more information on publishing charts, see Chapter 10, Publishing Your Charts.
6-17
OrgPlus User Guide
Note: The SMTP tab also allows you to set your preferences for e-mail distribution of OrgPlus charts using groups. For more information, see Using Groups for E-mail Distribution in Chapter 5. User Information: Type Name and E-mail Address. Server Information: Type the name of the Outgoing mail server (SMTP). Type the number of the Outgoing server port (SMTP). Port 25 is the default. Type the Maximum number of recipients. If you leave this field blank, no maximum is applied by OrgPlus. Logon information: Type the User Name and Password. If you want the system to remember the password, click the Remember password checkbox. Click the Test Settings button. The system will send a test e-mail to the address you entered in User Information. 7 Click OK to save your changes and close the Options dialog box.
Protecting Projects
If your project is saved on a shared network, you may want to set a password to prevent unauthorized access to sensitive information. Note: DO NOT forget the password. Once a project is protected, no one can access it without the password, not even the author. 6-18 Setting OrgPlus Options

CHAPTER 6
To password protect projects:

1 With your project open, select Protect Project from the File menu to display the Protect Project dialog box.
2 3 4
Enter a password in the Password field and then enter it again in the Confirm Password field. Click OK. The project is now password protected. Note: Once you have protected a file, any user is prompted for a password whenever the file is opened.
To unprotect projects:
1 With your project open, select Unprotect from the File menu. The Password Required dialog box is displayed.
Enter the password and click OK. The project is now unprotected.
Viewing Project Properties

The Project Properties dialog box provides standard file information and attributes, user-entered file identification, and OrgPlus project statistics. This is feature is similar to File Properties available in Microsoft applications.
To view Project Properties:

1 Select Project Properties from the File menu to display the Project Properties dialog box.
6-19
OrgPlus User Guide
The Project Properties dialog box includes the following tabs: General: Shows standard file data and statistics. Summary: Enables you to enter authoring details about the project. Contents: Provides OrgPlus project statistics: Records: Total number of records in the project as a whole, including records applicable to hidden boxes. Orphans: Number of unassigned boxes in the project. Project Contents: 2 3 Statistics for each individual chart in the project, such as the number of boxes and sub-charts. A listing of the directories, profiles and reports defined for this project.
You can modify fields in the Summary tab but you cannot modify any fields in the General or Contents tabs. Click OK to save changes and close the dialog box.
6-20
Chapter 7 Working with Charts: Advanced Charting

In this chapter
Using the Master Page Adding Headers and Footers Adding AutoText Elements Adding Free Floating Objects Adding Hyperlinks to Objects Adding Auxiliary Lines Adding Legends Creating and Modifying Templates Using Templates Defining Dynamic Fields Using Formulas Using Constants Working with Sub-charts Working with Multiple Charts Advanced Chart Layout Multi-record Boxes Conditional Formatting page 7-2 page 7-3 page 7-4 page 7-6 Page 7-12 Page 7-13 page 7-14 Page 7-18 Page 7-20 Page 7-24 Page 7-30 Page 7-32 Page 7-36 Page 7-41 page 7-44 page 7-47 Page 7-49
7-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Chart Rules Creating Off-page References
Page 7-53 page 7-57
Overview
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of advanced charting functionality available in OrgPlus.
Using the Master Page

In this section
Viewing the Master Page Scaling Master Page Elements Page 7-3 Page 7-3
The Master Page enables you to define a background page that is common to all charts and sub-charts in a project. The Master Page layer often includes elements such a corporate logo and page numbering. Content on the Master Page layer is always drawn first, behind any elements that exist on the charts or sub-charts. In the following example you can see how the images added to the Master Page are drawn in the background when the Normal View is selected.
Normal View
Master Page View
7-2
Working with Charts: Advanced Charting

CHAPTER 7
Free-floating objects, headers, and footers are usually added to the Master Page; however, they can also be added to a specific sub-chart.
Viewing the Master Page

This section describes how to view the Master Page.
To view the Master Page of a chart:

With your chart open, select Master Page from the View menu to display he Master Page. (To revert to Normal view, select Normal from View menu.)
Note: You can enhance a charts presentation by inserting a logo or other picture as a free-floating object anywhere on the Master Page or on any individual sub-chart. See Inserting Pictures on page 7-8.
Scaling Master Page Elements

When printing or publishing, you can holistically adjust the scaling of all Master Page elements to achieve optimal results See Defining Page Setup in Chapter 4 for more details.
Adding Headers and Footers

You can enter free-floating text either in the header/footer area of a page or anywhere on the page using a text-box. Normally headers and footers are added to the Master Page.
To modify headers and footers:

1 2 3 With your chart open, select Master Page from the View menu. Select Show | Page Lines from the View menu if the header and footer areas are not already visible. Click in the header or footer area and enter a title for your chart.
Adding Headers and Footers
7-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Apply formatting to the text as required using the standard Font Properties dialog box, for example, Arial 24 Bold font and Purple color.
5 6
To enter text elsewhere, select Text Box from the Insert menu and click anywhere in the page. A text box is displayed in which you can enter text. Select Normal from the View menu when you are finished working with the Master Page. Note: The following diagram shows the four header and three footer areas in which you can enter text.
Adding AutoText Elements

AutoText elements are dynamic strings that provide information about the chart, such as the current page number, the total number of pages, the current date, the file name and so on. They can be inserted in headers and footers, or into text boxes. Typically they are added to the Master Page so that they are common to all sub-charts within a chart. For details about all the various AutoText elements, see Appendix A, Window Structure and Command Reference.
To insert AutoText elements:

1 If you want to add an AutoText element to the Master Page, select Master Page from the View menu.
7-4

CHAPTER 7
If you want to insert the AutoText element into an existing text box or a header area, click on that area. If you do not a select a destination for the AutoText element, a new text box containing the element is created when the element is inserted. Select AutoText from the Insert menu and then select an AutoText element from the submenu, for example, Page# to insert the current page number. Select Normal from the View menu when you are finished working with the Master Page.
3 4
Adding AutoText Elements
7-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Adding Free Floating Objects

You can add shapes, lines, text boxes, and pictures to your chart.
In this section
Drawing or Inserting Free Floating Objects Formatting Free-floating Objects Anchoring Free-floating Objects to Boxes Binding Free-floating Objects Changing Object Order Aligning Objects page 7-6 page 7-8 Page 7-9 page 7-9 page 7-10 page 7-11
Drawing or Inserting Free Floating Objects

This section describes how to work with the following free-floating objects: Drawing Shapes Drawing Lines Inserting Text Boxes Inserting Pictures page 7-6 page 7-7 page 7-7 page 7-8
Drawing Shapes
Shapes (rectangles, rounded rectangles and octagons) can be inserted anywhere in your chart. Once drawn the shape can be repositioned or resized.
To draw a shape:
1 Select Shape | Rectangle from the Insert menu, or click the Rectangle tool . The cursor changes to a crosshair . Note: You can also select other shapes, such as an Octagon. 2 Click and drag on the chart to draw a rectangle.
7-6

CHAPTER 7
Click on the Select tool
(or press <Esc>) to deselect the Shape tool.
Drawing Lines
You can draw both constrained (horizontal or vertical) and unconstrained (diagonal) lines. Once drawn a line can be repositioned or resized.
To draw a line:
1 Select Line | Horizontal or Vertical from the Insert menu, or click the Horizontal or Vertical Line tool Or Select Line | Diagonal from the Insert menu, or click the Diagonal Line tool . The cursor changes to a crosshair 2 . .
Click and drag on the chart to draw a line.
(or press <Esc>) to deselect the Line tool.
Inserting Text Boxes

Text boxes enable you enter text anywhere on your chart. Once added a text box can be reformatted, repositioned or resized.
To create a text box:

1 2 3 Select Text Box from the Insert menu, or click the Insert Text tool cursor changes to a Symbol. Click on the chart and start typing. When you have entered all the text, click again. The text is displayed in a text box as follows: . The
7-7
OrgPlus User Guide
(or press <Esc>) to deselect the Insert Text tool.
Inserting Pictures
You can insert pictures to a chart as free-floating objects.
To insert pictures as free-floating objects:

1 2 3 4 5 Select Picture from the Insert menu, or click the Insert Picture button The Select Picture dialog box is displayed. Select an image file. Click Open to embed the picture in your chart as a free-floating object. You can reposition the picture by clicking on it and dragging it to a new location. Note: Click the down-arrow on the right of the Open button and select Open as Link to link the picture in your chart. Linked pictures are not included in chart files; only a reference to the picture is included. .
Formatting Free-floating Objects

You can format the shapes, lines, text boxes (and the text within them) and pictures that are displayed in charts using the same techniques as described in Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Functions.
7-8

CHAPTER 7
Anchoring Free-floating Objects to Boxes

Free-floating objects can be linked to a chart box using the anchor function. Once anchored, a free floating object remains positioned next to the selected box even if the box is moved within the chart.
To anchor a free floating object to a chart box:

1 Select a chart box and at least one object, for example, a text box.
Select Anchor from the Insert menu.
To unanchor a free floating object from a chart box:

1 2 Select the anchored object you want to unanchor. Select Unanchor from the Insert menu.
Binding Free-floating Objects

When a free-floating object is placed on a page, it automatically repositions itself as the page is resized. In rare cases, you may want to change how an object is bound to a page (especially the master page).
To change the binding of a free floating object:

1 2 Select an object. Right-click on the object and select a Bind To option. As the page is resized the object is repositioned according to the selected option.
7-9
OrgPlus User Guide
Changing Object Order

The relative order of free-floating objects in your chart can be changed. The process is similar to changing the order of objects in PowerPoint.
To change the relative order of free floating objects:

1 Select the object whose order you want to change relative to other objects. For example, in the following diagram the Square is selected.
Select Order from the Format menu. Select from the following options: Bring to Front: Moves the selected object to the front. Send to Back: Moves the selected object to the back. Bring Forward: Moves the selected object one level forward. Send Backwards: Moves the selected object one level back. In the following example the square is moved one level forward using the Bring Forward option.
7-10

CHAPTER 7
Aligning Objects
You can align free-floating objects. The process is similar aligning objects in PowerPoint.
To align free floating objects:

1 Select the objects that you want to align. Note: Holding down the Ctrl key while clicking on a free-floating object enables you to select or unselect objects one at a time.
Select Align from the Format menu. Select from following options: Align Left Align Center Align Right Align Top Align Middle Align Bottom In the following example the objects are aligned to the left.
7-11
OrgPlus User Guide
Adding Hyperlinks to Objects

You can add hyperlinks to free floating objects.
To add hyperlinks to floating objects:

1 2 3 4 5 Select the object you want to hyperlink Select Hyperlink from the Insert menu or right click on the object and select Hyperlink | Edit Hyperlink. Define the hyperlink. Note: The title is shown when you mouse over a hyperlinked object. Click OK. Note: Ctrl-Click an object to follow a hyperlink. Right click and select Hyperlink | Remove Hyperlink to delete a hyperlink.
7-12

CHAPTER 7
Adding Auxiliary Lines

You can add auxiliary lines between boxes to show additional information about reporting relationships, such as dotted line reporting. For example, in the following diagram, a dotted line shows the reporting relationship between Sue Watkins and Tina Nomura.
To draw an auxiliary line between two boxes:

1 Select Line | Auxiliary from the Insert menu or click the Auxiliary Line tool . 2 Move the pointer over a box. Anchor point symbols appear on all four sides of the box and in the middle of the box. Move the mouse to one of the anchor points and click and drag toward another box. Once over the other box, the same anchor point symbols are displayed. Release the mouse button over the desired anchor point. Releasing the mouse over the center anchor point will automatically pick the optimal anchor point. Note: When importing data from an external data source, you can use the AuxReportsTo advanced data field to define auxiliary lines in your charts. See Importing Advanced Data Fields in Chapter 9: Importing and Exporting Data for more information.
Adding Auxiliary Lines
7-13
OrgPlus User Guide
Adding Legends
You can add legends to your chart. Each legend contains one or more color coded legend entries. Once a legend has been inserted, it can be moved or resized in the same manner as other free floating objects. The following diagram contains a legend that color codes full time, part time, and contract employees.
A legend consists of the following elements:
Note: Legends are often linked to Conditional Formats. You may want to create conditional formats before creating a legend. See Creating a Conditional Format on page 7-49 for more information on conditional formats.
To add a legend manually:

1 2 If you want the legend to be shown with every sub-chart, select Master Page from the View menu. Select Legend from the Insert menu to display the Legend Properties dialog box.
7-14

CHAPTER 7
3 4 5
Make sure the Legend tab is selected. Click Add to add a legend entry. Repeat to add any number of legend entries. To name an entry, click in the corresponding row in the entry column and enter a name. Click the Format Entry button to set the font properties for an entry. Note: To delete a legend entry, select the entry and click on the Delete button.
To format the key for an entry, click in the corresponding row in the key column and then select the Format Key button or click the button. The Format Legend Key Properties dialog box is displayed. Use the Color and Lines tab and the Shadow tab to set the display properties for each key. You can also use the Conditional Formats tab to edit a key linked to a conditional format. Click OK. Use the Color and Lines tab and the Shadow tab to set the display properties for the entire legend.
8 9
10 Click OK.
Adding Legends
7-15
OrgPlus User Guide
To create a legend based on conditional formatting:

If you use conditional formats to differentiate the boxes in your chart, you can create a legend for your chart that is based on those conditional formats. See Conditional Formatting in this chapter for details on creating and applying conditional formats. 1 2 3 Open a chart that includes conditional formats. Select Legend from the Insert menu to display the Legend Properties dialog box. Click the Conditional Formats tab. This tab is available only if you have defined conditional formats.
Select Auto to create a legend that includes all the defined conditional formats or select only the conditional formats you want to include in your legend. You can use the checkboxes to select individual conditions, or click the Check All button. Note: You can return to this dialog box by double-clicking the legend in your chart.
To delete a legend:
1 Select a legend.
7-16

CHAPTER 7
Note: If the legend is located in the master page, select Master Page from the View menu. Select Normal from the View menu after deleting the legend. 2 Select Delete from the Edit menu or hit the Delete key on your keyboard.
To edit a legend:
1 Right-click on a legend and select Legend Properties from the context menu. The Legend Properties dialog is displayed. Note: If the legend is located in the master page, select Master Page from the View menu. Select Normal from the View menu after editing the legend. 2 3 Modify the legend properties using the Color and Lines, Shadow, Legend and Conditional Formats tabs. Click OK.
To edit a legend entry:

1 Select a legend. Note: If the legend is located in the master page, select Master Page from the View menu. Select Normal from the View menu after editing the legend. 2 3 4 5 Select any legend entry. Right-click and select Format Key from the context menu. The Legend Key Properties dialog is displayed. Modify the legend entry properties using the Color and Lines, Shadow, and Conditional Formats tabs. Click OK. Note: Click any label within a legend to edit the legend entry name.
Adding Legends
7-17
OrgPlus User Guide
Creating and Modifying Templates

OrgPlus provides a variety chart design, box and branch templates. You can also create or modify your own templates. This section describes how you can create or modify your own templates.
In this section
Learning About Templates Creating Design, Box, and Branch Templates Multi-record Boxes and Templates Modifying Templates page 7-18 page 7-18 Page 7-19 page 7-19
Learning About Templates

There are a number of factors to keep in mind when creating your own templates: Box and design templates do not change which fields are displayed in a box. Box and design templates change only the format and font selection parameters. To change the box layout, see Applying File Templates in this chapter.
Creating Design, Box, and Branch Templates

OrgPlus enables you to create new templates from an existing file or template.
To create a new template:

1 2 3 Select Open from the File menu. The Open dialog box is displayed. Select an existing chart or template file and click Open. Save the chart as a template. If you want to save the template as a Design template:
Select Save As from the File menu, and choose the file type OrgPlus 7 Template File (*.opxt).
Note: If you save this file in your MyCharts/Templates folder, it automatically appears in the design section of the templates panel. If you want to save the template as a Box template:
a b
Delete all boxes in your chart, except for the box that defines the template. Select Save As from the File menu and choose the file type OrgPlus 7 Template File (*.opxt). Working with Charts: Advanced Charting
7-18

CHAPTER 7
Note: If you save this file in your MyCharts/Templates/Box folder, it automatically appears in the box section of the templates panel. If you want to save the template as a Branch template:
a b
Create the branch layout structure that you want by always adding child boxes to the left most node in the chart. Select Save As from the File menu and choose the file type OrgPlus 7 Template File (*.opxt).
Note: If you save this file in your MyCharts/Templates/Branch folder, it automatically appears in the branch section of the templates panel.
Multi-record Boxes and Templates

When creating or modifying templates, you can define the layout for multi-record boxes. When you apply a template file containing one or more multi-record boxes to a chart, the templates multi-record box layout is applied to the multi-record boxes in the chart.
Modifying Templates
OrgPlus enables you to modify templates.
To modify templates:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Select Open from the File menu or click the Open button box is displayed. Select any template file (of type .opxt) and click Open. Modify the file/template as required, in the same way as working with a chart. Select Save As from the File menu. Select OrgPlus 7 Template File (*.opxt) from the Save as type drop-down list. Click Save. You may be prompted to replace the existing file, in this case click Yes. . The Open dialog
Creating and Modifying Templates
7-19
OrgPlus User Guide
Using Templates
Templates provide a quick way to format your chart. You can also use Template files to copy reports, directories, groups, conditional formats, and profiles from an existing file to your current file.
In this section
Using the Templates Panel Applying Template Files page 7-20 page 7-22
Using the Templates Panel

OrgPlus provides a variety of chart design, box and branch templates. You can also create or modify your own templates.
In this section
Applying Design Templates Applying Branch Templates Applying Box Templates page 7-20 page 7-21 page 7-21
Applying Design Templates

Design templates allow you to format an existing chart. They do not modify what fields are shown in the chart or the branch styles used in the chart. Design templates change the look and feel of your chart.
To apply design templates:

1 2 3 4 If the Template Panel is not shown, select Template from the View menu. Click the Design button to display design templates. Drag the chosen template to the chart area and release the mouse button. The template is applied. Right-click a design templates to select from the following options: Apply to Sub-chart: Applies the template to the displayed sub-chart. Apply to Entire Chart: Applies the template to the entire chart (all defined subcharts). Note: By default a design template is applied to all sub-charts within a chart.
7-20

CHAPTER 7
Applying Branch Templates

Branch templates allow you change the branch style of an existing chart. Branch templates only reformat the layout of your chart.
To apply a branch template:

1 2 3 4 If the Template Panel is not shown, select Template from the View menu. Click the Branch button in the template panel to display branch templates. Drag the chosen template to the chart area and release the mouse button. The template is applied. Right-click a design template and select from the following options: Apply to Sub-chart: Applies the template to the displayed sub-chart. Apply to Entire Chart: Applies the template to the entire chart (all defined subcharts). 5 Note: By default a branch template is applied to all sub-charts within a chart.
Applying Box Templates

Box templates allow you change the format for any set of boxes in your chart. Box templates change only the format of boxes; the content of boxes remains unchanged.
To apply a box template:

1 2 3 4 If the Template Panel is not shown, select Template from the View menu. Click the Box button in the template panel to display box templates. Drag the chosen template over any box and release the mouse button. The template is applied. Right-click a box template and select from the following options: Apply to Selection: Applies the template to the selected boxes. Apply to Sub-chart: Applies the template to the displayed sub-chart. Apply to Entire Chart: Applies the template to the entire chart (all defined subcharts).
Using Templates
7-21
OrgPlus User Guide
Applying Template Files

Template files enable you to copy the look and feel from an existing template file to your chart. You can also copy Directory, Profile, Report, Group and Conditional Format definitions from the template file.
To apply template files:

1 2 Select Apply Template File from the Chart menu. Choose a template and click Open. The Apply Template dialog box is displayed.
To reformat your chart: In the Apply what area, select Look and Feel. In the Apply To area, select one of the following options: Entire chart: Applies the template to the entire chart. Active sub-chart: Applies the template to the displayed sub-chart. Selection: Applies the template to the selected boxes.
If you want to copy selected definitions from the template: In the Apply what area, select Contents.
7-22

CHAPTER 7
Choose the elements to import: Design Copy Box Layout Note: If your template file contains a multi-record box, checking the Copy Box Layout checkbox applies the templates multi-record box layout to the charts multi-record boxes. 5 Copy Reports Copy Profiles Copy Master Page Copy Constants Branch Copy Directories Copy Groups Copy Conditional Formats Copy Chart Rules Copy Search
Click OK to apply the template. Note: Selecting Contents reformats the entire chart to match the template file. The fields shown in boxes, branch styles, box formatting, and chart properties are updated to match the template file. Note: If the template file contains fields that are not defined in the current chart, you are prompted to add the additional fields to your chart.
Using Templates
7-23
OrgPlus User Guide
Defining Dynamic Fields

This section describes the various types of calculations available in OrgPlus, and how to define a formula field. Formulas are not available in OrgPlus Express.
In this section
Adding Formulas Available Formulas Calculations Formula Options Page 7-24 Page 7-27 Page 7-28 Page 7-30
Adding Formulas
To define a formula field:
1 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu to display the Define Fields dialog box. When you specify a field as a Formula, OrgPlus displays the Formula Properties dialog box. You can also edit an existing formula by clicking the Formula button . The following is an example of the Formula Properties dialog box with the Average drop-down list option selected.
7-24

CHAPTER 7
2 3 4 5
Select the Formula tab. Select a formula from the left-most drop-down list. See Available Formulas on page 7-27 for formula definitions. If the selected formula requires a field, select a field from top-middle drop-down list. Based on the selected type of formula, you must select the boxes that you want to include in this calculation. You can specify the boxes to include (using the right-most drop-down) as follows: Co-workers: All boxes sharing the same manager, including the manager's assistants. Level: All boxes on the same level in the chart. Branch and Mgr: All boxes in a branch, including the branch's manager. Branch Excl. Mgr: All boxes in a branch, excluding the branch's manager. Dir Sub and Manager: All direct subordinates of a single manager, including the manager. Dir Subordinates: All direct subordinates of a single manager, excluding the manager.
7-25
OrgPlus User Guide
Entire Chart: All boxes in the chart. Current Mgr: A box's direct manager (one level up). All Mgrs Inclusive: The path of managers from the top of the tree down to that box, including the box. All Managers Exclusive: The path of managers from the top of the tree down to that box, excluding the box. Top of Chart: The number of boxes at the top level of the chart. Self: The current box. 6 7 Optionally, you can perform a calculation (divide, multiply, add, or subtract) on multiple arguments. See Calculations in this chapter for more information. If required, you can specify which boxes are to be included or excluded from a calculation by creating a conditional formula. To create a conditional formula, select the Criteria tab. Select the Define Criteria checkbox and then define the criteria for inclusion.
To define formula options:

1 2 7-26 Use the Options tab to specify formula options such as a min and max result. See Formula Options section in this chapter for more details. Click OK to save the formula. Working with Charts: Advanced Charting

CHAPTER 7
Available Formulas
The following formulas are available in OrgPlus.
Numeric Formulas
The following formulas are for use with number fields. Average: Compute an average of the selected number field for all specified boxes. Non-zero count: Count the number of specified boxes that do not contain a number field with a zero value. Fraction of Total: Compute the percentage of a total. First sum the field across all specified boxes, and then divide into the field value for each box. Maximum/Minimum: Determines the maximum or minimum value of the selected field across all specified boxes. Product: Multiply the values of the selected field across the specified boxes. Standard Deviation: Compute the standard deviation for the selected field and boxes. Total: Sum the selected field across the specified boxes. Variance: Compute the variance for the selected field.
General Formulas
Equals: Perform a calculation using a field or set of fields. For example, performance change = current performance last years performance. ReportsTo: Get a value from a managers field.
Text Formulas
The following formulas are for use with text fields. Upper: Convert a text field to all upper case. Lower: Convert all letters in a text field to lowercase. Trim: Remove all spaces from a text field except for single spaces between words. Len: Return the number of characters in a text field. Count: Count the number of specified boxes. Mid: Return a sub-string from the middle of a text field. For example, Mid(3,3,ABC123) = C12. Left: Return a sub-string from the start of a text field. For example, Left(3,ABC123) = ABC. Defining Dynamic Fields 7-27
OrgPlus User Guide
Right: Return a sub-string from the end of a text field. For example, Right(3,ABC123) = 123.
Date Formulas
The following formulas are for use with date fields. Year: Return the year from the selected date field. Month: Return the month (1-12) from the selected date field. Day: Return the day from the selected date field.
Chart Formulas
The following formulas allow you to access information about your chart hierarchy: Level: Return chart level for a box. Sub-levels: Return number of subordinate levels for a box. Occurrences: Return number of times a box appears in the chart based on the duplicate identifier (dotted line) key. Allocation: Return 1/ Occurrences. For example, if a person appears four times in chart their allocation is 0.25.
Calculations
Within a formula, you can perform a calculation. Below are some sample calculations: Field + Field: Total Compensation = Salary + Bonus
Field * Value: Next Year Salary = Current Salary * 1.05
Constant - Field: Year To Retirement = RETIREMENT AGE Current Age
7-28

CHAPTER 7
Note: See Using Constants in this chapter for more information on Constants. You can also perform date calculations using the TODAY constant and/or the Year, Month, and Day functions. Below are some sample date calculations: Years_with_company: Today Hire_Date
Months_since_last_review: Today Review_Date
To define a calculation within a formula:

1 With the Formula dialog open and the formula tab selected, define the first argument type. The following types are available: 2 3 Field Text Number Date Date (Years) Date (Months) Date (Days) Constant
Select or type an argument value. Select a range. Available Formulas on page 7-27. 7-29
OrgPlus User Guide
4 5 6
Select an operator (/, *, +, -). Define the type for the second argument. Select or type a value for the second argument. Optionally, you can also define a third argument using the same procedure as noted in the steps above.
Click OK.
Formula Options
The Options tab in the Formula dialog allows you to further define how a formula will be computed. The following formula options are available: Min: Specify the minimum value returned by the formula. Max: Specify the maximum value returned by the formula. Round: Specify whether uneven calculation results should be rounded Up or Down. Digits: Select the number of digits for the Round option. Ignore Selected Group: By Default, if a group is applied, boxes that are not included in the group are not included in the current calculation. The Ignore Selected Group option includes all boxes in a calculation regardless of the selected group. If you turn this checkbox on, you can create a group based on a formula. Exclude zero values: Select this option to exclude zero values from counts and products. Exclude empty fields: Select this option to exclude empty fields from counts and products. Assistants: Select whether the current formula includes assistants, excludes assistants or includes only assistants. An assistant is defined as any box with the assistant branch style. Duplicates: Specify whether the current formula includes duplicate records (dotted line reports), excludes duplicate records, or allocates duplicate records. For example, if you select the allocation option, a person included in a chart three times has a value of 0.333 when one of the corresponding boxes is included in a count.
Using Formulas
OrgPlus can total budgets, revenues, project hours, and more. You can compare results between positions, departments, and divisions. 7-30 Working with Charts: Advanced Charting

CHAPTER 7
Calculations can be performed only on Number, Date, and Text fields. Number fields are used to enter discrete amounts, such as a salary or budget. Formula fields are calculated based on field values or chart properties (such as a count of subordinate boxes).
In this section
Recalculating Formulas Automatically Excluding Boxes from Formula Calculations page 7-31 page 7-31
Recalculating Formulas Automatically

By default, formulas are recalculated automatically each time a change is made to a chart. For large charts, you may want to turn automatic recalculation off to enhance performance. Select Auto Recalculation from the Chart menu to turn automatic recalculation of formulas on and off. If automatic recalculation is OFF, select Recalculate Formulas from the Chart menu to update all formula fields. Caution: While Auto Recalculation is OFF, there is no indication that formulas are not up to date.
Excluding Boxes from Formula Calculations

Sometimes, you may want to exclude one or more boxes from a calculation. For example, a headcount calculation should not include vacant positions.
To exclude fields from calculations:

1 2 Select the boxes that you want to exclude from a calculation. Select Box Properties from the Format menu and then click the Advanced tab. The Box Properties dialog box Advanced tab is displayed.
Using Formulas
7-31
OrgPlus User Guide
Complete your selections as follows: Exclude from Calculations: Select a set of fields to exclude from calculated functions. Exclude from Counts: Select this option to exclude a box from count functions.
Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.
Using Constants
OrgPlus allows you to define constants that you can use in formulas, conditional formats, groups, searches, reports and chart rules. Changing the value of a constant will update every element that references that constant. For example, you can define a conditional format that sets the color of a box based upon whether an employee was hired before or after a specific date. If you define a constant called cutoff date, and reference it in the conditional format, you can now easily visualize the impact of changing the value of the cutoff date.
7-32

CHAPTER 7
In this section
Adding and Deleting Constants Referencing Constants page 7-33 page 7-34
Adding and Deleting Constants

You can create any number of constants that can be referenced when defining formulas, conditional formulas, groups, reports, conditional formats, chart rules, and in the search panel.
To add a constant:
1 2 3 4 Select Define Constants from the Data menu. The Define Constants dialog is displayed. Click Add. A constant is added. Name the constant by entering a name into the Name column. Set the field type by selecting from the Type drop-down list for that constant. The following options are available: Text Date Number 5 Enter a value for the constant into the Value column.
Using Constants
7-33
OrgPlus User Guide
To edit a constant:
1 2 3 4 Select Define Constants from the Data menu. The Define Constants dialog is displayed. Click in the Value column associated with a constant. Edit the value for that constant as needed. Note: You can rename a constant by clicking in the Name column or you can change the type using the Type drop-down.
To delete a constant:
1 2 3 Select Define Constants from the Data menu. The Define Constants dialog is displayed. Select a constant by clicking in the first column associated with that constant. Click Delete. A warning message is displayed asking you to confirm that you want to permanently delete the constant. Click Yes to delete or No to cancel the action. All references to constants will be replaced by the last value stored in the constant.
Referencing Constants
In order to reference a constant, use the syntax, [$<Constant Name>], when entering criteria for any comparison. For example, to reference a constant (called Retirement Age) in a conditional format you would enter the condition as follows:
7-34

CHAPTER 7
The value of the Retirement Age constant could be varied as part of a what-if analysis exercise.
Using Constants
7-35
OrgPlus User Guide
Working with Sub-charts

Large charts can be subdivided into sub-charts. For example, an organization with four divisions can be presented as five sub-charts one for the executive team, and one for each division. This section describes how to work with sub-charts. The following picture shows a chart after sub-charting.
In this section
Inserting Sub-chart Breaks Labeling Sub-chart Breaks Removing Sub-chart Breaks Navigating Sub-charts Creating Sub-charts Using the Sub-chart Wizard Using the Sub-chart Panel 7-36 page 7-37 Page 7-37 Page 7-37 page 7-37 Page 7-38 page 7-39 Working with Charts: Advanced Charting

CHAPTER 7
Inserting Sub-chart Breaks

You can insert sub-chart breaks manually at any level in your chart.
To insert a manual sub-chart break:

1 2 Select a box that will be the top position in your new sub-chart. Select Sub-chart | Insert Sub-chart Break from the Insert menu. The subchart is created.
Labeling Sub-chart Breaks

You can label your sub-chart breaks by defining labels to attach to the sub-chart arrows. Sub-chart arrow labels improve navigation within a large chart and enhance the usefulness of your printed and published charts.
See Formatting Charts in Chapter 4 for details on defining labels for your sub-chart arrows.
Removing Sub-chart Breaks

You can remove sub-chart breaks one at a time or all at once.
To remove selected sub-chart breaks:

Select any boxes containing a sub-chart break ( | Remove Sub-chart Break from the Insert menu. ) and then select Sub-chart
To remove all sub-chart breaks in the entire chart:

Select Sub-chart | Remove All Breaks from the Insert menu. All the sub-chart breaks are removed.
Navigating Sub-charts
OrgPlus enables you to navigate sub-charts by clicking in the chart area or using the sub-charts panel.
To navigate sub-charts using symbols:

1 Use the symbol to navigate down the sub-chart tree. 7-37
OrgPlus User Guide
Use the
symbol to navigate up the sub-chart tree.
Creating Sub-charts Using the Sub-chart Wizard

The sub-chart wizard enables you to define a set of rules that are used to break your chart into sub-charts.
To create sub-charts using the Sub-chart Wizard:

1 With the chart open, select Sub-chart | Create Sub-charts from the Insert menu to display the Create Sub-charts dialog box.
Define your sub-charting options as follows: Create Sub-charts: Select one of the following criteria according to which subchart breaks should be created. Every: Creates a sub-chart break at every nth level in the chart. Using Field: Creates a sub-chart at each occurrence of the field. At Level: Creates a sub-chart break at the specified levels. (Separate level numbers by comma.) Condition: Defines a condition based on complex criteria. The Condition dialog is displayed.
Smart Sub-chart breaks: Specify the minimum number of boxes in a branch before a break is inserted. 7-38 Working with Charts: Advanced Charting

CHAPTER 7
Name Sub-charts: Specify how each sub-chart page should be named. Select from: Default: All sub-charts are named based on the default: Sub-chart1, Sub-chart2, and so on. From Field: All sub-charts are based on the value of the specified field. The field value is extracted from a box when a sub-chart break is inserted.
Apply to: Specify whether the sub-chart rules are to be applied to the Entire Chart, the Active sub-chart, or the current Selection. 3 Click OK. The chart is sub-charted according to the selected options.
Note: By default, the Sub-chart panel is automatically displayed after creating sub-charts. Clear the View Sub-charts check box if you do not wish to display the Sub-chart panel.
Using the Sub-chart Panel

The Sub-chart panel lists the sub-charts in your chart using a tree structure. Clicking a sub-chart name displays the corresponding sub-chart.
7-39
OrgPlus User Guide
The Sub-charts panel toolbar provides the following functions: Icon Name Check All Description Select all sub-charts.
Uncheck All Unselect all sub-charts. Create Sub- Display the Create Sub-charts dialog box. charts Send to Excel Export data from selected sub-chart(s) to an Excel spreadsheet.
Export Data Export data from selected sub-chart(s) using the Export Data dialog box. Reconnect Subchart(s) Print Subcharts OrgUnit Chart Remove sub-chart breaks from the selected sub-charts.
Print the selected sub-charts.
Create a chart of OrgUnits (or departments) from the hierarchy shown in the sub-charts panel.
To rename a sub-chart:
1 2 3 Make sure the sub-chart panel is displayed by selecting Sub-charts from the View menu. Double-click a sub-chart. Type in a sub-chart name and press <Enter>.
To navigate sub-charts using the Sub-chart panel.

1 Click the Sub-charts tab on the lower right side of the main window, or select Sub-charts from the View menu if that tab is not available. The Sub-charts panel is displayed in the main window. Click on any sub-chart listed in the Sub-charts panel. The corresponding sub-chart is displayed.
7-40

CHAPTER 7
To create an OrgUnit Chart:

1 Make sure the sub-chart panel is displayed by selecting Sub-charts from the View menu. Click on the OrgUnit Chart button .
2 3
Define your OrgUnit Chart options as follows: Sub-chart levels: Specify the number of levels to include when creating the OrgUnit chart. Include Headcounts: Specify whether to include headcounts when creating the OrgUnit chart.
Click OK. An untitled OrgUnit Chart is created based on the selected options.
Working with Multiple Charts

OrgPlus projects can contain multiple charts, similar to the Microsoft Excel workbook and worksheet concept. Each chart within a project can show a unique view that displays different data fields, contains different formatting, and may even contain a different hierarchy. While the display of data may be different across multiple charts, the underlying data records are shared. Any changes made to data in one chart are always reflected in all other charts. The only exception is that a chart may have a unique hierarchy. For example, two project teams may contain the same individuals but with different reporting relationships.
7-41
OrgPlus User Guide
In this section
Creating New Charts Renaming or Deleting Charts Using Chart Tabs page 7-42 page 7-43 page 7-43
Creating New Charts

New charts in a project either share the same hierarchy as the original chart or have a different hierarchy.
To create a new chart in a project:

1 Select Chart from the Insert menu, or right-click the chart's tab and select New Chart from the context menu. The New Chart dialog box is displayed.
Define how you want the new chart to be created: Reporting: Indicate whether to keep the hierarchy synchronized with the current chart or whether to create a new hierarchy: Share and maintain the projects hierarchy across all charts: Copies the existing chart to a new chart. Changes to the hierarchy of the new chart are synchronized with the original chart. Do not share, maintain unique hierarchy in this chart: Select from the following options: Empty Chart: Creates an empty chart with a new hierarchy.
7-42

CHAPTER 7
Entire Chart: Copies the existing chart to a new chart. Changes to the hierarchy of the new chart are NOT synchronized with the original chart. Reconnect all sub-charts: Remove all sub-chart breaks from the new chart. 3 Click OK. The new chart is created and a new chart tab is added at the bottom of the main window.
Renaming or Deleting Charts

When new charts are created, OrgPlus automatically assigns the default names, Chart1, Chart2, and so on.
To rename a chart:
1 Right-click a chart tab and select Rename Chart from the pop-up menu to display the Rename Chart dialog box.
Enter a new name and click OK.
To delete a chart:
1 Do one of the following to delete a chart. Right-click the chart's tab and select Delete Chart from the pop-up menu. Select Delete Chart from the Edit menu. 2 In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete to delete the chart.
Using Chart Tabs

If you have multiple charts in your project, you can switch between charts using chart tabs.
To view another chart:

Do one of the following: Select a chart tab at the bottom of the main window. Select Chart List from the Chart menu and select the required chart.
7-43
OrgPlus User Guide
Advanced Chart Layout

This section describes the methods for formatting a chart.
In this section
Grouping Boxes Demoting Boxes Spacing Chart Boxes Optimizing Chart Layout Positioning Charts Page 7-44 Page 7-45 page 7-44 page 7-46 page 7-47
Grouping Boxes
The group function is used to group one or more peers that report to the same manager.
To group or ungroup boxes

1 2 3 7-44 Choose the Select tool .
Select the boxes that you wish to group (Use shift-click to select multiple boxes). All selected boxes must report to the same manager, Right-click on any of the selected boxes. Working with Charts: Advanced Charting

CHAPTER 7
Select Actions | Group Right or Actions | Group Left to the boxes. Note: Any box that has been grouped can be ungrouped by right-clicking on that box and selecting Actions | Ungroup. Note: Boxes can also be grouped by selecting one or more boxes that share a common manager and then selecting a branch style for those boxes. Note: Boxes can also be grouped using a data driven approach, see Chart Rules on page 7-53 for more information.
Demoting Boxes
The demote function is used to drop any box down one or more levels in a chart.
To demote or promote a box

1 2 3 Choose the Select tool .
Right-click on the box that you want to promote or demote. Select Actions | Demote Right or Actions | Demote Left to demote a box one level. Repeat to demote additional levels. Note: Any box that has been demoted can be promoted by right-clicking on that box and selecting Actions | Promote. Note: Boxes can also be demoted using a data driven approach, see Chart Rules on page 7-53 for more information.
Advanced Chart Layout
7-45
OrgPlus User Guide
Spacing Chart Boxes

You can change the spacing between boxes in your chart.
To adjust the spacing between boxes:

1 If you want to change the spacing for a set of boxes, select the boxes and their manager. Note: If nothing is selected the spacing for all boxes in the current sub-chart is changed. 2 Select Spacing from the Format menu. The Box Spacing dialog box is displayed.
Change the spacing as desired. Note: Click Restore Defaults to reset to the default spacing.
Click OK to change the spacing between boxes.
Optimizing Chart Layout

The Optimize Branch Styles function reformats the branches in your chart to optimize the distribution of boxes on a page.
To optimize the branch styles in your chart:

Select Optimize Branch Styles from the Chart menu.
7-46

CHAPTER 7
Positioning Charts
You can center your chart vertically and/or horizontally on the page or you can manually position your chart.
To center your chart:

Select Center Up/Down from the Chart menu. The chart is centered vertically from page. Select Center Left/Right from the Chart menu. The chart is centered horizontally from page.
To reposition your chart manually:

Select the move chart tool and click and drag the chart to a new position.
Multi-record Boxes
You can create boxes that contain more then one record. For example, you can display an entire sales staff in one box.
Note: See Using the Import Wizard in Chapter 9 for more information on creating Multi-record boxes from imported data.
To define a multi-record box:

1 2 3 4 5 With your chart open, select one or more boxes. Select Box Properties from the Format menu. The Box Properties dialog box is displayed. Click the Box Layout tab. Click the Layout Options button to display the Layout Options dialog box. Select the Multi-Record Box checkbox and click OK to return to the Box Layout display.
Multi-record Boxes
7-47
OrgPlus User Guide
Click the Show Sub-box Properties checkbox to edit the sub-box. The Subbox Properties works in the same fashion as the Box Properties dialog (See Formatting Boxes Chapter 4). Note: As you add or remove fields from a multi-record box, the layout defined for the sub-box will be repeated for each record in the multi-record box.
7 8
When you are done editing the sub-box, uncheck the Show Sub-box properties checkbox. Click OK to update.
Note: See Defining and Displaying Fields in Chapter 4 for more layout options. Note: You can reorder records within a multi-record box using drag and drop in the chart.
To format multi-record boxes with templates:

See Multi-record Boxes and Templates in this Chapter.
7-48

CHAPTER 7
Conditional formatting enables you to dynamically apply formatting to a sub-set of a chart that meets specific criteria. OrgPlus applies conditional formats from the first defined condition to the last defined condition. Note: When two or more conditions address the same format element, OrgPlus applies the last condition only.
In this section
Creating a Conditional Format Modifying Conditional Formats page 7-49 Page 7-52
Creating a Conditional Format

A conditional format consists of a condition and a format, where the format is applied to boxes that meet the condition.
To create a condition:
1 Select Conditional Formatting from the Format menu to display the Conditional Formatting dialog box..
Note: You can duplicate an existing conditional format using the Copy button. 2 Click Add to display the Define Conditional Formatting Properties dialog box.
7-49
OrgPlus User Guide
3 4
Enter the condition name in the Condition Name field. Define the criteria for the condition as follows: Define the first search criteria expression by selecting from the Field Name and Comparison drop-down lists. Then enter the comparison string in the Contents field. Define any additional search criteria in the second and subsequent lines by selecting the And/OR search condition for each line. Select Match Case to match only words that are capitalized the same way as the text in the Contents field. Select Match Whole Word to match only complete words that match the Contents field entries. Note: Use the Constants button to include any defined constants in the condition. See Using Constants on page 7-32 for more information on using constants.
Optionally, you can limit a conditional format to one or more levels in your chart as follows: Select the Limit to checkbox and select chart or sub-chart from the drop-down list to limit the conditional format to a level(s) within the entire chart or a level(s) within the current sub-chart. Define the level range(s) to which you want the conditional format limit to apply.
7-50

CHAPTER 7
6 7
Click OK. The Conditional Formatting Rule is added to the list of rules in the Conditional Formatting dialog box. Select the condition and use the Format Box, Format Fields, or Format Connector buttons to define a format. Use the Clear Format button to reset formatting as needed. Note: The Use Selection button in the Box Properties dialog will copy the formatting information from the currently selected chart box. This can save time when setting up conditional formats.
Click OK. The format is applied to all boxes in all charts that meet the condition. Note: You can disable a condition by clearing that conditions check box.
7-51
OrgPlus User Guide
Modifying Conditional Formats

Conditional Formatting Rules can be edited, deleted or reordered at any time.
In this section
Editing Conditional Formats Deleting Conditional Formats Reordering Conditional Formats page 7-52 page 7-52 page 7-53
Editing Conditional Formats

You may need to modify the criteria for a condition or the format that is applied to boxes that meet a condition.
To edit a conditional format:

1 Select Conditional Formatting from the Format menu to display the Conditional Formatting dialog box listing all the defined Conditional Formatting Rules. Select a condition and click Edit to modify the conditions criteria. Click the Format Box, Format Fields or Format Connector buttons to modify the format. Click Clear Format to reset the formatting. Click OK to close the Conditional Formatting dialog box.
2 3 4
Deleting Conditional Formats

You can remove a conditional format at any time.
To delete a conditional format:

1 2 3 4 5 Select Conditional Formatting from the Format menu to display the Conditional Formatting dialog box. Select a condition. Click Delete. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click Yes to delete the condition. Click OK to close the Conditional Formatting dialog box.
7-52

CHAPTER 7
Reordering Conditional Formats

Each condition is applied to the chart starting with the first condition and ending with last condition. Any box in your chart may satisfy two or more conditions. In this case you may need to reorder conditions to achieve the desired formatting.
To reorder a conditional format:

1 2 3 4 5 Select Conditional Formatting from the Format menu to display the Conditional Formatting dialog box. Select a condition. Click the up arrow Click the down arrow to move the condition up. to move the condition down.
Click OK to close the Conditional Formatting dialog box.
Chart Rules
You can define Chart Rules that enable you to change branch styles within a chart based on a condition and/or perform an action (group left, group right, demote left or demote right) based on a defined condition. Chart Rules can be applied at any time including after a data refresh. (See Chapter 10, Publishing your Chart.)
In this section
Creating Chart Rules Modifying Chart Rules page 7-53 Page 7-55
Creating Chart Rules

A chart rule enables you to define a condition, an action and/or a style. When the condition is met, the action and/or style is applied to boxes to which the rule applies..
Chart Rules
7-53
OrgPlus User Guide
To create a chart rule:

1 Select Chart Rules from the Format menu to display the Chart Rules dialog box.
2 3 4
Click Add. The Chart Rules dialog box Define Chart Rule tab is displayed. Enter the rule name in the Chart Rule Name field. Define the criteria for the rule as follows: Define the first search criteria expression by selecting from the Field Name and Comparison drop-down lists. Then enter the comparison string in the Contents field. Define any additional search criteria in the second and subsequent lines by selecting the And/OR search condition for each line. Select Match Case to match only words that are capitalized the same way as the text in the Contents field. Select Whole Word Only to match only complete words that match the Contents field entries. Note: Use the Constants button to include any defined constants in the condition. See Using Constants on page 7-32 for more information on using constants.
Optionally, you can limit a chart rule to one or more levels in your chart as follows: Select the Limit to checkbox and then select chart or sub-chart from the dropdown list to specify whether to limit the chart rule to a level(s) within the entire chart or a level(s) within the current sub-chart. Define the level range(s) to which you want the chart rule limit to apply.
7-54

CHAPTER 7
6 7
Click OK. The chart rule is added to the list of rules in the Chart Rules dialog box. Select the chart rule and use the Chart Style or Action buttons to select a style or action to associate with the chart rule. Click Clear to reset the style and action. Note: By default, boxes are demoted one level if you associate a demote action with a chart rule. If needed, you can use the levels drop-down list in the Actions dialog to specify any number of levels to demote. Click OK. The style and/or action are applied to all boxes in all charts that meet the chart rule.
To edit a chart rule:

1 2 Select a chart rule in the Chart Rules dialog box and click the Edit button. Change the chart rule in the Chart Rule Properties dialog box and click OK.
To copy a chart rule:

1 2 3 Select a chart rule in the Chart Rules dialog box and click the Copy button. Click the Edit button to modify the Chart Rule. Click OK when finished.
Note: You can disable a chart rule by clearing that chart rules check box.
Modifying Chart Rules

Chart Rules can be edited, deleted or reordered at any time.
In this section
Editing Chart Rules Deleting Chart Rules Reordering Chart Rules page 7-55 page 7-56 page 7-56
Editing Chart Rules

You may need to modify the criteria for a chart rule or the style/action that is applied to boxes that meet the conditions defined by a chart rule.
To edit a chart rule:

1 2 Chart Rules Select Chart Rules from the Format menu. The Chart Rules dialog box listing all the defined chart rules is displayed. Select a chart rule and click Edit to modify the chart rules criteria. 7-55
OrgPlus User Guide
3 4
Click the Action or Style buttons to modify the format. Click Clear to reset the formatting. Click OK to close the Chart Rules dialog box.
Deleting Chart Rules

You can remove a chart rule at any time.
To delete a chart rule:

1 2 3 4 5 Select Chart Rules from the Format menu. The Chart Rules dialog box is displayed. Select a rule. Click Delete. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click Yes to delete the rule. Click OK to close the Chart Rules dialog box.
Reordering Chart Rules

Each chart rule is applied to the chart starting with the first chart rule and ending with last chart rule. Any box in your chart may satisfy two or more chart rules. In this case you may need to reorder chart rules to achieve the desired formatting.
To reorder a chart rule:

1 2 3 4 5 Select Chart Rules from the Format menu. The Chart Rules dialog box is displayed. Select a chart rule. Click the up arrow Click the down arrow to move the chart rule up. to move the chart rule down.
Click OK to close the Chart Rules dialog box.
7-56

CHAPTER 7
Creating Off-page References

Using URIs (Uniform Resource Identifiers), you can enhance navigation within your charts. Any hyperlink, within a box or free text object can navigate to another box within the chart, another sub-chart within the chart, another tab within the project or even an entirely different chart. Note: To define a URI you need a field that is defined as a hyperlink. Please see Defining and Displaying Fields in Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Charting. Using Off-page References you can create links to: A box within a chart or sub-chart. A sub-chart within a chart. A chart within a project. A project file within a file system.
To define an off-page reference:

1 Right click a hyperlink field in your chart and select Hyperlink | Edit Hyperlink from the context menu to display the Hyperlink Properties dialog box.
The Title text box displays the hyperlink text you selected. The Link text box displays the URI or destination of the hyperlink. 2 3 4 Optionally, you can change the title of the link using the Title: text entry. This does not change the links destination. You can specify a URI in using the Link: text entry. The syntax for a URI is defined in the next section. Click OK.
7-57
OrgPlus User Guide
URI Syntax
Create your off-page references using the following URI syntax: orgplus:[filename]?[chart=<chart name>]&[subchart=<sub-chart name>]&[field=<field value>] Orgplus: This tag is required to tell OrgPlus that the link is an off-page reference and not a typical hyperlink. The filename parameter identifies the OrgPlus file to which the URI refers. The value of this parameter can be a fully qualified file name (i.e. C:\charts\myChart.opx), a relative filename (i.e. myChart.opx), or omitted completely to search the current file. Use to identify the end of the file name and the beginning of the query parameters. This parameters specifies the chart (or tab) in the filename to search. If omitted, OrgPlus will search all charts in the project file. This parameter specifies the sub-chart to query. If omitted, OrgPlus will query all sub-charts in the project file. This parameter identifies specific field data to use in the query. Multiple fields can be added to a single URI using the & symbol to separate them.
[filename]
[chart=<chart name>]
[subchart=<sub-chart name>]
[field=<field value>]
Entering the following URI would create a hyperlink to the Ken Gorman record in the Sales sub-chart on the 2007 chart (tab) in the C:\myChart.opx file: orgplus:C:\myChart.opx?chart=2007&subchart=Sales&field=Ken Gorman
7-58

CHAPTER 7
Note: Some characters cannot be used in your URI. The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) has identified substitute for these characters using the percent encoded octet. This table provides the substitute codes for the most common restricted characters. For a complete list and detailed information, please refer to the W3C at: http://www.w3.org/.
Restricted Character & = # Space
Substitute Code %26 %3D %23 %20
7-59
OrgPlus User Guide
7-60
Chapter 8 OrgPlus Panels

In this chapter
Overview Working with Reports Working with Directories Working with Profiles Working with Trees Searching Charts Working with Comments page 8-1 page 8-2 Page 8-12 page 8-20 Page 8-31 Page 8-34 Page 8-40
Overview
OrgPlus includes a number of panels to help you navigate, search and analyze your organizational charts. These features are available only in OrgPlus Standard and Professional. The Reports panel enables you to create and view both static and dynamic reports based on your underlying chart data. The Directory panel provides a tabular list of information based on the underlying chart data. The Profile panel enables you to display additional information about a chart box without cluttering the chart. For example, an employee photo or pager number can be viewed without adding those fields to each box. The Tree panel provides an alternate way to view, reorganize, add, change, or delete chart records. The Search panel allows you to search charts for all records that meet a set of criteria. The search panel is useful for orphan management, succession planning, and data mining.
8-1
OrgPlus User Guide
The Comments panel allows you to quickly view and edit all comments associated with a particular chart.

In this section
Using the Reports Panel Managing Reports Displaying Reports Working with Directories page 8-2 page 8-3 page 8-11 Page 8-12
Using the Reports Panel

This section describes how to work with the Reports panels.
To access the reports panel:

Select Reports from the View menu. The Reports panel is displayed.
8-2
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
The Reports panel has the following elements: Element Name Report Selector Display Options Description Select reports from the drop-down list.
Select the sub-set of the chart data to be used for building your report. See Creating Reports on page 8-3. Print the displayed report. Preview how the currently displayed report looks when printed. Change the page settings. Copy the report contents to the Clipboard.
Print Report Print Preview
Page Setup Copy Report
Send Report to Export the current report to an Excel spreadsheet. Excel Manage Reports Edit Current Report Add, modify or delete reports.
Modify the displayed report.
Managing Reports
This section describes how to add, modify or delete reports.
Creating Reports
This section describes how to create new reports.
To create a new report:

1 With the Reports panel open do one of the following: Click the link Click here to create a report if no reports have been created previously. Click the Manage Reports button displayed. . The Manage Reports dialog box is
8-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Click Add. The Report dialog box is displayed.
The Select Fields tab enables you to name the report and specify the fields to include. 2 In Report name: type the name of your report. The Available Fields list displays the fields available for your report. 3 Use the following elements to select the fields you want in your report:
8-4
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Element > >> < <<
Function Add Field Add All Fields Remove Field Remove All Fields
Description Include the selected available field Include all available fields in the report. Remove selected field from the report. Remove all fields from the report.
Optionally, you can include a relationship field in your reports. The relationship field displays the relationship with respect to the selected box. To include the relationship add the field labeled <Relationship> to your reports. Relationship values include: Level <N> Manager <N> corresponds to the level of the selected boxs supervisor. N=1 for the direct supervisor. Self Value corresponding to the selected box Peer Value corresponds to all boxes that share a common manager with the selected box. Level <N> Subordinate - <N> corresponds to the level of the selected boxs subordinates. N=1 for the direct subordinates.
Click the Grouping tab. The Grouping tab enables you to group report records based on a chart field. For example, you can create a salary report that groups employees by department (in this example, by organizational unit), and then employee type.
8-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Use the following elements to define groupings for a report: Name Add Group Description Create a grouping based on the selected field.
Remove Group Remove the selected grouping. Up Group Down Group Include Count 7 Move the selected grouping up. Move the selected grouping down. Display a count of the number of records in a grouping.
Click the Sorting tab. Sorting enables you to define the sorting order of the rows displayed in your report.
8-6
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Use the Following elements to define the sorting of your report rows: Name > < Sort Order Description Add the selected available field to the sort list. Remove the selected field from the sort list. For each field included in the sort list, you can specify whether to sort using Ascending or Descending order. The or symbol next to each selected field name indicates the sort order to be used when the report is generated. Note: You must add the fields from the Available Fields area into the Sort by fields area, then place then in the order in which you want them sorted.
Click the Criteria tab.
8-7
OrgPlus User Guide
The Criteria tab enables you to define a subset of chart records to include in a report. For example, you may want to report only employees with salaries greater than 50,000. The Report Summary tab is shown only if at least one number or formula field is defined. You can include the SUM, AVERAGE, MINIMUM and/or MAXIMUM value for any defined number or formula field as part of your report. The Format tab enables you to define the format for each element in the report.
8-8
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
The left panel lists the hierarchy within the report according to your Grouping and Summary selections. The branches prefixed with a indicate the categories of elements. Each element within a category can be formatted separately. 10 Format the report elements listed in the left panel: Select an element and click Format. The Properties dialog appears. Define the formatting properties for the report element.
Note: The Properties dialog for formatting report elements is essentially the same as any Windows formatting dialog. 11 In the Grid Properties area, select the formatting options for the report: Show Grid: Includes row and column line separators in the report. Odd row fill color: Select the background fill color of odd record rows from the drop-down list. Even fill color: Select the background fill color of even record rows from the drop-down list.
The Range tab enables you to define the range of boxes that will be included in a dynamic report. By default dynamic reports include the selected box and all direct and indirect subordinates (within the current chart or sub-chart).
8-9
OrgPlus User Guide
12 Do the following to define the range of your report: Use the Top radio button group to define the topmost box to be included in a report. The topmost box is defined with respect to the selected box. Use the Bottom radio button group to define the how many levels of the hierarchy to include in the report. Use the Include Peers checkbox to include the selected boxs peers.
13 Click OK. Note: If the Manage Reports dialog box is displayed, click Close. The report is displayed in the Reports panel.
Editing Reports
This section describes how to modify reports.
To edit the current report:

With the Reports panel open, click the Edit current report button modify the report. to
To edit any report:

1 With the Reports panel open, click the Manage Reports button Manage Reports dialog box is displayed. . The
8-10
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
2 3
Select a report and click Edit. The Report dialog box is displayed. Modify the report as desired. Click Close to close the dialog box. Note: You can reorder how reports are displayed in the Manage Reports dialog box using the Move Up and Move Down buttons.
Copying Reports
You can copy a report. Copying a report, then editing the copy is an easy way to create a new report.
To copy a report:
1 2 With the Report panel open, click the Manage Reports button Manage Reports dialog box is displayed. Select a report and click Copy. . The
Deleting Reports
You can delete a report that is no longer required.
To delete reports:
1 2 3 With the Reports panel open, click the Manage Reports button Manage Reports dialog box is displayed. Select a report and click Delete. Click Close to close the dialog box. . The
Displaying Reports
This section describes how reports are displayed in the Reports panel.
To display a report:
In the Reports panel, select the desired report from the Reports drop-down list. The selected report is displayed in the Reports panel.
8-11
OrgPlus User Guide
When generating a report, you can choose the sub-set of data to be used by clicking on the Display Options drop-down list available: . The following display options are
Option Dynamic
Description Generate a report based on the currently selected chart box and its descendants.
Selection Only Generate a report based on only the selected chart boxes. Entire Chart All Records Generate a report based on the entire chart. Generate a report based on the chart and all unassigned records (orphans). For Dynamic reports only. Limit the contents of the report to the displayed sub-chart; does not include descendant subcharts.
Limit to subchart

A Directory is a tabular list of information derived from your chart. You can use a directory to send an email or to update data in the same way that you edit data in a spreadsheet. Any number of special-purpose directories can be created to provide different kinds of information according to each your needs.
In this section
Using the Directory Panel Managing Directories Displaying Directories Other Directory Functions page 8-13 page 8-15 page 8-18 page 8-18
8-12
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Using the Directory Panel

This section describes how to work with the Directory panel.
To access the directory panel:

Select Directory from the View menu. The Directory panel is displayed.
8-13
OrgPlus User Guide
The Directory panel has the following elements: Element Name Directory Selector Display Options Description Select a directory from the drop-down list.
Select sub-set of the chart data to be used for building your directory. See Creating Directories on page 8-15. Print the displayed directory.
Print Directory Print Preview Copy Directory Send Directory to Excel Manage Directories Edit Current Directory New Record Delete Record(s)
Preview how the currently displayed directory looks when printed. Copy the directory contents to the Clipboard.
Export the current directory to an Excel spreadsheet.
Add, modify or delete directories.
Modify the displayed directory.
Add an unassigned record to the directory. Delete the selected records.
8-14
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Managing Directories
This section describes how to add, modify or delete directories.
In this section
Creating Directories Editing Directories Deleting Directories page 8-15 page 8-17 page 8-17
Creating Directories
This section describes how to create new directories. Any field that is not a picture or formula can be included in the directory.
To create new directories:

1 With the Directory panel open: Click the link Click here to create a directory if no directories have been created previously. Or Click the Manage Directories button displayed. Then click Add. . The Manage Directories dialog box is
The Directory Settings dialog box is displayed.
8-15
OrgPlus User Guide
3 4
Enter the directory name in the Directory name field. Use following functions to define the contents and format of the directory. Remove fields that you do not want displayed in the directory by selecting a field in the Selected Fields area and clicking Remove. Add fields to the directory by selecting a field in the Available Fields area and clicking Add. Arrange the fields in the Selected Fields area in the order in which they should appear in the directory using the Move Up or Move Down buttons. To change a label name, click on the label (Name, Title, and so on) and update the name as necessary. For each of the fields in a directory you can set the format by clicking on the Format button. In the Grid Properties area, you can change the following formatting options: Show Grid: Show row and column line separators in the directory. Odd/Even row fill color: Select the background fill color of odd/even directory rows from the drop-down list. Working with Directories
8-16
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
5 6
Click OK. The directory is created. If the Manage Directories dialog box is displayed, click Close. The directory is displayed in the Directory panel.
Editing Directories
This section describes how to modify directories.
To edit the current directory:

With the Directory panel open, click the Edit Current Directory button modify the directory. to
To edit any directory:

1 2 3 With the Directory panel open, click the Manage Directories button Manage Directories dialog box is displayed. . The
Select a directory and click Edit. The Directory dialog box is displayed. Modify the directory as desired. Click Close to close the dialog box. Note: You can reorder how directories are displayed in the Manage Directories dialog box using the Move Up and Move Down buttons.
Deleting Directories
You can delete a directory that is no longer required.
To delete directories:
1 2 3 With the Directory panel open, click the Manage Directories button Manage Directories dialog box is displayed. Select the required directory and click Delete. Click Close to close the dialog box. . The
8-17
OrgPlus User Guide
Displaying Directories
This section describes how directories are displayed in the Directory panel.
To display a directory:
In the Directory panel, select the desired directory from the Directories drop-down list. The selected report is displayed in the Directory panel.
When generating a directory, you can choose the sub-set of data to be used by clicking on the Display Options drop-down list are available: Option Dynamic Description Generate a directory based on the currently selected chart box and its descendants. . The following display options
Selection Only Generate a directory based on only the selected chart boxes. Orphans Display a directory that contains only unassigned record (records that are not included in the chart.) Generate a directory based on the entire chart. Generate a directory based on the chart and all unassigned records (orphans). For Dynamic directories only. Limit the contents of the directory to the displayed sub-chart; does not include descendant sub-charts.
Entire Chart All Records
Limit to sub-chart
Other Directory Functions

This section describes the other available directory functions.
In this section
Editing Data Using Directories Emailing from Directories Adding and Deleting Records page 8-19 page 8-19 page 8-20
8-18
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Editing Data Using Directories

You can edit chart information using the directory. Changes are automatically reflected in the chart.
To edit chart data via the directory:

1 2 With the Directory panel open, select a directory from the Directory drop-down list. Choose a row in the directory. Click any cell in that row and enter the desired changes. Press <Tab> to advance to the next cell or press <Enter> when finished. Notice that the corresponding box in the chart is also updated.
Note: When you double-click the icon to the left of a directory line, the box corresponding to that record is selected.
Emailing from Directories

You can send an email from a directory.
To send an email:
1 2 With the Directory panel open, choose a directory from the Directory dropdown list. Click the email address shown in any record.
Outlook or your default email client is automatically opened with a new message addressed to the recipient selected in your directory.
8-19
OrgPlus User Guide
Adding and Deleting Records

The New Person function enables you to add an unassigned record to a directory Note: The Delete Record(s) button enables you to delete a record. If the record is associated with a box in the chart, the fields in the box are cleared but the box itself is not deleted.
To add a new person:

1 2 3 With the Directory panel open, select the desired directory from the Directory drop-down list. Click the New Person button . A new row is added to the directory. The Display Option is automatically set to show Orphans. Enter data in the fields for each new record. You can tab from field to field.
Note: You can click on the Orphan icon in any row and then drag it over any box in your chart. When you release the mouse button, a subordinate is added to the box. Note: When you delete a box from the chart you can use the type <Ctrl>-Delete to add the box to the orphan list.

Profiles enable you to display and edit information related to any box in your chart, such as a photo, or phone numbers.
8-20
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Profiles provide information about one selected box at a time. Profiles can include hyperlinks to documents and email addresses. Profiles can be associated with Hotspots (See Modifying Box Layout in Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Charting). When you move the cursor over a hotspot OrgPlus dynamically displays the profile associated with that box.
In this section
Using the Profile Panel Managing Profiles Displaying Profiles page 8-21 page 8-22 page 8-30
Using the Profile Panel

This section describes how to work with the Profile panel.
To access the profile panel:

Select Profile from the View menu. The Profile panel is displayed.
8-21
OrgPlus User Guide
The Profile panel has the following elements: Element Name Profile Selector Print Profile Print Preview Description Choose the profile to display. Print the displayed profile. Preview how the currently displayed profile looks when printed. Copy the profile contents to the Clipboard. Export the current profile to an Excel spreadsheet. Add, modify or delete profiles. Modify the displayed profile. Navigate to the previous record. Navigate to the next record.
Copy Profile Send Profile to Excel
Manage Profile Edit Current Profile Previous Record Next Record
Editing Data Using Profiles

You can edit records directly in the Profile panel. Changes you make in the Profile panel are automatically reflected in the chart. To edit chart data using the profile panel double-click any cell in the profile and enter your changes. Press <Tab> or <Enter> to confirm each change and advance to the next cell. Note: You can replace a picture in the profile, by double clicking the picture to display the Select Picture dialog.
8-22
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Managing Profiles
This section explains how to add, modify and delete profiles.
In this section
Creating Standard Profiles Creating Composite Profiles Creating HTML Profiles Editing Profiles Copying Profiles Deleting Profiles page 8-23 page 8-26 page 8-26 Page 8-29 Page 8-29 Page 8-29
Creating Standard Profiles

This section describes how to create new profiles based on fields defined in your chart.
To create a new profile:

1 With the Profile panel open: Select Click here to create a Profile if no profiles have been created. Or to display the Manage Profiles dialog. Click the Manage Profiles button Click Add to display the Profile Settings dialog.
8-23
OrgPlus User Guide
Use the following elements in Profile Settings dialog to create your profile: Profile Name Profile Type Enter a name for the profile. Select a radio button to specify the type of profile you want to create: Standard, Composite, or HTML. Each of these profile types is described in this chapter. Available Fields For Composite profile settings, see Creating Composite Profiles section in this chapter. For HTML profile settings see Creating HTML Profiles section in this chapter.
This area lists the fields available to be included in the profile. This area lists the fields selected to be included in the profile. To change a label name, click the label and change it as necessary. You can reset a label to its original text by rightclicking it and selecting Use Original Label from the context menu.
Selected Fields
Add>>
Select any available field and click this button to add the field to the selected fields list. Optionally, you can add a free text field to your profile by selecting the field labeled Text. Once added, you can edit both the Label and Field values associated with the Text field.
<<Remove
Click any selected field and click this button to remove it from the selected fields list. Click this button to add all available fields to the selected fields list. Click this button to remove all selected fields. To move a field up in the selected fields list, click this button. To move a field down in the selected fields list, click this button. Select one or more fields and click this button to set font and alignment properties. You can also add icons before or after a field value to bring attention to a field.
Add All>>
<<Remove All Move Up Move Down
Format
8-24
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Conditions
To display the Conditional Formatting dialog box where you can specify conditions to control how fields are displayed in the profile. See Conditional Formats section in this chapter for more information. Use this button to define additional properties (such as border color) if this profile is to be used as of a hotspot. This button displays the Advanced Profile Settings dialog box where you can select: Show Grid to include row and column line separators. Exclude from profile selector to exclude this profile from the profile panel. This is useful for profiles that are used as hotspots or included in composite profiles. Display profile for top box if no selection to display the profile for the top box when no box is selected.
Hotspots
Advanced
Fill Color
Select the background fill color for the profile from the dropdown list. You can specify different colors for odd and even rows. You can show a field value without a label by selecting the label of the field and clicking the Merge Columns checkbox. For example you can show the employee name without the label Name.
Merge Columns
8-25
OrgPlus User Guide
Click OK. Note: If the Manage Profiles dialog box is displayed, click Close. A blank profile is displayed in the Profile panel until you select a box in the chart.
Conditional Formats
Using the Condition button you can define a set of conditions. If the defined criteria are met for a given record, fields within the profile are then reformatted in accordance with the conditional format. The example below shows how you can bring attention to high and low performers within your organization.
8-26
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Creating Composite Profiles

A composite profile is composed of one or more standard profiles.
To create a composite profile:

1 2 Select Composite in the Profile Type area of the Profile Settings dialog box to access the Edit Composite profile display. Select profiles from the Available Profiles list and add to the composite profile. Profiles can either be added as Tabs or as part of the main profile. The Available Profiles list is populated from defined Standard profiles. See Creating Standard Profiles in this Chapter for more information on creating profiles.
8-27
OrgPlus User Guide
3 4 5
Select the Format button to set border properties for each profile. Click the Layout button to specify the layout of profiles within the composite profile. Optionally, you can conditionally include any selected tab or profile based on a set of criteria. Use the Conditions button to specify the inclusion criteria for any profile. Note: A single composite profile can be used to display different sets of information based on the selected box. For example, one set of tabs can be shown for managers and another for individual contributors.
Click OK when finished.
Creating HTML Profiles

OrgPlus has the ability to render customized HTML pages inside the profile panel. These pages can access data provided in the chart to produce an interactive and visually rich profile. You can use standard HTML editing tools to create HTML profiles.
To create new HTML profiles:

1 In the Profile Type area of the Profile Settings dialog box select HTML to display the HTML version of the dialog box.
2 3
Enter the profile name. In the HTML template text box, type the filename and location of an HTML profile. Or
8-28
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Click Browse to locate an HTML template. Or Click Create Default HTML profile to define where the default template is saved. Note: It is preferable that this HTML file is online so that when you distribute your OrgPlus file, your recipients will be able to view the profile as well. 4 Click OK to create the profile.
Dynamic Field Substitution in HTML Profiles

OrgPlus can dynamically replace fields in your HTML profile. Use the following syntax to include OrgPlus field data in your HTML profiles: [@FIELDNAME@], where FIELDNAME is the name of any field defined in define fields. For example, [@Name@] displays the value of the Name field, for the selected box.
The following is a basic HTML profile that displays the selected users name and title: <HTML> <BODY> Name:[@Name@]<BR> Title:[@Title@] </BODY> </HTML>
Editing Profiles
You can modify profile settings by clicking the Edit button in the Manage Profiles dialog box. OrgPlus displays the Profile Settings dialog box. See Working with Profiles in this chapter for detailed information.
Copying Profiles
You can copy a profile. Copying a profile, then editing the copy is an easy way to create a new profile. Use the Copy button in the Manage Profiles dialog to duplicate profiles.
Deleting Profiles
You can delete a profile that is no longer required.
To delete profiles:
1 With the Profile panel open, click the Manage Profiles button the Manage Profiles dialog box. to display 8-29
OrgPlus User Guide
2 3
Select the required profile and click Delete. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Displaying Profiles
This section describes how profiles are displayed in the Profile panel.
To display profile information:

1 2 In the Profile panel, select the desired profile from the Profile drop-down list. Select any box in the chart. The Profile panel displays additional information for the selected box.
8-30
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Working with Trees

The Tree panel provides another way of viewing your organizational hierarchy. You can also use this panel to reorganize your chart and to add or delete chart records.
Using the Tree Panel

Select Tree from the View menu to display the Tree Panel. You edit records directly in the tree panel by doubling-clicking. The Level drop-down allows you to easily expand and collapse the displayed tree.
Working with Trees
8-31
OrgPlus User Guide
The Tree panel has the following elements: Element Name Print Tree Print Preview Description Print the displayed tree. Preview how the currently displayed tree will look when printed. Export the current tree to an Excel spreadsheet. Add a position following the selected position. Delete the currently selected position. Move the selected record up with respect to its peers. Move the selected record down with respect its peers. Modify the Tree properties.
Send tree to Excel
Add a Position Delete a Position Move up
Move down
Modify Tree Settings
Modifying Tree Settings

In the default setting the Tree panel displays the name of each member of the organization in a hierarchical tree structure.
To modify tree settings:

1 Click the button to display the Tree Settings dialog box.
8-32
Working with Trees
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
2 3 4 5 6
Add fields to the tree view by selecting them in Available Fields and clicking the Add >> button. Remove fields from the tree view by selecting them in the Selected Fields and clicking the < <Remove button. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to adjust the positions of the Selected Fields. Use the Format button to change the formatting of a Label or Field. Click OK when finished. Note: To change a label name, click on the label (Name, Title, and so on) and update the name as necessary. You can reset the label to the original text by right-clicking on a label and selecting the Use Original Label menu item.
Using the Tree Panel to Reorganize your Chart

The tree panel is a great way to move boxes across different branches of your chart. You can drag and drop records within the tree panel. You can also drag a record from the tree panel to the current chart. You can even drag a record from the chart to the tree panel.
Working with Trees
8-33
OrgPlus User Guide
Searching Charts
The search panel allows you to search charts for all records that meet a set of criteria. This section describes how to work with the Search panel.
To access the search panel:

Select Search from the View menu. The Search panel is displayed. The Search panel has the following elements: Element Name Print Search Results Print Preview Description Print results from the current search. Preview how the current search results will look when printed. Copy search results to the Clipboard. Export the current search results to an Excel spreadsheet. Define which fields are returned after a search and change the formatting parameters used to display search results
Copy Search Results Send Search Results to Excel Modify Search Panel
8-34
Searching Charts
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Managing Search Results

This section describes how to select which fields are returned after a search. This section also describes how to change the formatting parameters used to display search results.
To modify search results:

1 With the Search panel open click the Modify Search Settings dialog box is displayed. button. The Search
Move fields that you want to include in the search results from the Available Fields area to the Selected Fields area by selecting each field and clicking Add >>, or by clicking Add All >> to add all fields. Use Remove and Remove All to remove fields. Arrange the fields in the Selected Fields area in the order in which they should appear in the search results by using the Move Up or Move Down buttons. To change a label name, click on the label (Name, Title, and so on) and update the name as necessary. You can reset the label to the original text by right-clicking on a label and selecting the Use Original Label menu item. 8-35
Searching Charts
OrgPlus User Guide
For each of the fields listed in the Selected Fields area, you can set the format by clicking on the Format button (You can also right-click any field and select Format menu item). In the Grid Properties area, define the formatting for the profile as follows: Show Grid: Includes row and column line separators in the profile. Fill Color: Select the background fill color for the search results from the drop-down list. You can specify different colors for even and odd rows.
Click OK.
Using the Search Panel

When performing a search, you can set the sub-set of data to search using Search drop-down list. The following options are available: Option All Records Entire Chart Active Sub-chart Orphans w/ Mgr Description Search the chart and all unassigned records (orphans). Search the entire chart. Search only the displayed sub-chart. Search for all unassigned records that have a valid supervisor but are not part of the current chart. Search for all unassigned records that do not have a valid supervisor are therefore not included in the chart. Search all unassigned records. to the left of each orphan record.
Orphans w/o Mgr
All Orphans
Note: Look for the red icon
To perform a basic search:

1 With the Search panel open, enter the search criteria.
Click Search. A list of a search results are returned.
8-36
Searching Charts
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
Note: Clicking the icon for any record will display and select the corresponding record in the active chart.
To perform an advanced search:

1 2 3 4 With the Search panel open, select the Advanced link. Note: Use the Basic link to return to the basic search mode. Specify the first search criteria by selecting a field, a comparator (contains, =, >, <), and a value. Use the drop-down list to the left of the second search criteria to specify and / or. Specify the second search criteria by selecting a field, a comparator and a value. Repeat for the third and fourth criteria if needed. Click Search. A list of a search results are returned.
Searching Charts
8-37
OrgPlus User Guide
Orphan Management
The search panel can be used to place unassigned records (orphans) into a chart. This is useful if your imported data contains no hierarchy information for one or more records. For example, importing the following data: ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 1 1 1 1 1 14 10 ReportsTo Name Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Fred Barnes Gary Truman Martin Sawyer Mary Wilson Joan Levinson Title CEO VP Sales VP Engineering VP Marketing Director Operations Director Finance Marketing Director Marketing Director
Would result in the following chart:
With the following unassigned records: ID 10 11 ReportsTo 14 10 Name Mary Wilson Joan Levinson Record Type Orphan w/o Mgr Orphan w/ Mgr
Even though Joan Levinson has a valid manager (Mary Wilson), Joan cannot be included in the chart because her manager, Mary, cannot be included in the chart. If Mary is assigned to a manager in the chart, Joan can be automatically included in the chart.
Assigning Orphans:
1 2 With the Search panel open, select Orphans w/o Mgr from the Search dropdown list. Click Search. A list of all unassigned records without a valid manager is returned. You can also search for all orphan records (All Orphans) or all orphans with valid managers (Orphans w/ Mgr) by selecting the associated option in the Search drop-down list. Searching Charts
8-38
OrgPlus Panels
CHAPTER 8
3 4
Click Search. A list of a search results are returned. icon you can drag and drop records in your chart using one of the Using the following options: Drag over any box in your chart to move the selected item to a new supervisor. Ctrl-Drag over any box in your chart to create a copy of the selection. Drag into the sub-chart panel to move the selected box to report to the top of the selected sub-chart. Ctrl-Drag into the sub-chart panel to add a subordinate box to the top position of the selected sub-chart.
Note: Click the Sub-chart Panel link to display the sub-chart panel so that you can easily drag records into sub-chart charts.
Maintaining Orphan Placement after Data Refresh

You can prevent orphaned records that have been manually added back into the chart from being re-orphaning during the data refresh process. See Data Refresh in Chapter 9, Importing and Exporting Data for details.
Searching Charts
8-39
OrgPlus User Guide
Working with Comments

The comments panel allows you to easily view all comments associated with a chart. You can double-click any comment in the comments panel to edit that comment.
To access the comments panel:

Select Comments from the View menu to display the Comments panel. The Comments panel has the following elements: Element Name Print Comments Print Preview Description Print a list of all comments. Preview how the comment list will look when printed. Copy selected comments to the Clipboard. Export the comments list to an Excel spreadsheet. Define a comment for the selected box. Delete selected comment. Navigate to the previous comment. Navigate to the next comment.
Copy Comments Send Comments to Excel Insert Comment Delete Comment Previous Comment Next Comment
8-40
Working with Comments
Chapter 9 Importing and Exporting Data

In this chapter
Overview Importing Data Advanced Import Advanced Import Exporting Data Push Data Consolidation page 9-1 page 9-2 Page 9-25 page 9-25 page 9-47 Page 9-50 Page 9-52
Overview
Charts can be built based on data imported from an external data source. This chapter describes how to import data to create a chart.
Multiple OrgPlus charts can also be combined into a single chart using the consolidation feature.
9-1
OrgPlus User Guide
The import and consolidation features are available only in OrgPlus Professional. In addition, this chapter describes how to export chart data to Excel and other file formats.
Importing Data
Using the OrgPlus Import Wizard you can import data from following data sources: Any ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) compliant database Any OLE DB compliant database Oracle SQL Server LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)/Active Directory Text file Excel Spreadsheet OrgLite XML file SAP HR-OCI (SAP HR Organizational Charting Interface)
In this section
Source Data Requirements Using the Data Connection Wizard page 9-2 page 9-11
Source Data Requirements

Source data must be formatted correctly to be imported into OrgPlus.
In this section
Required Fields Creating Charts from Files Including Advanced Data Fields page 9-2 Page 9-3 page 9-4
Required Fields
Data sources must contain a Position field and a Reports To field. OrgPlus cannot build a hierarchical chart unless these fields are available during the import process. 9-2 Position field Importing Data
Importing and Exporting Data

CHAPTER 9
Each record must have a Position field. Usually a numeric ID such as a position code or employee ID is used for the Position field. An email address can also be used. Using an employee name is not recommended as names are not unique. Reports To field In order to determine the reporting relationship (such as, who reports to whom), each record must contain a Reports To field. The Reports To field enables OrgPlus to build a hierarchical chart. Note: OrgPlus can also handle data that contains a hierarchy that cannot be processed using only the Reports To and Position fields. See Complex Hierarchies on page 9-36 for more information.
Creating Charts from Files

You can import a file from any source as long as it meets some minimum requirements. Use the following guidelines when creating an import file:
To prepare your text for importing:

1 2 Create one line in the file for each record in your chart. If you are importing from a text file, each field must be separated by a delimiter (a tab, comma, semicolon, space, or other character). In the following example, each record has four fields, separated by commas. The four fields are Position, Reports To, Name, and Title. Position is used as the unique identifier for each record. 1, ,Chris Phillips,President 2,1,Lynn Brewer,Chief Financial Officer 3,1,Larry Stevens,Vice President 3 If you are importing from Excel you do not need to worry about commas. Each field should be entered into a cell. 1 2 3 4 1 1 Chris Philips Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens President Chief Financial Officer Vice President
You can, in addition, enclose each field value within text delimiters. For example, if you separate fields with spaces, you need to enclose field values within another delimiter if the field values themselves contain spaces. Field values can be enclosed in double quotes, as in the following example: 2" "1" "Lynn Brewer" "Chief Financial Officer"
Importing Data
9-3
OrgPlus User Guide
If you want to use one of your text delimiters as a literal character, precede it with an escape character. For example, if a field value contains a double-quotation mark, place a backslash (\) in front of it so that OrgPlus knows it is a literal quote character and not the delimiter for a field.
6 7
Each record must contain a Position field and a Reports To field. Otherwise, the import wizard cannot determine the relationship between records. You can create a header row that tells OrgPlus the names of the fields in the Text or Excel file. If you create a header row, it must be the first row in the file. Instead of field values, the fields in this row contain the names of the fields themselves, for example: employee name, position, reports to, and title.
Make sure there are no blank lines in the file.
Including Advanced Data Fields

Your source can also include Advanced Data Fields. Advanced data fields automate chart formatting and can be used to identify assistant boxes, insert sub-chart breaks, hide branches, or specify the chart styles of selected branches. In addition, advanced data fields can also be used to identify rows to ignore during the import process. In order to use advanced data fields, you must include a header row in your import file. The header must with contain columns that correspond to each utilized advanced data field. If you are importing from a database, the fields in the source database table (or view) must be named to match an advanced data field. A typical Excel import file would be constructed as follows: ID 1 2 3 1 1 ReportsTo Name Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Title CEO Assistant VP IsAssistant 0 1 0 BreakAt 0 0 1
The following sections describe the available advanced data fields: IsAssistant BreakAt CollapseAt BranchStyle Sequence 9-4 page 9-5 page 9-5 page 9-5 page 9-6 Page 9-7 Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
Exclude Format Special AuxReportsTo
Page 9-8 Page 9-9 Page 9-9 Page 9-10
IsAssistant
If the IsAssistant field is included in an import file, OrgPlus can automatically format assistants in your chart. Setting IsAssistant to 1 for a record makes the corresponding box an assistant. For example, if the IsAssistant field for Corinne Speer is set to 1 in the import file, the resulting chart is formatted as follows:
Note: You can specify an assistant branch style in the IsAssistant column (refer to the table in the BranchStyle section below).
BreakAt
If the BreakAt field is included in an import file, OrgPlus automatically inserts a subchart break for the corresponding record. Setting BreakAt to 0 does not insert a sub-chart break. Setting BreakAt to 1 inserts a sub-chart break. Setting BreakAt to a text string (such as, Marketing) inserts a sub-chart break and names the sub-chart based on the text.
CollapseAt
If the CollapseAt field is included in an import file, OrgPlus automatically collapses or expands the branch associated with each box. Setting CollapseAt to 1 collapses a branch.
Importing Data
9-5
OrgPlus User Guide
BranchStyle
Using the BranchStyle advanced data field applies the branch style you specify to all subordinates of the selected record. By default, charts created using the Import Wizard select chart styles that minimize the total number of pages and optimize the distribution of boxes on each page. The following branch styles are available: Branch Style Name TreeStyle Branch Style Name ListStyle
TreeLeftStyle
LeftListStyle
TreeRightStyle
BoxListStyle
TreeStaggerStyle
BoxListLeftStyle
TreeStaggerLeftStyle
BoxListRightStyle
TreeStaggerRightStyle
SuperiorBoxListStyle
TwoColumnStyle
Assistant1Style
TwoColumnTreeStyle
Assistant2Style
FourColumnStyle
Assistant3Style
FourColumnTreeStyle
Assistant4Style
OneColumnStyle
Assistant5Style
9-6
Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
Branch Style
Name OneColumnLeftStyle
Branch Style
Name Assistant6Style
OneColumnCenterStyle
Assistant7Style
OneColumnLeftCenterStyle
Assistant8Style
OneColumnEdgeLeft
OneColumnEdgeRight
MultiColumnLine
CoManagerStyle
MultiColumnPair
Sequence
The Sequence field allows you to control the order in which subordinate boxes are arranged under a manager. Boxes are sequenced from left to right and then top to bottom. For example, importing the following data ID 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 ReportsTo Name Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Fred Barnes Title CEO VP Sales VP Engineering VP Marketing Sequence 0 3 2 1
would create the following chart:
Notice that Larry Stevens, assigned sequence number 3, is third from the left.
Importing Data
9-7
OrgPlus User Guide
The Sequence field can also be used to sequence subordinates in multiple rows and columns beneath a manager. To achieve this, enter row number and sequence number separated by a : for each import record. For example, importing the following data ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 1 1 1 ReportsTo Name Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Fred Barnes Gary Truman Martin Sawyer Title CEO VP Sales VP Engineering VP Marketing Director Operations Director Finance Sequence 0 1:1 1:2 1:3 2:1 2:2
would create the following chart:
Exclude
The Exclude field allows you to determine how each box in your chart is handled with respect to calculations. Setting Exclude to 0 includes a box in all counts and calculations. Setting Exclude to 1 excludes a box from all counts and calculations. Setting Exclude to 2 excludes a box from all counts. Setting Exclude to 3 excludes a box from all calculations.
9-8
Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
Format
The Format field allows you to specify the format for any given box. The example below contains a subset of available options. See the OrgPlus Knowledge Base at www.orgplus.com/support for more information on the Format advanced data field. ID 1 2 1 ReportsTo Name Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Fred Barnes Title CEO VP Sales Format fields_show=Name, Title, font=Verdana,12, blue fields_show=Name,, font=Verdana, 9, box=round_rect fields_show=Name,, font=Verdana, 9, box=round_rect fields_show=Name,, font=Verdana, 9, box=round_rect
VP Engineering
VP Marketing
Special
The Special field allows you to specify chart formatting parameters such as chart title and chart background color. See the OrgPlus Knowledge Base at www.orgplus.com/support for more information on the Special field. ID ReportsTo Name Title Special title=My Corp chart_fill=solidfill, green 1 2 3 1 1 Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor CEO VP Sales VP Engineering Format font= Verdana , 24
Importing Data
9-9
OrgPlus User Guide
The Special field can also be used to ignore any row from the import data source. For example, as shown below, an Excel file containing a summary row. ID 1 2 3 1 1 ReportsTo Name Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Title CEO VP Sales VP Engineering Total Salary 125,000 75,000 100,000 300,000 Ignore Special
AuxReportsTo
The AuxReportsTo field allows you to specify one or more auxiliary reporting relationship within your chart. Importing the following data: ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 1 2 3 4 ReportsTo AuxReportsTo Name Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Fred Barnes Gary Truman Martin Sawyer Title CEO VP Sales VP Engineering VP Marketing Director Sales/Marketing Director Engineering
Would result in the following chart:
9-10
Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
Note: Multiple auxiliary reporting relationships for a single record must be separated by semi-colons.
Using the Data Connection Wizard

The import wizard requires a Data Connection file to import data from LDAP (Active Directory), Oracle, SQL Server, SAP (HR-OCI), OLE DB or ODBC compliant data source. You can use the Data Connection wizard to create a Data Connection file. If you are importing from a text, Excel, or OrgLite XML file, continue with Using the Import Wizard on page 9-16. The Data Connection Wizard is described in the following steps. Creating a Data Connection File Selecting the Table/View page 9-11 page 9-13
Creating a Data Connection File

In order to access an external data source, you must create a data connection file. A data connection file contains all the configuration details required to connect to an external data source.
To create a Data Connection file:

1 Select Import Data from the File menu to display the Select Data Source dialog box.
Importing Data
9-11
OrgPlus User Guide
2 3
Click New Source. Select one of the following data sources and click Next. ODBC DSN OLE DB Oracle SQL Server SAP (HR-OCI)
If you selected ODBC DSN

The ODBC Wizard Connection dialog box is displayed.
To select the ODBC data source:

1 2 3 Select an ODBC Data Source and click Next. You are prompted based on which ODBC Data Source you selected. You may be required to select a database file or to login to a database server. Click Next.
If you select OLE DB

1 9-12 In the Connection String field, enter a connection string. Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
2 3
Enter the User Name and Password. Click Next.
Note: More detailed information on OLEDB is available in the OrgPlus Support Center (www.orgplus.com/support).
If you select Oracle

1 2 3 In the Service Name field, enter the required service name. Enter your Oracle User Name and Password. Select whether you want to browse for a database and table/view or whether you want to specify a database and table/view. If your login account has access to a large number of databases or tables/views, downloading a complete catalog to browse may be time consuming. Click Next.
If you select SQL Server

1 2 In the Server Name field, enter a server name. Select one of the following Log on credentials: 3 Use Windows Authentication Use the following User Name and Password, and enter the User Name and Password.
Select whether you want to browse for a database and table/view or whether you want to specify a database and table/view. If your login account has access to a large number of databases or tables/views downloading a complete catalog to browse may be time consuming. Click Next.
If you select SAP (HR-OCI)

1 2 Enter all the SAP Connection parameters. Click Next.
Note: The SAP HR-OCI connection is an add-on module to OrgPlus Professional. More detailed information on SAP HR-OCI is available in the OrgPlus Support Center (www.orgplus.com/support).
Importing Data
9-13
OrgPlus User Guide
Selecting the Table/View

After you have selected the data source, the Tables/Views dialog box is displayed (if you did not specify a table/view in the previous step), which lists the views or tables available from the selected data source. Note: If you selected SAP HR-OCI you will not need to select a table or view or if you specified a database and table/view in the previous wizard step.
To select a table or view:

1 2 Select the table or view that contains the source data. Click Next.
9-14
Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
The Result dialog box displays data from the selected table/view. If the data is incorrect or an error occurs connecting to your data source, click Cancel and repeat the process making sure you select the correct table/view and that all parameters are entered correctly.
If required, use the Browse button to change the name or the path that will be used to save the Data Connection file. Note: If you are planning to use automation to refresh your data, make sure to select the Save password in file checkbox. If not selected, you are prompted to supply the password each time you connect to the database. 3 Click Finish to save the Data Connection file. You are returned to the Select Data Source dialog.
Importing Data
9-15
OrgPlus User Guide
Using the Import Wizard

In this section
Selecting the Data Source Defining Data Settings page 9-16 page 9-19
Selecting the Data Source

In this step, you will use the Import Wizard to select a Data Connection file or data source.
To select the data source:

1 2 Select Import Data from the File menu. The Select Data Source dialog box is displayed. Select a data connection file (.ora, .ldap, odbc, .sqlsvr, .saphr, .oledb) or a data source file (.xml, .txt, .xls, .xlsx) and click Open.
Note: Depending on the file type selected you may be prompted to login to the data source.
9-16
Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
If you select an Excel (XLS) Spreadsheet

The Import Wizard - XLS Sheet Selection dialog box enables you to select a worksheet from the Excel file and to verify that the worksheet is properly formatted.
To verify that the Excel file is properly formatted:

1 2 Choose a tab (Sheet1, Sheet2 or Sheet3 above). The corresponding data is displayed in the dialog box. Verify that the data is properly formatted and ready for import. If the data is not correct, click Cancel and make any required corrections to the spreadsheet. 3 You can manually specify whether the first row contains data or column headers by selecting the appropriate option: First row contains column names First row contains data
Note: Selecting the Use first data row to determine field types checkbox may increase import performance for larger data sets. 4 Importing Data Click Next. The Import Wizard - Data Settings dialog box is displayed. 9-17
OrgPlus User Guide
If you select a Text (txt) file:

The Import Wizard - Delimiters dialog box enables you to verify that OrgPlus has correctly identified the delimiters used to denote columns in the source text file. If not, you can select the correct delimiters.
To verify that your data file is correctly delimited:

1 You can specify Delimiters manually. Choose whether to use the Tab, Comma, Semicolon or Space as delimiters or define your own delimiter using the Other checkbox and text entry area. You can specify which characters are used as Text Qualifiers. Text qualifiers help OrgPlus process each field. For example a quote can be used to define the start and end of a name field (such as Smith, Nora). If your text file uses an escape symbol, enter it in the Escape symbol field. An escape symbol indicates that a character should be interpreted literally (not as a delimiter or qualifier). You can manually define whether the first row contains data or column headers by selecting the appropriate option: 9-18 First row contains column names First row contains data Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
5 6
Verify that the data, as displayed in the dialog box's Imported Data section, has been properly delimited according to your definitions and is ready for import. Click Next to continue. The Import Wizard - Data Settings dialog box is displayed.
Defining Data Settings

This procedure enables you to sequence through each source field and determine which fields should be imported. You can also define the properties associated with each field.
All fields from the source can be imported. The Source Field drop-down list includes all the fields defined in the source file.
To specify the kind and type of data that is in each field

1 2 Optionally you can use the Merge Fields button to combine fields (such as first and last name). See Merge Fields on page 9-27. Select each source field in turn from the Source Field drop-down list and define its settings: If you do not want to import a field, you can omit it by selecting Exclude Field. You can include all fields by selecting the Include All button. Use Field Name to rename any field. Use the Field Type drop-down list to select the field's type (Text, Date, Picture or Number). 9-19
Importing Data
OrgPlus User Guide
If the Field Type selection is Text or Number, you can further define the field type using the Field Category drop-down list. Select Hyperlinked if the field contains a hyperlink (such as an email address or a URL).
Note: Managing Duplicate records is discussed in Duplicates on page 9-25; and sorting is discussed in Sort Criteria for Subordinate Boxes on page 9-29.
Verifying the Hierarchy

Click the Next> button in the Data Settings dialog box to display the Verify Hierarchy dialog box, You can verify that OrgPlus is building the chart hierarchy correctly and also set a filter which allows you to define a subset of source data to import into a chart, for example, a division within an organization. In the following example, OrgPlus selects the source fields ID and ReportsTo as default choices for the Position and Reports To fields. The chart hierarchy built (based on the selected Position and Reports To fields) is shown on the right side of the dialog box.
9-20
Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
To define the chart hierarchy:

1 2 Identify the Position field. You can specify the field used as the Position (unique identifier) using the Position: drop-down list. Identify the Reports To field. You can specify the field used as the Reports To identifier or clear the Reports To checkbox if the data source does not contain hierarchy information or you do not want to use the Reports To information contained in the data source. Note: Optionally, you can change the fields that are displayed in the Import Wizard by clicking the Show Fields button. This is helpful if the Name field does not provide enough information to verify that the hierarchy is correct. Note: Use the Advanced button if your data contains a hierarchy that cannot be processed using only the Reports To and Position fields. See Advanced Import on page 9-25. 3 Identify the Unique Field. Use this drop-down list to specify the field that will uniquely identify each record during the data refresh process. Note: Click Filter Data to select a subset of information from the data source. See Filtering Data on page 9-34 for more details. 4 After you finish defining the hierarchy and data filtering options, click Finish. Note: If there are unmapped records (orphans) in your source, you will receive the following prompt:
Click Fix After Import if you want to fix the hierarchy (using the Search panel) after the import process is complete. See Orphan Management in Chapter 8, for more information on managing orphan records. This option is the recommended method if there are more many unmapped records in your data source. Click Use Hierarchy Mapper if you want to manually assign orphans to managers. This method is best for correcting a few unmapped records. Click this button to display the Hierarchy Mapper dialog box. For more information, see Using the Hierarchy Mapper on page 9-22. Click Ignore if you do not want to assign orphans to managers. You can view and map orphan records using the Search panel. See Orphan Management in Chapter 8, for more information on managing orphan records. 9-21
Importing Data
OrgPlus User Guide
If your chart has at least four levels you will prompted to sub-chart. For more information about sub-charts, refer to the section, Sub-charts, in Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Function. Click Yes if you want to sub-chart the imported chart. Click No if you do not want to sub-chart. You can add sub-chart breaks later if needed.
Using the Hierarchy Mapper

Your data source may contain records that cannot be added to a chart because the Position or Reports To information for those records is missing or incorrect. Records that cannot be added to a chart are called orphans. The Hierarchy Mapper dialog box enables you to assign orphan records.
The Unassigned Positions panel on the left lists all the orphans. All the assigned positions are shown in the right panel.
9-22
Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
To map orphans into imported charts:

1 2 Drag each orphan from the Unassigned Positions panel to their respective manager in the right panel. Select Remove All Unassigned Positions if you want to discard all unmapped orphans when the chart is created. If you do not select this option, you can map the orphans into the chart using a directory. See Chapter 8, OrgPlus Panels. Select Maintain Hierarchy Mapper Settings to preserve the mappings when you next use Data Refresh. Click OK.
3 4
Note: Optionally you can change which fields are displayed in the hierarchy mapper by clicking on the Show Fields button. This is helpful if the Name field does not provide enough information to map the orphans. For example, in the following example both Name and Title are shown.
Importing Data
9-23
OrgPlus User Guide
Changing the Fields that are shown in the Hierarchy Mapper

When using the hierarchy mapper it can be helpful to change which fields are displayed.
To change the fields that are displayed in the Hierarchy Mapper:

1 In the Hierarchy Mapper dialog box (page 9-22), click Show Fields. The Hierarchy Mapper Show Fields dialog box is displayed.
2 3
You can determine which fields are shown in the Hierarchy Mapper by moving fields between the Allowable panel the Show panel using the > and < buttons. Click OK when finished.
9-24
Importing Data

CHAPTER 9
Advanced Import
In this section, some of the more sophisticated import features are discussed.
In this section:
Duplicates Merge Fields Sort Criteria for Subordinate Boxes Show Fields Combining Multiple Records Grouping Peers Top of Chart Filtering Data Complex Hierarchies Using LDAP Page 9-25 Page 9-27 Page 9-29 Page 9-29 Page 9-30 Page 9-32 Page 9-33 Page 9-34 Page 9-36 Page 9-40
Duplicates
Your organizational charts may contain people who report to more than one manager. People who report to more than one manager typically have a dotted line reporting relationship to their secondary managers. Boxes that contain an employee who appears more than once in an organizational chart are displayed as follows:
Advanced Import
9-25
OrgPlus User Guide
Note: Any person that appears more than once in your organizational chart has a icon in lower right corner of their box. Click this icon to navigate to the next occurrence of that person.
To identify duplicate reports in your chart

1 Select the Duplicates button in the Import Wizard - Data Settings dialog box to display the Identify Duplicates dialog box.
2 3 4
Click the Identify duplicate records checkbox. Select a field to be used as a Key for identifying duplicate records. Specify whether you want to automatically update your duplicate records when refreshing data. Automatically Update will automatically update the icon in chart boxes when manual edits are made to a chart. We recommend that you do not select this option. Specify whether you want to show alternate managers for your duplicate records. Selecting the Show alternate managers checkbox displays alternate manager for each duplicate employee record: As callout displays a callout containing the alternate managers.
As part of box displays the alternate managers within each box.
9-26
Advanced Import

CHAPTER 9
If you select the Show alternate managers option, you can specify one or two fields of to be shown for each alternate manager: Show Field 1: Use this drop-down list to select the first field to display for each alternate manager. Show Field 2: Use this drop-down list to select the second field to display for each alternate manager.
Click OK.
In the following example, Martin Smith acts both as the VP of Finance and as the Acting VP of Marketing. Selecting ID as the Key field allows OrgPlus to identify that Martin Smith is the same person. Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 1 1 1 ReportsTo Name Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Gary Truman Martin Smith Martin Smith Title CEO VP Sales VP Engineering VP Operations VP Finance Acting VP Marketing ID 5011 5022 1 5023 5024 5040 5040 1 1 0 Primary 1 1
Note: Conditional formatting can be used to format boxes for any secondary reporting relationships. In the above example, creating a conditional format using the Primary field allows you to conditionally format the second occurrence of Martin Smith.
Merge Fields
You can import fields from the data source in a combined form. For example, if the source includes the fields Last Name and First Name, you may want to import these as a single Name field.
To merge fields for charting purposes:

1 Click the Merge Fields button in the Import Wizard Data Settings dialog box to display the Merge Fields dialog box.
Advanced Import
9-27
OrgPlus User Guide
The From area displays the fields that are eligible for merging. 2 3 4 Select the fields you want to merge in the From area and use the move the them to the To area. button to
Define a new column for the merged field by typing it the New Column Name text box. Specify whether you want to include or exclude the individual fields after the merge. By default the Exclude Old Columns checkbox is selected. If you want to retain the individual fields after the merge, uncheck this checkbox. Click the Merge button to confirm your decision, or click the Reset All button to undo your changes. Click OK.
5 6
9-28
Advanced Import

CHAPTER 9
Sort Criteria for Subordinate Boxes

You can specify the criteria by which to sort subordinates that report to individual managers.
To define sort criteria for subordinate boxes:

1 Click the Sort Criteria button in the Import Wizard Data Settings dialog box to display the Sort Criteria dialog box.
2 3
Use the Sort by and Then by drop-down lists to select up to three sorting levels. For each level, select either the Ascending or Descending radio button. Click OK.
Show Fields
You can specify which fields appear in the Verify Hierarchy tree display.
To select the fields to show in the hierarchy tree:

1 Click the Show Fields button in the Import Wizard Verify Hierarchy dialog box to display the Show Fields dialog box.
Advanced Import
9-29
OrgPlus User Guide
2 3
Use the add and remove displayed in the hierarchy tree. Click OK when finished.
buttons to select which fields are to be
Combining Multiple Records

When importing data, you may want to combine all the members of a team into a single box. This can be done manually after import or during the import process by combining all records that share a common field value. For example, importing the following data: ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 9-30 1 2 2 2 2 ReportsTo Name Lynn Brewer Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Bill London Joanne Banks Patrick Gaines Title CEO Manager Sales Sales Associate Sales Associate Sales Associate Sales Associate Sales Sales Sales Sales Advanced Import Function

CHAPTER 9
Combining all sales associates would yield: this chart rather than this.
To combine records into multi-records boxes:

1 In the Import Wizard - Verify Hierarchy dialog box (see page 9-20), select the Combine button to display the Combine dialog box.
2 3 4
Select the Combine Records checkbox. Use the Combine using: selector to select a field (For example, the ReportsTo field in the example above). Select the Only combine boxes with no subordinates checkbox to limit creation of multi-record boxes to the bottom level of your organizational chart. If you select this option, you can also set the Include subordinates with no peers checkbox to create multi-record boxes that contain only one record. 9-31
Advanced Import
OrgPlus User Guide
5 6 7
Optionally, you can use the Criteria tab to restrict multi-record box creation to include only boxes that meet specific criteria (i.e. Title = Sales Associate). Click OK to exit the Combine dialog box. Click OK.
Note: To manually create multiple record boxes see Multi-record Boxes in Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Functions. Note: Another approach to combining records is to use a shared Position ID field value to combine records. An example is shown below: PositionID 1 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 ReportsTo Name Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Bill London Joanne Banks Patrick Gaines Title Manager Sales Sales Associate I Sales Associate II Sales Associate II Sales Associate I
Grouping Peers
When importing data, you may want to group peer records. This can be done manually after import or during the import process by grouping peer records. For example, importing the following data: ID 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 1 1 ReportsTo Name Larry Stevens Claire Chancellor Bill London Joanne Banks Patrick Gaines Title Manager Sales Sales Associate Sales Associate Engineer Engineer
Grouping by title would yield: this chart rather than this.
9-32
Advanced Import

CHAPTER 9
To combine records into multi-records boxes:

1 In the Import Wizard - Verify Hierarchy dialog box (see page 9-20), select the Group button to display the Group dialog box. .
2 3 4
Select the Group Peers checkbox. Use the Group using: drop-down menu to select a field (For example, the Function field in the example above). Select the Only group boxes with no subordinates checkbox to limit the grouping of peer boxes to the bottom level of your organizational chart. If you select this option, you can also set the Group Boxes with no peers checkbox to group all boxes without peers. Optionally, you can use the Criteria tab to restrict grouping to include only boxes that meet specific criteria (i.e. Title = Sales Associate). Click OK to exit the Group dialog box.
5 6
Top of Chart
By default OrgPlus displays the Largest Branch (chart) that can be created from a data source. You can change which branch is used to build a chart. You can also create a chart with multiple top positions. 1 Click the Top of Chart button in the Import Wizard Verify Hierarchy dialog box to display the Top of Chart dialog
Advanced Import
9-33
OrgPlus User Guide
You can choose which record(s) will be designated as the top position in the chart by either specifying a Position or Reports to value. This is useful in the following cases: Multiple boxes at the top: To designate more than one box at the top of chart make sure that each box must has the same reports to value. Circular Reference at the top: The top boxes report to each other. Display orphans at the top: All orphan records must have the same reports to value.
Note: You can enter multiple values separated by commas. 2 Click OK.
Filtering Data
The Filter Data dialog box enables you to limit the information that is charted from the source. You can use this feature to extract the hierarchy of a specific department, division or sub-division of a large organization.
To filter the branches to be imported:

1 From the Import Wizard - Verify Hierarchy dialog box (see page 9-20), click Filter Data to display the Filter Data dialog box.
9-34
Advanced Import

CHAPTER 9
Define the filter options as follows: Choose top position: Enables you to define the top level in the chart tree that you want to import. By default Chart is selected in the Top Position drop-down list. If you choose a manager, only that managers branch is imported. Choose number of levels: Having chosen the Top Position, you can now define how many levels below that top position must be filtered. Filter Levels from: Select the name of the first person in the filter level from the drop-down list. Show Levels: By default the drop-down list shows the maximum number of levels below the Top Position that you can filter. Select any other level from the drop-down list.
Click OK when finished.
Note: Optionally, you can change the fields that are displayed in the Filter Data dialog box by clicking the Show Fields button.
Advanced Import
9-35
OrgPlus User Guide
Complex Hierarchies
OrgPlus can handle data with a hierarchy that cannot be processed using only the ReportsTo and Position fields. For example, you can use an OrgUnit hierarchy, in which the reporting structure is defined by organizations and then by a position hierarchy within each organization.
OrgUnits Containing Position

If the Primary Position in your hierarchy is the OrgUnit and each OrgUnit reports to a ParentOrgUnit, you can define a Secondary Hierarchy to chart the reporting structure within each Orgunit. The following chart was created (using the table below) by adding a secondary hierarchy in which Supervisor ID reports to Department ID: Position 500 501 100 101 102 300 100 100 500 Supervisor Department 1 1 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 Parent Dept. Name Chris Phillips Lynn Brewer Tina Nomura Cathy Fineran Dan Handalian Larry Stevens Title CEO CFO COO Facilities HR VP
9-36
Advanced Import

CHAPTER 9
To define a Secondary Hierarchy

1 On the Verify Hierarchy page of the Import Wizard, click the Advanced button to display the Advanced Hierarchy Options dialog box.
2 3 4
Select the Secondary Hierarchy: radio button. Use the Position: and Reports To: drop down menus to define the reporting structure of the secondary hierarchy. Click OK to continue with the import process.
Advanced Import
9-37
OrgPlus User Guide
OrgUnit Containing a Chief Position

If your data contains a hierarchy of OrgUnits (or departments), you can identify a Chief Position within each OrgUnits in order to build a hierarchy. For example, importing the data below results in the chart that follows: OrgUnit 1 1 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 ParentOrgUnit ChiefPosition 1 0 1 0 0 1 Name Chris Phillips Lynn Brewer Tina Nomura Cathy Fineran Dan Handalian Larry Stevens Title CEO CFO CFO Facilities HR VP
9-38
Advanced Import

CHAPTER 9
To define a Chief Position

1 On the Verify Hierarchy page of the Import Wizard, click the Advanced button to display the Advanced Hierarchy Options dialog box.
Select the Define Chief Position: radio button.
Advanced Import
9-39
OrgPlus User Guide
Click the Condition button to display the Advanced Hierarchy Conditions dialog box.
4 5 6
Define the criteria for identifying chief positions. Click OK to finish defining the condition. Click OK to continue with the import process.
Using LDAP
OrgPlus can be configured to access an LDAP server. You must create a data connection file and then use the Import Wizard to select that file.
To create an LDAP Data Connection File

Create a file with the extension type .ldap. Include the following parameters in your LDAP data connection file. Parameter server Description LDAP server address (for example, server=someserver.somenet) Protocol specifies version 2 or 3 of LDAP. (for example, protocol=3) Advanced Import
Protocol
9-40

CHAPTER 9
Parameter user rememberpassword
Description Login name (for example, user=cn=some_dn Keep encrypted password in LDAP config file (0=no, 1= yes) Skips login dialog (1=no, 0=yes) Encrypted LDAP server password is created by using the login screen at least once LDAP search filter string The name of the entry from which to begin the search. Multiple base entries can be added using semicolons Indicates which attributes to return for each matching entry For multivalued attributes, choose to take only the first value (first), create new columns for each value (clone), or append each value in a single field (append) List of fields which should be forced into a lowercase. Useful for Position and ReportsTo fields.
skiplogin password
filter base
acceptedfields
multivalued
lowercase
The following is an example of an LDAP connection file: [logon] server=someserver.somenet protocol=3 user=cn=some_dn password=some_pass rememberpassword=1 skiplogon=0 [config] Multivalued=append lowercase=dn,manager,cn,ou Advanced Import 9-41
OrgPlus User Guide
filter=(objectclass=OrgPerson) base=ou=people,dc=metaview,dc=orgplus,dc=com acceptedfields=dn,manager,cn,mail,telephoneNumber,PhotoURL,title,ou
Refreshing Data
OrgPlus enables you to perform a Data Refresh on charts created from an external data source.
In this section
Refreshing your Chart Data Changing Refresh Properties Excluding Box Contents page 9-42 page 9-42 Page 9-46
Refreshing your Chart Data

Refresh updates the chart data from the source. In the refresh process, your source data overwrites the data in your chart. Other than formatting, refresh does not preserve any changes made directly to a chart. Note: You can specifically exclude one or more boxes from the refresh process using the Lock on Refresh option discussed below in Excluding Box Contents. You can change Refresh settings. For details, see Changing Refresh Properties, page 9-42.
To refresh your chart data from the data source:

1 2 With your chart displayed, select Refresh Data from the Data menu. Because data refresh may be time consuming (especially for large charts), you will be prompted to continue. Click Yes. When the refresh process is complete, you have the option of viewing a log of all changes made 3 Click Yes if you want to view the log; otherwise click No.
Changing Refresh Properties

The Refresh Properties dialog box enables you to change the parameters set during the import process. By default, Refresh Data uses the same settings as the original Import. The available settings are described on page 9-43.
9-42
Refreshing Data

CHAPTER 9
Refresh Properties can be used only with charts created from an external data source.
To change the Refresh properties:

1 With your chart displayed, select Refresh Properties from the Data menu to display the Refresh Properties dialog box.
On the Source tab you can modify the following parameters: Data Source: Select a new data source. This is useful if the original data source has been moved or renamed. Data Filters: During import you can choose to import a subset of your source data. You can modify the original data filter to change the subset of source data used during refresh. Import Fields From Source: Select the fields to be updated during the Refresh process. Only selected fields are refreshed, while the unchecked fields are not modified during refresh. The Modify button becomes active when you select any field.
Refreshing Data
9-43
OrgPlus User Guide
To remap a field: Select any checked field and click the Modify button. Use the Field from Source drop-down list to map the field to a data source field. To add a field: Select the checkbox associated with any unchecked field to display the Modify dialog. Define field mapping using the OrgPlus Field drop-down list. By default, a new OrgPlus field with the same name as the data source field is created. You can name the OrgPlus field by typing directly into the OrgPlus Field drop-down. Note: At any time, you can rename OrgPlus fields by selecting Define Fields from the Data menu.
Position: Select the field to be used as the position field. The position field and Reports To fields are required to build the chart hierarchy. Reports To: Select the field to be used as the Reports To field. Unique Field: Select the field to be used as the unique identifier for each record in the source data. This field is used to match boxes in the existing chart with records from the data source.
9-44
Refreshing Data

CHAPTER 9
Click the Options tab to modify further parameters.
Re-apply Sub-chart Rules: After refreshing a chart, reapply the original subchart rules. Re-apply Chart Rules: After refreshing a chart, reapply all defined chart rules. Re-apply Photo Manager: After refreshing a chart, refresh all photos based on the current Photo Manager settings. Refresh Hierarchy: When Refresh Hierarchy is selected, the reporting structure of the chart and the contents of each box are updated during a refresh. When this option is not selected, only information within the chart boxes is updated. This is useful when the data source contains incorrect or is missing hierarchy information, or when you have manually modified the hierarchy of the chart. Refresh Auxiliary Lines: After refreshing a chart, refresh all auxiliary lines based on the AuxReportsTo advanced data field. See Adding Auxiliary Lines in Chapter 5 for more information on advanced data fields.
Refreshing Data
9-45
OrgPlus User Guide
Refresh Combined Positions: After refreshing the chart, re-combine records into multi-record boxes based on the settings in the Combine dialog (see Combining Multiple Records in Chapter 6 for more information on combining records). Refresh Group Positions: After refreshing the chart, group peers based on settings from the Group dialog (see Grouping Peers on page 9-32 for more information). Re-apply Sorting: After refreshing a chart, re-sort boxes based on the options defined in the Sort Data dialog box.
Unassigned Positions
Remove unassigned Positions: If you select this option, orphan records that are currently in the chart, will be removed from the project in the refresh. Maintain Mapping of Unassigned Positions: Select this option if you want the refresh to maintain the chart positions of records that are orphans in the data source. Note: You can preserve the current positions of orphan records you have mapped and prevent the inclusion of further orphan records in the refresh process by checking both of the Unassigned Positions checkboxes.
Determine top of chart using:

By default OrgPlus displays the Largest Branch (chart) that can be created from a data source. You can choose which record(s) will be designated as the top position in the chart by either specifying a Position or Reports to value. This is useful in the following cases: 4 Multiple boxes at the top: To designate more than one box at the top of chart make sure that each box must has the same reports to value. Circular Reference at the top: The top boxes report to each other. Display orphans at the top: All orphan records must have the same reports to value.
Click OK to update your changes to the Refresh Properties.
Excluding Box Contents from Data Refresh

After manually updating the contents of a box, you may want to lock the contents of that box so that it is not updated during a data refresh. This is useful if you maintain data in one or more boxes that is not in your underlying data source. Note: If you have defined multi-record boxes, the Refresh process will preserve the formatting of those boxes and apply that formatting to any new multi-record boxes created by data refresh. 9-46 Refreshing Data

CHAPTER 9
To lock/unlock the contents of a box during data refresh:

1 2 3 4 5 Select the boxes that you want to lock or unlock. Click the Box Layout tool or select Box Properties from the Format menu. The Box Properties dialog box is displayed. Click the Advanced tab. Check or uncheck the Lock contents during data refresh checkbox. Click OK.
Exporting Data
Chart data can be exported to a variety of formats. Export destinations include: Windows Clipboard Microsoft Excel Workbook (.xls) Microsoft Excel 2007 Workbook (.xlsx) Microsoft Word Document (.doc) Microsoft Word 2007 Document (.docx) Comma Separated File (.csv) Tab Separated File (.txt)
In this section
Sending to Microsoft Excel Exporting Data to Other Formats page 9-47 Page 9-48
Sending to Microsoft Excel

The Send to Excel button provides a quick way to export data to Microsoft Excel.
To send data to Excel:

1 Select the chart boxes you want to export. If nothing is selected all displayed boxes will be exported.
Exporting Data
9-47
OrgPlus User Guide
Click the Send to Excel button . Chart data is sent to a blank worksheet in Excel. Fields not displayed in chart boxes are not exported.
Use Excel to perform any functions on the exported data. The first row of the Excel spreadsheet contains field names.
Exporting Data to Other Formats

This section describes how you can export chart data to a variety of formats.
To export data:
1 Select the chart boxes you want to export. If nothing is selected all displayed boxes will be exported.
9-48
Exporting Data

CHAPTER 9
Select Export Data from the Data menu. The Export Data dialog box is displayed.
The Available fields section lists all the fields defined in the current chart. The Fields to export section lists the fields to be included in the export. You can select any field and then use the Add, Add all, Remove, and Remove all buttons to define which fields are exported. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to change the ordering of fields. Select Headers if you want the first row of the export to contain field names. Select Reporting Relationship if you want to include hierarchy information in your export file. Select the Based on radio button to generate hierarchy information using an existing field Select the Generate Unique IDs radio button to have OrgPlus create unique identifiers that describe the reporting relationships in your chart.
4 5 6
7 8 9
In the Export What section you can select whether to export the Entire chart, the Active sub-chart, or the current Selection. Use the Sort data first button if you want to sort the data before export. Use the Export to drop-down list to select whether you want to export to a file or to the clipboard. 9-49
Exporting Data
OrgPlus User Guide
10 Click the Export button to perform the data export. If you are exporting to a file, you will be prompted to enter a file name and to select one of the following file types: Windows Clipboard Microsoft Excel Workbook (.xls) Microsoft Excel 2007 Workbook (.xlsx) Microsoft Word Document (.doc) Microsoft Word 2007 Document (.docx) Comma Separated File (.csv) Tab Separated File (.txt)
Note: The Save table template function is useful if you do the same exports repeatedly. It allows you to save an export template containing information such as which fields to export, whether to export headers, and so on. Use the Open table template button to load previously saved table templates.
Push Data
This section describes how to selectively push data fields or OrgPlus files from OrgPlus to an external system.
To push data:
1 Select Push Data from the Data menu to display the Push Data Properties dialog box.
9-50
Push Data

CHAPTER 9
Specify whether your want to push Data (default) or OPX (OrgPlus file). If you select Data, you can click the Select Fields button to specify the fields you want to include in the resulting data file. If you select OPX, you can click the Select Settings button to choose options for the resulting OPX file:
Use the Select Fields or Select Settings button to specify the contents of the export file. See Exporting Data on page 9-47 for more details. Note: the Select Fields button appears when you select Data. The Select Settings button appears when you select OPX.
Use the Disk or FTP radio buttons to specify where you want your export file to be pushed. Use the FTP button to specify FTP parameters. Note: OrgPlus supports both standard FTP and secure FTP.
Click the Browse button. Enter a file name and select one of the following file types: Microsoft Excel Workbook (.xls) Microsoft Excel 2007 Workbook (.xlsx) Comma Separated File (.csv) Tab Separated File (.txt)
Click OK.
Note: You can automate the process of pushing data from OrgPlus to an external system by selecting Push Data from the Data menu. See Chapter 11, Automation for more information. Note: OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted users can use the Push Data functionality to send charts from OrgPlus Desktop products to OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted. See Chapter 11, Automation for more information.
Push Data
9-51
OrgPlus User Guide
Consolidation
Some organizations may want to combine multiple OrgPlus organizational charts into a single chart. One common scenario is that each division within a company is responsible for maintaining their own organizational chart using OrgPlus. Using the consolidation feature, each divisions chart can be combined into a single master chart.
Creating an OrgTree File

An OrgTree file is used to combine two or more charts into a single chart. The OrgTree is an organizational chart of org units (or departments). You must create an OrgTree file in order to combine two or more charts.
To create an OrgTree file:

1 2 3 Click on the Create blank project icon .
Create a chart containing a hierarchy of all the charts that you want to combine. In the first field of each box enter the name of each OrgUnit (department).
9-52
Consolidation

CHAPTER 9
Note: Optionally, you can create a field called OrgUnit instead of using the first field. 4 5 Select Save As from the File menu. Name the file (for example, OrgTree) and click Save.
Combining Charts
Once the OrgTree file is created, you must map an OrgPlus (.opx) file to each box in the OrgTree file. The files must be located in the same directory or the OrgTree must contain an absolute path reference to each underlying chart. Although not required, you will get the best results if each file uses the same naming convention for all fields (for example either Name or Employee_Name).
To combine two or more charts located in the same directory:

1 2 Make sure that all OrgPlus files are located in the same directory and that each file name corresponds to a box in the OrgTree file. Select Consolidation from File menu to display the Consolidation dialog.
Consolidation
9-53
OrgPlus User Guide
3 4 5
Use the Browse button in OrgTree file: area to select the OrgTree file. Use the Browse button in Chart directory: area to specify the directory containing the chart files. Specify your preference for handling sub-chart breaks: Insert sub-charts breaks - By default sub-chart breaks will be automatically inserted based the OrgTree file. Uncheck Insert sub-charts breaks if you do not want sub-chart breaks inserted into your chart.
Specify your preference for handling fields that do not appear in the first file: Ignore Fields not in the first file - By default any fields that are not defined in the first file (the top of your OrgTree) are excluded. To include fields defined in files other than the first file, uncheck the Ignore Fields not in the first file checkbox.
Specify whether the consolidated chart will inherit the template elements of the first file: Use the first file as template This option enables you to copy all template elementsMaster Page, Conditional Formatting, Groups, etc. from the first file to the resulting consolidated chart.
(Optional) Specify your preference for handling records that appear in two or more charts: Match records using field: This option enables you to designate a field as the primary key for matching records that appear in more than one chart. For example, if an employee record appears in more than one of the charts that you are consolidating, it is possible that the fields of that record differ from one chart to another. By selecting this checkbox and entering a field name, such as EMPLOYEE_ID, you can ensure that the consolidated chart does not contain duplicate boxes.
9-54
Consolidation

CHAPTER 9
Click OK.
10 Save the resulting chart by selecting Save As from the File menu.
To combine two or more charts located in different directories:

1 Open your OrgTree file and in the second field of each box enter the full path to the corresponding chart file.
Note: Optionally, you can create a field called Location instead of using the second field. 2 3 Save the revised OrgTree file. Select Consolidation from File menu. The Consolidation dialog is displayed.
4 5 6
Use the Browse button in OrgTree file: area to select the OrgTree file. Select Use OrgTree to locate chart files. Specify your preference for handling sub-chart breaks: Insert sub-charts breaks - By default sub-chart breaks will be automatically inserted based the OrgTree file. Uncheck Insert sub-charts breaks if you do not want sub-chart breaks inserted into your chart.
Specify your preference for handling fields that do not appear in the first file: Ignore Fields not in the first file - By default any fields that are not defined in the first file (the top of your OrgTree) are excluded. To include fields defined in files other than the first file, uncheck the Ignore Fields not in the first file checkbox.
Consolidation
9-55
OrgPlus User Guide
Specify whether the consolidated chart will inherit the template elements of the first file: Use the first file as template This option enables you to copy all template elementsMaster Page, Conditional Formatting, Groups, etc. from the first file to the resulting consolidated chart.
(Optional) Specify your preference for handling records that appear in two or more charts: Match records using field: This option enables you to designate a field as the primary key for matching records that appear in more than one chart. For example, if an employee record appears in more than one of the charts you that are consolidating, it is possible that the fields of that record differ from one chart to another. By selecting this checkbox and entering a field name, such as EMPLOYEE_ID, you can ensure that the consolidated chart does not contain duplicate boxes.
10 Click OK. 11 Save the resulting chart by selecting Save As from the File menu.
Data Refresh and Consolidation

Once consolidation is setup, you can use the data refresh functionality (described in this chapter) to refresh the master chart if any one of the underlying charts has changed. You can also update the OrgTree file if your organizational structure changes. Select Data Refresh from the Data menu to refresh your chart. See Refreshing Data on page 9-42 for more details. Use the Consolidation tab in Refresh Properties dialog to update any consolidation parameters (Select Data Refresh Properties from the Data menu). Note: You can combine collaboration with OrgPlus automation features. See Chapter 11, Automation for more information.
9-56
Consolidation
Chapter 10 Publishing your Chart

In this chapter
Overview Publishing E-mailing a Chart File page 10-1 page 10-2 Page 10-14
Overview
OrgPlus enables you to publish your chart to a variety of formats including Microsoft PowerPoint, Microsoft Word, HTML, Adobe PDF, directly to a printer, or to the OrgPlus Plug-in. The publish feature is available only in OrgPlus Professional. Emailing charts directly to other OrgPlus users is also described in this chapter. Users that require read-only access to OrgPlus files may want to download a free copy of OrgPlus Reader from the OrgPlus website (www.orgplus.com ). Note: The OrgPlus Plug-in is an ActiveX control that can be installed automatically in an end users web browser.
10-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Publishing
The publishing process for OrgPlus is identical regardless of the final format. There are different options and specific features available for some formats. This section describes the process as a whole, and pauses to discuss the specific features available for each format.
To publish your chart:

1 With your chart open, choose a Publishing method by selecting Publish To from the File menu to display the Publishing Wizard.
Select the appropriate publishing options. Available for all publishing formats: Expand Collapsed Branches: Before publishing the chart, expand all collapsed chart branches.
10-2
Publishing
Publishing your Chart

CHAPTER 10
Page Layout Options (Word, PowerPoint, PDF, and Printer): Slide Show Layout/Page Layout: Defines the way the chart is published. Wall: Publishes the active sub-chart only. No additional charts, directories, reports or profiles are published. Book: Publishes your entire chart, with each sub-chart on its own page. This option allows you to include additional charts, as well as directories, reports and profiles. You can optionally include a customized cover page and Content and Index pages that contain hyperlinks to the respective pages in the chart. When Book is selected, the Box Sizes option is enabled. Select automatically to size boxes on a page-by-page basis. Select consistently across all sub charts to ensure that box sizes across all sub-charts are consistent.
Orientation: Defines how the chart is oriented on each slide/page (Portrait or Landscape).
Word and PowerPoint Options: Embedded Type: Enables you to determine how the chart is embedded in Word or PowerPoint. There are two options: Insert Metafile: Inserts the chart as a non-editable graphical image. Select Maximize chart area to scale each published chart to the fill the destination page. Include Navigation Arrows: Includes hyper-linked navigation arrows in the file (Not included for Word).
Insert Object: Inserts the chart as a linked object that is editable in OrgPlus. Once published, you can double-click on a chart in Word or PowerPoint to edit. Select Remove Fields Not Shown to exclude hidden fields from the published chart. This protects sensitive information (for example, salaries) from being accessed in Word or PowerPoint. Select Fixed Line Widths if you have dashed or dotted lines in your chart. Some Microsoft applications do not support multiple line width combined with dashed lines.
Word Compatibility: Specify your version option for Microsoft Word. Version 2000 and higher This option produces a Word file compatible with MS Office 2000, 2003, and 2007.
Publishing
10-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Version 2007 and higher This option is faster, but produces files compatible only with MS Office 2007.
PowerPoint Compatibility: Version 2000 and higher This option produces a PowerPoint file compatible with MS Office 2000, 2003, and 2007 Version 2007 and higher This option is faster, but produces files compatible only with MS Office 2007.
Note: Microsoft offers a plug-in that allows older versions of PowerPoint to read PowerPoint 2007 files. OrgPlus Plug-in Options: Hide Panels: Hides any included panels (sub-charts, profiles, directories, and reports) when a chart is first displayed. The Show Hide icon or the icon on the toolbar can be used to show or hide the panels.
Enable Print: Enables users to print published charts from OrgPlus Plug-in. Enable Save: Enables users to download published charts from OrgPlus Plug-in. Enable Send to Excel: Enables users to send the chart data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file. Remove Fields Not Shown: Prevents users from viewing or saving hidden data contained in the original chart file (for example, salaries or, employee identification numbers). HTML Container: Creates an HTML container page for the chart. Select Auto Update Enabled to automatically install OrgPlus Plug-in when users open an HTML page containing an OrgPlus Plug-in chart. Select Automatically Activate ActiveX Control to activate ActiveX Control when users open an HTML page containing an OrgPlus Plug-in chart.
Enable Security: Enables OrgPlus Plug-in Security. See OrgPlus Plug-in Security Options on page 10-13 for more information. Choose which toolbar buttons you want accessible in OrgPlus Plug-in: Include "Launch OrgPlus" button Include "Publish to PP" button Include "Publish to Word" button Include "Publish to OrgPlus Plug-in" button Include "Publish to HTML" button Publishing
10-4

CHAPTER 10
Include "Publish to PDF" button
HTML Options: Enable Toolbar: Includes an OrgPlus toolbar when the chart is loaded in a web browser. Enable Save: Allows users to save a local copy of the OrgPlus file. The OrgPlus file can be opened using OrgPlus Standard or Professional. The file can also be opened using OrgPlus Reader. Enable Print: Allows users to print the chart. Include Banner: Includes a banner above the chart in the HTML display. You can customize the banner with company information, etc. Hide Panels: Hides any included panels (sub-charts, profiles, directories) when a chart is first displayed. The Show icon or the Hide the toolbar can be used to show or hide the panels. icon on
Smaller, faster HTML Charts: Optimizes the HTML file size. Shadows and other non-essentials elements are removed from HTML output to enable Internet Explorer to load and display your chart faster. Automatically Activate Active Control: Enables JavaScript elements in your published chart to launch without first requiring the user to permit it. Disable Right Click Menu: Helps increase security of images and other data in the chart by preventing users from accessing the right click menu options. Encoding: Specify either ANSI or Unicode encoding used to generate the HTML files. Internet Explorer Compatibility: Specify the Internet Explorer version compatibility options: Version 6.0 and Higher Version 7.0 and Higher
PDF Options: Font Embedding: Select how fonts are to be embedded in the published document. Select Descriptor only to store only Font names in the PDF file. If a user does not have the specified font installed, a substitute font is used. This creates smaller PDF files. Select Outlines to include complete font descriptions in the PDF file. This ensures that the chart in displayed using the original font selections. This creates larger PDF files.
Publishing
10-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Include Navigation Arrows: Includes hyper-linked navigation arrows in the PDF file. Image Compression: Compresses images and text in the PDF file. GrayScale: Output the PDF file using only grayscales. ASCII: Encodes binary data in an ASCII based-85 representation. Maximize chart area: Maximizes the chart area in the published output.
Printer Options: 3 Maximize chart area: Maximizes the chart area in the published output. Include Navigation Arrows: Include sub-chart arrows in print output.
Click Next. The Publish Setting Page is displayed. Note: Selecting the Wall mode outputs only the chart. The Publish Options Page is skipped. Note: Clicking Next with Enable Security (OrgPlus Plug-in) selected displays the Specify Security Options page. See OrgPlus Plug-in Security Options on page 10-13 for more information.
10-6
Publishing

CHAPTER 10
If you are publishing to Power Point, you can select an existing PowerPoint template to be used when publishing. Select Use PowerPoint Template and then click the Browse button to select a template.
If you are publishing to PowerPoint, Word, PDF or Printer, make sure the Cover tab is selected. The Include Cover Page checkbox is selected by default. Enter the Cover page text and optionally use the Font button to set the format. Note: You can include AutoText elements in your cover page, such as authors name or date last revised. Click the AutoText button to display a drop down menu of AutoText entries.
Publishing
10-7
OrgPlus User Guide
If you are publishing to PowerPoint, Word, PDF or Printer, select the Contents tab. Select Include Contents Page to include a Table of Contents and then optionally use the Font button to set the format.
Select the Chart Contents tab. A list containing all the charts and sub-charts within the current project is displayed. By default all charts and sub-charts are included. Clear any sub-charts you do not want included in the published document.
10-8
Publishing

CHAPTER 10
Note: If you are publishing in PowerPoint, click the Options button to display the Chart Contents Options dialog box. By default your PowerPoint will be published with links from Chart pages to the Contents page and to the Index page. You can enable or disable the links as needed.
Publishing
10-9
OrgPlus User Guide
If you are publishing to PowerPoint, Word, PDF or Printer, select the Index tab. Select Include Index Page to include the index page.
Index formatting options include: Select Field For Index: Select the field used to create the index. Sort By: Select the field by which the index is sorted. You can then select to sort in Ascending or Descending order. Columns: Define the number of columns per index page. Levels up to: Select the number of chart levels to include in the index. Click Font to change the format of the Index. Index Order: Specify which way you want the index to flow. By default, the index flows down, then over.
10-10
Publishing

CHAPTER 10
When you are finished with the Publish Settings Page, click Next to display the Publish Output Page dialog box.
In the Output field, enter the full path and name of the output file, or click Browse to specify the name and path using standard Windows file browser. Select the following options: Launch PowerPoint/Word/Browser/PDF: To automatically launch PowerPoint, Word, Acrobat Reader, or your Browser when the publish operation is complete.
For PDF, OrgPlus Plug-in, and HTML, you can save to disk or upload to a server using FTP. Disk: Saves the output file on disk according to the path and file name entered in the Output field. You can also click Browse to use the standard Windows browser. FTP: Saves the output file to an FTP server according to the path and file name entered in the FTP Location field. You can also click FTP to open the Session Profile dialog box. The Session Profile dialog enables you to configure an FTP session.
Publishing
10-11
OrgPlus User Guide
For OrgPlus Plug-in, an HTML button is shown if you selected the HTML Container option. Select the HTML to define the HTML container settings. For more information see the OrgPlus Plug-in Deployment article in the Support Center at www.orgplus.com/support/. When you are publishing to a printer, select Show Print Dialog to display the standard Print Options dialog box before printing the document. To send the published chart to one or more e-mail addresses, select the Send as E-mail checkbox. Then click the Send button to display the Send as E-mail dialog box. Note: To use this feature you must define your e-mail field with the E-mail category. See Defining Field Properties in Chapter 4 for details.
E-mail Client Select this option to use your default e-mail client. SMTP Select this option to use Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. This option sends the e-mail with the SMTP settings defined in OrgPlus. See Using the Options Panel in Chapter 6 for more information.
10 Click OK to complete the publishing process. Note: Publishing (including e-mail distribution) can be automated. See Chapter 11, Automation for more information. 10-12 Publishing

CHAPTER 10
OrgPlus Plug-in Security Options

When publishing your chart to the OrgPlus Plug-in, you can define security options to control end user access your published chart.
To define OrgPlus Plug-in Security Options

1 2 Select the Enable Security checkbox on the Publishing Options page of the OrgPlus Plug-in Publishing Wizard. Click Next to display the Specify Security Options page.
Click the radio button that identifies your security selection: Use Password only Enter a Password that users will need to access the chart. Use the following User Name and Password Enter a User Name and a Password that users will need to access the chart. Browse for a flat file containing user accounts Click the Browse button to locate an account file.
Publishing
10-13
OrgPlus User Guide
Note: The user account file must contain two columns, one for the user names and one for the passwords as in the example below: cphillips lbrewer lstevens cphillips123 lbrewer123 stevens123
E-mailing a Chart File

You can email an OrgPlus chart to anyone. They must have an installed copy of OrgPlus or the OrgPlus Plug-in to open the chart file.
To email an OrgPlus chart:

1 With a project open, select Send as Mail from the File menu. The New Message dialog box in your email client is displayed. The OrgPlus project is included as an attachment.
Complete the email and click Send.
10-14
E-mailing a Chart File
Chapter 11 Automation
In this chapter
Overview Republishing Scheduling Tasks OrgPlus page 11-1 Page 11-2 Page 11-3 Page 11-9
Overview
OrgPlus allows you to automate distribution of your charts. Using the OrgPlus Scheduler, you can trigger OrgPlus to publish data to a network file server, your intranet, or to the web. The automation features of OrgPlus can also be used to export and push data fields from your charts to external systems. This is especially useful for OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted users. The automation features are available only in OrgPlus Professional.
11-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Republishing
Each time you publish or push data, OrgPlus saves all the settings. OrgPlus lets you republish any previously published chart or re-push any exported data.
To republish or re-push:
1 2 3 4 Select Publisher from the Tools menu to display the Publisher dialog box. Select Publish or Push using the drop-down list at the top of the dialog. A list of previously published/pushed files is shown. Select a file to republish or re-push. Select from the following options: Run in quiet mode: If this option is selected, no user warnings or errors are displayed. Refresh before publish/push: If this option is selected, a data refresh is performed before publishing/pushing. This option is only available if your chart was created from an external data source. Launch Application: If this option is selected, the publish/push result is shown using the appropriate application (PowerPoint, Excel, etc).
Select Run.
11-2
Republishing
Automation
CHAPTER 11
Scheduling Tasks
The Scheduler enables you to automatically refresh, publish and push your charts according to a schedule. You can schedule tasks to run on a daily, weekly, monthly basis, or on a given date. There three types of tasks you can perform: Refresh: A refresh task performs a data refresh on the selected project. Publish: Each time you publish, OrgPlus saves all the publishing parameters. When you create a publish task, OrgPlus lets you pick from a list of previously published files. When the task is executed, the file is republished using the same parameters as when the file was originally published. Note: An automated publishing task can include sending an e-mail (with the published material attached) to a group of users. See Using Groups for E-mail Distribution in Chapter 5, Working with Charts: Visualization and Navigation for more details. Push: Each time you push data, OrgPlus saves all the associated parameters. When you create a push task, OrgPlus lets you pick from a list of previous pushes. When the task is executed, an export file is generated and pushed using the same parameters that were using during the original push.
In this section
Creating Tasks Editing Tasks Deleting Tasks Checking Task page 11-4 Page 11-7 page 11-7 page 11-8
Scheduling Tasks
11-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Creating Tasks
This section describes how to create tasks in the OrgPlus Scheduler.
To add a new task to the scheduler:

1 Select Scheduler from the Tools menu to display the Scheduler Properties dialog box.
Click New to display the New Scheduled Task dialog box.
11-4
Scheduling Tasks
Automation
CHAPTER 11
Note: You can select how files are displayed in the New Scheduled Task dialog box as follows: Button Description Icons: Display an icon of each file with its name beneath. List: List the names of each file. Details: List detailed information for each file, including its size and the date it was last modified. 3 4 Select the Task Type from the drop-down menu (Refresh, Publish or Push) you want to perform. Select a file for the task. If you are creating a Refresh task, select a file from the Refresh Charts area. Use the Add button to browse for a file. If you are creating a Publish task, select a file from the Publish Charts area. Only files that have been previously published are shown in the list. If you are creating a Push task, select a file from the Pushed Data area. Only files that have been previously pushed are shown in the list.
Note: Use <Delete> button to remove unwanted files. Deleting an entry does not delete the underlying file. 5 If you are creating a Publish or Push task, the following options are available: Run in quiet mode: If this option is selected, no user warnings or errors are displayed when the task is executed. This option is intended for unattended usage (such as a computer in a server room). Refresh before publish/push: If this option is selected, a data refresh is performed before publishing/pushing. This option is only available if your chart was created from an external data source.
Scheduling Tasks
11-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Click OK to display the AutoTask dialog box. Note: This guide only describes the scheduling options that are relevant to OrgPlus. The AutoTask dialog box is a component of Microsoft Windows. Refer to the Microsoft documentation for the options not covered.
7 8 9
Select the Schedule tab. Click New to create a schedule for this task. Configure the schedule as follows: Schedule Task: Sets the frequency of the scheduled task from the dropdown list. Additional options may become available depending on your selection, for example, if you want the scheduled task to run weekly, you also have the option of selecting how many times a week the task must run and on which days. Start Time: Sets the start time for the scheduled task.
11-6
Scheduling Tasks
Automation
CHAPTER 11
10 Click OK to display the Scheduler Properties dialog box.
11 Click Close to close the dialog box. Note: You can schedule any task to run immediately using the Run button.
Editing Tasks
You can edit any defined task.
To edit a task:
1 2 Select Scheduler from the Tools menu. The Automation Scheduler dialog box is displayed. Choose a task and click Edit to change task options or click the change the schedule for the task. button to
Deleting Tasks
You can delete any defined task.
To delete a task:
1 2 Select Scheduler from the Tools menu. The Automation Scheduler dialog box is displayed. Choose the scheduled task you want to delete, and click Delete.
Scheduling Tasks
11-7
OrgPlus User Guide
Checking Tasks
If a task does not execute successfully you can check the status of a task.
To check a task:
1 2 Select Scheduler from the Tools menu. The Automation Scheduler dialog box is displayed. The Enable/Status column displays the results of the last execution of each task. You may need to resize the column to see the entire message.
11-8
Scheduling Tasks
Automation
CHAPTER 11
OrgPlus Enterprise
OrgPlus Enterprise is a web-based solution for organizational charting. OrgPlus Enterprise can be hosted in your data center, or it can be hosted using the OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted service. OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted allows you to deploy OrgPlus Enterprise to your organization without the cost of installing, upgrading, and maintaining a server in-house. See http://www.orgplus.com for more details. The Scheduler and Publisher functionality (described above) can be used to automatically or manually push data to OrgPlus Enterprise.
To push to data to OrgPlus Enterprise:

Note: After you sign up for OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted, HumanConcepts will setup your OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted account and your initial chart templates. HumanConcepts will also supply all necessary FTP (or secure FTP) parameters. FTP parameters are used to upload data to OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted. 1 2 3 4 5 Select Push Data from the Data menu. The Push Data dialog box is displayed. Use the Select Fields button to specify which fields to push to OrgPlus Enterprise. Select the FTP radio button. Use the FTP button to enter FTP parameters. Click the Browse button. Enter the file name. Make sure the Microsoft Excel (.xls) file type is selected. Click OK.
OrgPlus Enterprise
11-9
OrgPlus User Guide
11-10
OrgPlus Enterprise
Appendix A Window Structure and Command Reference

In this appendix
Main Window Menu Bar Toolbars Panels Chart Selection Tabs Status Bar page A-2 page A-3 page A-15 page A-24 page A-29 page A-31
A-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Main Window
The OrgPlus window comprises the following elements, each of which is described in detail in this appendix.
A-2
Main Window
Window Structure and Command Reference

APPENDIX A
Menu Bar
In this section
Overview OrgPlus Express File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Insert Menu Format Menu Tools Menu Data Menu Chart Menu Window Menu Help Menu page A-4 page A-4 page A-4 page A-5 page A-7 page A-9 page A-10 page A-11 page A-12 page A-12 page A-13 page A-14
Menu Bar
A-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Overview
This section describes the various menu options available in OrgPlus.
OrgPlus Express
OrgPlus Express can only be used from within Microsoft Office applications and has a limited set of features. Sections that describe functionality available to OrgPlus Express users are marked with the following OrgPlus Express icon . Menu . options that are available to OrgPlus Express users are indicated with a
File Menu
The File menu contains the following commands that are used when working with projects and charts. File Menu/ Hot Key New <Ctrl>+N Description Create a new project. Icon
Open <Ctrl>+O Open a previously saved project. Close <Ctrl>+W Save <Ctrl>+S Save As Send As Mail Import Data Send to Excel Consolidation Publish To PowerPoint Word Close the active project. Save the active project or update the embedded OLE object in another application. Save the active project using a different name and/or file type. Attach the active project to an email message. Launch the Import Wizard. Export the current chart to an Excel spreadsheet Combine one or more OrgPlus charts into a single chart. Publish the active chart to one of the following formats: Microsoft PowerPoint Microsoft Word
A-4
Menu Bar

APPENDIX A
File Menu/ Hot Key
Description
Icon
OrgPlus Plug-In OrgPlus web browser plug-in HTML PDF Printer Page Setup Print Preview Print <Ctrl>+P Protect Project Project Properties HTML Adobe PDF Your printer Define the page settings for the current chart. Display a preview of the chart prior to printing. Print all or part of the active project. Password protects the current project. Display information about the current project.
Recent Projects List the file names of recently opened projects. Selecting a recent project opens that project. Exit <Ctrl>+Q Exit OrgPlus.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains commands that enable you to perform the editing functions detailed below. Edit Menu/ Hot Key Undo <Ctrl>+Z Redo <Ctrl>+Y Cut <Ctrl>+X Copy <Ctrl>+C Copy Contents Description Reverse the last operation. Reverse the last Undo action. Remove whatever is selected and place it on the Clipboard. Copy whatever is selected and places it on the Clipboard. Copy the contents of a selected chart box and places it on the Clipboard. Icon
Menu Bar
A-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Edit Menu/ Hot Key Copy Format
Description Copy the format of a selected chart box and places it on the Clipboard.
Icon
Paste <Ctrl>+V Paste the contents of the Clipboard into the active chart. Paste As New Document Delete <Del> Delete Chart Select All All Assistants All Comanagers All Managers All Nonmanagers Direct Reports Peers Branch Lowest Level All Connecting Lines All Hidden Connecting Lines All Free Floating Objects All Anchored Objects Paste the contents of the Clipboard into a new chart. Delete the current selection. Delete the active chart. Select objects as described below: All chart boxes and lines. All Assistant boxes. All Manager boxes that share the same subordinates. All boxes that have subordinates. All boxes that are subordinates or assistants. All boxes that are connected directly to the selected box. All boxes that report to the same manager as the selected box. Selected box and all descendent boxes. All boxes that are on the last shown level. All the connecting lines between boxes. All the hidden connecting lines.
All free floating objects.
All free floating objects that are anchored to boxes.
A-6
Menu Bar

APPENDIX A
Edit Menu/ Hot Key All Multirecord Boxes Select Fields Select Level(s) Find <Ctrl>+F Find Next Replace <Ctrl>+R Find by Photo <Ctrl>+E
Description All boxes that are marked as multi-record boxes. Select a specific field(s) within boxes. Select all the boxes in a specified set of levels. Locate occurrences of a string. Find the next occurrence of a string. Replace occurrences of a string with another string. Find a box by selecting from a list of photos.
Icon
View Menu
The View menu contains commands that enable you to control how your chart is displayed in the OrgPlus window. View Menu/ Hot Key Full Screen F11 Normal Master Page Sub-charts Directory Profile Reports Templates Search Comments Description Toggle full screen mode. Use Full Screen mode when using OrgPlus to give a presentation. Switch to the normal view, which is the default view for most charting tasks. Display the Master Page. Show or hides the Sub-charts panel. Show or hides the Directory panel. Show or hides the Profile panel. Show or hides the Reports panel. Show or hide the Templates panel. Show or hide the Search panel Show or hide the Comments panel Icon
Menu Bar
A-7
OrgPlus User Guide
View Menu/ Hot Key Tree Toolbars Grid Rulers Status Bar Show Levels Show
Description Show or hide the Tree panel. Show or hides toolbars. Show or hide grid. Show or hide rulers. Show or hides the Status Bar. Define the number of levels to show, up to and including the level specified. The following hidden elements can be temporarily shown using the following options: Hidden boxes. Hidden lines between boxes. Symbols (such as expand or collapse). Hidden fields. Show Comments. Lines indicating page borders. Show a window containing a overview of your chart. Set the magnification factor for the active chart according to one of the following options: Scale the chart so that the width of the chart fits in the current window. Scale the chart so that the entire chart fits in the current window. Scale the chart so that boxes appear at actual size. Scale the chart based on the selected percentage.
Icon
Hidden Boxes Hidden Lines Symbols Hidden Fields Comments Page Lines Show Thumbnail <Ctrl>+H Zoom
Fit to Width Fit to Window Actual Size Zoom To
A-8
Menu Bar

APPENDIX A
Insert Menu
The Insert menu contains the following commands that enable you to insert elements into a chart or project. Insert Menu Option Chart Position Manager Assistant Subordinate Peer Left Coworker Peer Right Co-worker Sub-chart Insert Subchart Break Remove Subchart Break Create Subcharts Remove All Breaks Up Line Horizontal or Vertical Diagonal Auxiliary Description Add a new chart to the current project. Enable you to select one of the following box insert modes: Insert manager mode. Insert assistant mode. Insert subordinate mode. Insert left co-worker mode. Insert right co-worker mode. Select one of the following sub-charting options: Insert sub-chart breaks at the selected box. Remove sub-chart breaks from selected boxes. Launch the sub-chart wizard. Remove all sub-chart breaks from the active chart. Navigate from a sub-chart to its parent sub-chart. Select one of the following line drawing modes: Add a horizontal or vertical line. Add an unconstrained line. Add a line connecting any two boxes in your chart. Icon
Menu Bar
A-9
OrgPlus User Guide
Insert Menu Option Shape Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Octagon Text Box Picture Legend Hyperlink Comment Autotext elements Anchor
Description Select one of the following shape drawing modes: Add a rectangle with squared corners. Add a rectangle with rounded corners. Add an octagonal box. Add a free text object. Add a picture. Add a legend. Create a hyperlink from the selected field. Insert a comment for the selected box. Add an autotext element. The available autotext elements are described on page A-17. Anchor a selected free-floating object to a selected box. Once anchored the free floating object remains positioned next to the selected box even if it is moved within the chart area. Unanchor selected free-floating objects.
Icon
Unanchor
Format Menu
The Format menu contains the following commands that enable you to format various chart elements: Format Menu Option Box Properties F12 Line Properties Font Format Fields Chart Style Description Format selected boxes, free floating objects and pictures. Format selected lines. Modify the font properties for all selected objects. Modify the font properties for all occurrences of a field within a chart. Modify the branch style for selected boxes. Icon
A-10
Menu Bar

APPENDIX A
Format Menu Option Chart Properties Chart Rules Spacing Conditional Formatting Order Bring to Front Send to Back Bring Forward Send Backwards Align
Description Modify chart properties such as background, border and border shadow. Modify the branch style for all boxes that meet a set of user defined criteria. Adjust the spacing between boxes. Set the format of boxes or fields based on a set of conditions. Change the relative order of the free floating objects as follows: Move the selected object to the top layer. Move the selected object to the bottom layer. Move the selected object forward one layer. Move the selected object back one layer. Move selected objects so that they are aligned with respect to each other. Objects can be aligned to the left, center, right, top, middle, or bottom. Hide selected boxes or connecting lines. Show selected boxes or connecting lines.
Icon
Hide Show
Tools Menu
The Tools menu enables you to customize OrgPlus settings, schedule automatic processes and perform spell checks. Tools Menu Option Spelling Customize Options Scheduler Publisher Description Perform a spell check. Customize the elements contained within each toolbar and create new custom toolbars. Configure OrgPlus application settings. Create, modify, or schedule Refresh and Publish tasks. Republish any previously published file. Icon
Menu Bar
A-11
OrgPlus User Guide
Data Menu
The Data menu enables to manage or export data from your chart. Data Menu Option Sort Export Data Push Data Refresh Data Refresh Properties Define Fields Define Constants Photo Manager Auto Recalculation Recalculate Formulas Description Sort selected boxes. Export data from your chart to Excel or the Clipboard. Export data from your chart to an FTP site or a file server. Re-import data from the underlying data source. Modify parameters set during the import process. These parameters are used when you Refresh Data. Add, delete, or modify the fields in the current project. Add, delete, or modify constants that can be referenced throughout the project. Insert photos into boxes in your chart using a wizard. Automatically recalculate all formulas each time the chart is changed. If automatic recalculation is turned off, select this option to update all calculated fields. Icon
Chart Menu
The Chart menu contains the following commands that affect the size and appearance of your chart. Chart Menu Option Optimize Branch Styles Center Up/Down Description Reformat the branches in your chart to optimize the distribution of boxes on a page. Center your chart vertically on the page. Icon
A-12
Menu Bar

APPENDIX A
Chart Menu Option Center Left/Right Groups
Description Center your chart horizontally on the page. Select a group to apply to your chart. Select Manage Groups to add, edit, or delete groups.
Icon
Apply Template Select a source file and then apply formatting elements File from that file to your chart. You can also copy other definitions (reports, directories, and so on) from the source file to the current project. Compare Charts Merge Charts Chart List Create a report detailing the differences between two charts. Select two charts and merge them into one. Select a chart tab and then display the corresponding chart.
Window Menu
The Window menu contains the following commands for arranging and selecting Chart windows inside OrgPlus. Window Menu Option New Window Cascade Tile Stack Window List Description Create another window for the current chart. This allows you to see two parts of the same chart at the same time. Rearrange all open windows to overlap each other. Rearrange all open windows as a series of tiles. Rearrange all open windows each one on top of the next. Select from a list of all open windows. Icon
Menu Bar
A-13
OrgPlus User Guide
Help Menu
The Help menu commands give you access to application help. Help Menu Option Index Keyboard Commands Using Help Welcome to OrgPlus Resource Center Description Display the Help Index, where you can locate a subject for which you need help. Display a list of hot keys and their functions. Display information about menu commands and toolbar icons. Display instructions for using the Help. Display the Welcome panel. Access the online Resource Center. Icon
OrgPlus Guided Access the online Guided Tour. Tour OrgPlus Tutorials Upgrade Your OrgPlus OrgPlus Online Support System Info About OrgPlus Access the online Tutorials. Purchase an upgrade. Access the online Support Center. Display information about your version of OrgPlus and your computer system. Display the OrgPlus about box.
A-14
Menu Bar

APPENDIX A
Toolbars
In this section
Overview Standard Toolbar Autotext Toolbar Data Toolbar Extras Toolbar Format Toolbar Full Screen Toolbar Groups Toolbar Insert Toolbar Publish/Import Toolbar Text Toolbar Zoom Toolbar page A-16 page A-16 page A-16 page A-18 page A-18 page A-19 page A-19 page A-20 page A-20 page A-21 page A-22 page A-23
Toolbars
A-15
OrgPlus User Guide
Overview
This section describes the standard toolbars that are provided with OrgPlus, and the actions that you can perform with them. Some toolbars and toolbar options are not available in OrgPlus Express (refer to the Menu Bar section on page A-3 for more information). All the toolbars are dockable, meaning they may be dragged and placed anywhere in the window that is convenient for you. They can also be left as floating toolbars anywhere in the window.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar has the following buttons. Icon Name Create Blank Project Open Save Email Send to Excel Print Print Preview Cut Copy Paste Copy Format Undo Redo Refresh Description Create a new project. Open a previously saved project. Save the active project. Attach the active project to an email message. Send the contents of the active chart to an Excel spreadsheet. Print all or part of the active project to the default printer. Preview a chart prior to printing. Delete whatever is selected and places it on the Clipboard. Copy whatever is selected and places it on the Clipboard. Paste whatever is on the Clipboard into your chart. Copy the format information from the selected chart box and place it on the Clipboard. Reverse the last operation. Reverse the last Undo action. Re-import data from the underlying data source.
A-16
Toolbars

APPENDIX A
Icon Name Help
Description Access OrgPlus Help.
Autotext Toolbar
The Autotext toolbar has the following buttons. Icon Name Page Number Pages Sub-chart # Current Time Today Created Modified Last Printed Refreshed Author Author Email File Name Chart Name Sub-chart Name Group Path Sub-chart Path Description Insert Autotext elements into your chart.
Toolbars
A-17
OrgPlus User Guide
Data Toolbar
The Data toolbar has the following buttons. Icon Name Define Fields Box Layout Description Add, delete, or modify the fields in the current project. Format selected boxes.
Extras Toolbar
The Extras toolbar has the following buttons. Icon Name Show Welcome Panel Show Templates Panel Show Directory Panel Show Profile Panel Show Reports Panel Show Sub-charts Panel Show Search Panel Show Quick Chart Panel Show Comments Panel Show Tree Panel Description
A-18
Toolbars

APPENDIX A
Format Toolbar
The Format toolbar has the following buttons. Icon Name Line Weight Dashed Line Color Shadow Arrows Box Shape Fill Color Box Shadow Box Border Box Dashes Box Border Colors Styles Chart Properties Description Set the thickness of selected lines. Set the style for selected lines. Set the color for selected lines. Add a shadow to selected lines. Set the arrowhead for selected lines. Set the box shape for selected boxes. Set the fill color for selected boxes. Add a shadow to selected boxes. Set the border style and color for selected boxes. Select a dashed-line style for box borderss. Set the color of the box border. Modify the branch style for selected boxes. Modify chart properties such as background, border and border shadow.
Full Screen Toolbar

The Full Screen toolbar button has the following button. Icon Name Full Screen Description Toggle full screen mode. Use Full Screen mode when using OrgPlus to give presentations.
Toolbars
A-19
OrgPlus User Guide
Groups Toolbar
The Groups toolbar has the following buttons. Icon Name Groups drop-down list Edit Group Manage Groups E-mail Group Description Select a group to apply to the chart. Edit the current group. Add, delete, or edit groups. E-mail the chart to a group.
Insert Toolbar
The Insert toolbar has the following buttons. Icon Name Select Select Fields Move Chart Free Form Add Subordinates Add Left Coworker Add Right Coworker Add Manager Add Assistant Line Horizontal or Vertical Line Auxiliary Line Rectangle A-20 Toolbars Add free-floating objects to your chart. Description Select chart boxes and lines as well as any other freefloating objects. Select fields within boxes. Move the active chart to a new position in the window. Position a chart box anywhere on the page. Add boxes to your chart.

APPENDIX A
Icon Name Insert Rounded Rectangle Insert Octagon Insert Text Insert Picture
Description
Publish/Import Toolbar
The Publish/Import toolbar has the following buttons. Icon Name PowerPoint Word OrgPlus Plug-In HTML PDF Printer Import Wizard Import data from an external data source. Description Publish the active chart to the selected file format.
Toolbars
A-21
OrgPlus User Guide
Text Toolbar
The Text toolbar has the following buttons. Icon Name Font Font Size Bold Italic Underline Align Left Center Align Right Font Color Field Border Field Fill Color Description Change the font. Change the font size. Bold the selected text. Italicize the selected text. Underline the selected text. Left justify the selected text. Center the selected text. Right justify the selected text. Change the font color. Specify a border for selected fields. Specify a highlight color for selected fields.
A-22
Toolbars

APPENDIX A
Zoom Toolbar
The Zoom toolbar has the following buttons. Icon Name Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom Rectangle Zoom Wheel Pan Fit To Window Scale Thumbnail Description Increase the magnification of your chart. Decrease the magnification of your chart. Magnify a rectangular segment of the chart to fill the entire screen. Increases and decreases magnification as you move the wheel of the mouse. Move the chart around on the screen in any direction by dragging. Resize the chart so that the entire content is visible in the current window. Display the percentage of the charts actual size. Show a miniature version of your entire chart that you can use for zooming to certain areas of the chart. Define the number of levels to show, up to and including the level specified. Display the selected branch only.
Show Level Show Branch
Toolbars
A-23
OrgPlus User Guide
Panels
In this section
Overview Welcome Panel Templates Panel Directory Panel Profile Panel Reports Panel Sub-charts Panel Search Panel Quick Chart Panel Tree Panel Comments Panel Changing Panel Positions page A-25 page A-25 page A-26 page A-26 page A-27 page A-27 page A-28 Page A-28 Page A-29 Page A-29 Page A-30 Page A-30
A-24
Panels

APPENDIX A
Overview
The panel area in the main window gives you access to additional functionality including reports, templates, directories, and sub-charts Panels are dockable, meaning they may be dragged and placed anywhere on the screen. They can also be hidden or shown, at your discretion.
Welcome Panel
The Welcome panel is useful for new OrgPlus users. The Welcome panel provides links to our Web site and example files, and also enables you to create a new chart, open an existing chart or import chart data.
Panels
A-25
OrgPlus User Guide
Templates Panel
Templates simplify formatting charts by providing pre-defined box, branch and chart formats. The Templates panel includes a variety of chart design, box and branch templates. Templates are a timesaving way to create a professional looking chart.
Directory Panel
Directories provide a tabular view of chart data. Whenever a box is selected the directory updates to display data corresponding to the selected box and its descendants. Selecting a row in a directory locates the corresponding box in the chart. You can use the directory to send an email. When you edit chart information in the directory, the change is automatically reflected in the chart.
A-26
Panels

APPENDIX A
Profile Panel
The information presented in a chart boxes is typically limited to a sub-set of available fields. The Profile panel enables you to show additional information about boxes (for example, the employees photo, physical location, email, phone, cell phone or pager).
Reports Panel
OrgPlus allows you to create both static and dynamic reports from your underlying data. Reports can include summaries and allow you to sort and group data as required. Navigating through the chart dynamically updates the report based on the selected box.
Panels
A-27
OrgPlus User Guide
Sub-charts Panel
Large charts can be subdivided into one or more sub-charts. For example, an organization with four divisions can be presented as five charts one for the executive team, and one for each division.
The sub-chart panel provides a convenient way to navigate through sub-charts and to perform actions on them.
Search Panel
The Search Panel displays a tabular list all records based on a user defined query. The search panel is useful for finding any set of employees, data mining and succession planning.
The sub-chart panel provides a convenient way to navigate through sub-charts and to perform actions on them.
A-28
Panels

APPENDIX A
Quick Chart Panel

The Quick Chart panel is the fastest way to create basic organizational charts. The Quick Chart panel provides all the controls you need to create basic organizational charts in one easy to use panel. The Quick Chart panel is intended for first time users and contains only a small sub-set of the features available in the OrgPlus application.
Tree Panel
The Tree panel enables you to view and edit a chart as an OrgTree.
The Tree panel provides an OrgTree view of your chart information. You can move employees up or down in the hierarchy, or add and delete records within this view. You can also print your Tree panel or transfer it to an Excel spreadsheet.
Panels
A-29
OrgPlus User Guide
Comments Panel
The Comments panel provides a view of the comments that have been added to your chart.
Changing Panel Positions

By default, OrgPlus displays panels on the right side of the Windows desktop. You can place your panels anywhere you wish on the desktop simply by dragging the panel title bar.
Chart Selection Tabs

In OrgPlus, a project can contain multiple charts, similar to Microsoft Excel's workbook and worksheet relationship. You can select different charts in your project by clicking on one of the Chart Selection tabs at the bottom of a chart window.
A-30
Chart Selection Tabs

APPENDIX A
Creating charts in separate tabs within a single project allows you to present multiple views of your organizational data within the same project. You can right-click a chart tab to: Create a new chart tab Delete a chart tab Rename a chart tab
Status Bar
The Status bar, at the bottom of the OrgPlus window provides the following information: The number of boxes defined in your chart, and how many of them are currently selected. The lock status of your keyboard. Additional information about the tool or button the mouse cursor is currently positioned over. The number of boxes that will be added when using the add subordinate, add assistant or add co-worker tools.
The following is an example of the Status Bar showing that: The mouse is currently positioned over the Paste button. The active chart has six boxes, none of which are selected. The Num Lock key on the keyboard is selected.
Status Bar
A-31
OrgPlus User Guide
A-32
Status Bar
Appendix B Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts

OrgPlus has many keyboard and mouse shortcuts in addition to the <Ctrl> combinations and function keys listed in the menus.
In this appendix
Using Right-Click Menus Using Keyboard Shortcuts Using the Function and Control Keys page B-1 page B-2 page B-6
Using Right-Click Menus

The right button on your mouse can be used to display context sensitive menus.
To use a right-click menu:

1 2 3 Position the mouse pointer over a chart element. Click the right mouse button. Select a menu item from the displayed menu.
Note: Context menus are also available for most OrgPlus windows, toolbars, and panels.
B-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Using Keyboard Shortcuts

This section describes how to use keyboard shortcuts to perform common operations.
In this section
Creating Boxes Entering Information Viewing Your Chart Selecting Boxes Working with Files Editing Text Dragging Boxes Moving Free Floating Objects page B-2 page B-2 page B-3 page B-3 page B-4 page B-5 page B-6 page B-6
Creating Boxes
You can add boxes to your chart using the keyboard. First select a box and then press one of the following keys: To do this Create a subordinate Create a manager Create an assistant Create a left co-worker Create a right co-worker Press this <F2> Shift + <F2> <F3> <F4> Shift + <F4>
Note: You can also add a box by holding down the <Ctrl> key while clicking on an insert tool ( , , , or ).
Entering Information
Use the following tips to speed up data entry: To edit the first field in a box, select a box and start typing. Use the <Tab> or <Enter> keys to move forward from field to field and from box to box. Use <Shift + Tab> keys to move backward from field to field within and across boxes. Using Keyboard Shortcuts
B-2
Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts

APPENDIX B
Use the <Esc> key to finish editing a field and select the box.
Viewing Your Chart

The table below summarizes the keystrokes that enable you view your chart in different ways: To do this Set the zoom factor to fit to window Set the zoom factor to 50% Enter or exit full screen mode View the part of your chart above the window View the part of your chart below the window View the topmost box in your chart View boxes at the bottom of your chart Show a thumbnail view of the chart Press this <F8> <F10> <F11> <Page Up> <Page Down> <Home> <End> <Ctrl> + <H>
Selecting Boxes
Use the following keystroke combinations to select boxes: To do this Select all boxes and lines Select the branch containing the currently selected box and its descendants Select the top-most box of a sub chart Select all peers (group) for the selected box Select the box to the left Select the box to the right Select the box above Select the box below Extend the selection to include the box to the left Extend the selection to include the box to the right Press this <Ctrl> + <A> <Ctrl> + <B> <CTRL> + <Shift> +B <Ctrl> + <G> <Left Arrow> <Right Arrow> <Up Arrow> <Down Arrow> <Ctrl> + <Left Arrow> <Ctrl> + <Right Arrow> B-3
OrgPlus User Guide
To do this Extend the selection to include the box above Extend the selection to include the box below
Press this <Ctrl> + <Up Arrow> <Ctrl> + <Down Arrow>
Working with Files

Use the following keys to work with files. To do this Create a new project Open an existing project Close the current project Save the current project Print the current project Display the Quick Chart panel Display the Directory panel Display the Profile panel Display the Impression panel Display the Search panel Display the Reports panel Display the Sub-Charts panel Display the Templates panel Display the Welcome panel Find by photo Display Photo Manager Press this <Ctrl> + <N> <Ctrl> + <O> <Ctrl> + <W> <Ctrl> + <S> <Ctrl> + <P> <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <Q> <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <D> <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <F> <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <F1> <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <H> <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <R> <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <S> <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <T> <Ctrl> + <Shift> + <W> <Ctrl> + E <CTRL> + M
B-4

APPENDIX B
To do this Display Export Data dialog box Display Scheduler dialog box
Press this <CTRL> + T <CTRL> + U
Editing Text
Use the following keys to edit text: To do this Delete the selected text or (if no text is selected) delete the character to the right of the insertion point Cut selected information and place it in the Clipboard Copy selected information to the Clipboard Paste selected information from the Clipboard to the insertion point Reverses (Undo) your last operation Redo the last Undo Move left one character Move right one character Extend the selection onto the character to the left Extend the selection onto the character to the right Move to the beginning of the line Move to the end of the line Extend selection to the beginning of the line Extend selection to the end of the line Press this <Delete> OR <Backspace> <Ctrl> + <X> <Ctrl> + <C> or <Ctrl> + <Ins> <Ctrl> + <V> or <Shift> + <Ins> <Ctrl> + <Z> <Ctrl> + <Y> <Left Arrow> <Right Arrow> <Shift> + <Left Arrow> <Shift> + <Right Arrow> <Home> <End> <Shift> +<Home> <Shift> + <End>
B-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Dragging Boxes
You can use the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys when dragging chart boxes, as follows: To do this... Make a copy of the selected box Change spacing between co-workers or between co-workers and their manager. (See Appendix C, Tips and Tricks) hold down... <Ctrl> <Shift> while you... Drag a box to its new location Drag any co-worker or a group of peers to the new position
Moving Free Floating Objects

You can select any free floating object (text, box, or picture) and use the arrow keys to reposition the object.
Using the Function and Control Keys

This section lists the available usages of the Function and Control key combinations in numerical/alphabetical order.
In this section
Using Function Keys Using Control Keys page B-6 page B-7
Using Function Keys

The following Function key combinations are available: Key F1 F2 Shift-F2 F3 F4 Menu Equivalent Help | Index Insert | Subordinate Insert | Manager Insert | Assistant Insert | Left Co-worker Description Displays the Help index Adds a subordinate below the selected box Adds a manager above the selected box Adds an assistant below the selected box Adds an co-worker to the left of the selected box Using the Function and Control Keys
B-6

APPENDIX B
Key Shift-F4 F5 Shift-F5
Menu Equivalent Insert | Right Co-worker Data | Refresh Data Format | Chart Rules | Apply Chart Rules Pan Tools | Spelling Data | Recalculate Formulas Scale | 50% View | Full Screen Format | Box Properties
Description Adds an co-worker to the right of the selected box Re-imports data from the data source Reformat branch styles based on the current set of chart rules Enables you to click and drag to move your chart within the active window. Performs a spell check Performs a recalculation of the formula fields when the Auto Recalculation feature is turned off Sets the zoom factor to 50% Enter or exit full screen mode Enables defining the format or layout of selected boxes, objects and pictures
F6 F7 F9
F10 F11 F12
Using Control Keys

The following Control key combinations are available: Key Ctrl-A Ctrl-B CtrlShift- B Ctrl-C CtrlShift- C Menu Equivalent Edit | Select All Edit | Select | Branch Edit | Select Levels Edit | Copy Edit |Copy Format Description Selects all chart boxes and lines Select the branch below the currently selected box Select top-most box of a sub-chart Copies the currently selected chart elements to the Clipboard Copy format
B-7
OrgPlus User Guide
Key Ctrl-D CtrlShift- D Ctrl-E Ctrl-F CtrlShift- F Ctrl-G ShiftCtrl-G CtrlShift- G Ctrl-H CtrlShift- H Ctrl-I Ctrl-J Ctrl-K
Menu Equivalent Data | Define Fields View | Directory Edit | Find by Photo Edit | Find View | Profile Edit | Select | Peers Edit | Find Previous Edit | Find Previous Edit | Show Thumbnail View | Search File | Import Data Format | Font Format | Conditional Format Format | Line Properties Edit | Find by Photo File | New File | Open File | Print
Description Display the Define Fields dialog box Display the Directory panel Find by photo Enables locating boxes containing the specified text Display the Profiles panel Select all the peers for the selected box Returns to the previously displayed instance of specified text Find previous Shows the entire chart in a Thumbnail window Display the Search panel Opens Import Data Open Font Properties Open Conditional Formatting
Ctrl-L Ctrl-M Ctrl-N Ctrl-O Ctrl-P
Open Line Properties Open Photo Manager Creates a new project based on your choice of template Opens an existing project Prints the current chart
B-8

APPENDIX B
Key Ctrl-Q CtrlShift-Q Ctrl-R CtrlShift- R Ctrl-S CtrlShift- S Ctrl-T CtrlShift-T Ctrl-U Ctrl-V Ctrl-W Ctrl-X Ctrl-Y Ctrl-Z CtrlDelete
Menu Equivalent File | Quit View | Quick Chart Edit | Replace View | Reports File | Save View | Sub Chart Data | Export Data View | Templates Tool | Scheduler Edit | Paste File | Close Edit | Cut Edit | Redo Edit | Undo There is no menu equivalent
Description Exits from OrgPlus Display the Quick Chart panel Enables replacing specified box text with other text Display the Reports panel Saves the current project Display the Sub Charts panel Export Data Display the Templates panel Open Scheduler Pastes elements from the Clipboard Closes the current project Cuts the currently selected chart elements and places them in the Clipboard Reverses the last undo performed Reverses the last action Delete the box and add the person to the Directory orphan list
B-9
OrgPlus User Guide
B-10
Appendix C Tips and Tricks

This appendix contains tips for creating special box styles
In this appendix
Extra-Wide Manager Boxes Modified Co-manager Style Modified List Style Multiple Topmost Boxes Multiple People in a Box - Employees Listed by Function Multiple Charts on a Page Repositioning Boxes within the Same Level Staggering Boxes on the Same Level page C-2 page C-3 page C-4 page C-5 page C-6 page C-7 page C-8 page C-8
C-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Extra-Wide Manager Boxes

By default, the width of chart boxes adjusts to accommodate the widest text. You can specify a wider box width for selected positions.
To create extra-wide manager boxes:

1 2 In your chart, select the boxes to widen. Select Box Properties from the Format menu and then select the Box Sizing tab.
Clear AutoWidth and enter the appropriate width in the Default width field and click OK.
C-2
Extra-Wide Manager Boxes
Tips and Tricks

APPENDIX C
Modified Co-manager Style

Sometimes it is desirable that all second level managers including co-managers are displayed as follows:
To line up co-managers and managers:

1 Select the boxes that you want to make co-managers.
Select Chart Styles from the Format menu and select the Co-Manager Style option. The selected boxes are now represented as co-managers.
Select all four subordinates and the manager.
Modified Co-manager Style
C-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Select Spacing from the Format menu and set the Manager spacing distance to 0.00.
Modified List Style

You can stack names out of boxes below a box.
To stack names below a box:

1 Select the subordinates and give them the list group style .
C-4
Modified List Style
Tips and Tricks

APPENDIX C
Select the connecting lines and then select Hide from the Format menu.
Select the manager, select Spacing from the Format menu and then set the Co-worker spacing distances to 0.00.
Multiple Topmost Boxes

A chart can have multiple topmost boxes, like these.
Multiple Topmost Boxes
C-5
OrgPlus User Guide
To create multiple topmost boxes:

1 2 3 Add 2 co-workers to the topmost box. Select the 3 topmost boxes. Select Chart Styles from the Format menu and select the Co-Manager Style option. The selected boxes are now represented as co-managers. 4 Select the topmost lines and select Hide from the Format menu.
Multiple People in a Box - Employees Listed by Function

You can represent a manager and all subordinates in one box.
To place multiple people in a box:

1 Select the manager and the co-workers under the manager.
C-6
Multiple People in a Box - Employees Listed by Function
Tips and Tricks

APPENDIX C
Select Chart Styles from the Format menu and select the following Co-worker style .
The manager and subordinates are now represented in one box.
In the above example only the peoples names are shown in the large box, as their box layout was changed to remove other information. See Defining Fields and Boxes and Modifying Box Layout in Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Functions.
Multiple Charts on a Page

You can make it appear as if there are multiple charts on one page.
To create the appearance of multiple charts:

1 Use the Co-worker box tool to add co-workers to the topmost box, then construct a hierarchy under each manager.
Select the topmost connecting lines and then select Hide from the Format menu.
Multiple Charts on a Page
C-7
OrgPlus User Guide
Repositioning Boxes within the Same Level

Sometimes boxes within the same level need to be repositioned for business reasons. The free-form tool (described in the Free Dragging Boxes section of Chapter 4) can also be used to reposition boxes within the same level.
To reposition a box:
Select the box you want to reposition. Hold down the shift key while dragging the selected box. Release the mouse button when the box is in its new position.
Staggering Boxes on the Same Level

Sometimes boxes on the same level need to be staggered for business reasons. You can stagger boxes automatically or manually. The free form tool (described in the Free Dragging Boxes section of Chapter 4) can also be used to reposition boxes within the same level.
To automatically promote or demote a box:

Right-click on the box that you want to promote or demote. Select Actions | Demote Right or Actions | Demote Left to demote a box one level.
C-8
Repositioning Boxes within the Same Level
Tips and Tricks

APPENDIX C
Note: Any box that has been demoted can be promoted by right-clicking on that box and selecting Actions | Promote.
To manually stagger boxes:

1 Choose the Select tool you want to stagger. . The following is an example of a chart whose boxes
2 3
Select the boxes you want to stagger. Select Chart Styles from the Format menu and then select a chart style for the selected boxes. Notice that the selected boxes will now be grouped separately from their peers.
Hold down the shift key while dragging the boxes. Release the mouse button when the box is in its new position.
C-9
OrgPlus User Guide
C-10
Appendix D Troubleshooting
In this appendix
Overview Installation Printing Using OrgPlus with Other Applications Calculations Disk Space Memory & Resources page D-1 page D-1 page D-2 page D-5 page D-6 page D-7 page D-7
Overview
We hope that you never have any problems while using OrgPlus, but sometimes things do go wrong. This appendix presents possible solutions to these difficulties. If you need further assistance, please visit our web site at www.orgplus.com. NOTE: If your system does not meet the system requirements for OrgPlus, we cannot guarantee that the program will function correctly. See System Requirements in Chapter 2, Installation and Registration.
D-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Installation
Here are solutions to common problems you may have when installing OrgPlus.
Problem
I get a "cant find/locate file" error message when I install OrgPlus.
Possible Solution
The door on your CD drive may be open. Close it. The CD may be damaged. Contact HumanConcepts Technical Support for assistance.
Problem
The following message is displayed: Not enough disk space to install.
Possible Solution
There is not enough free space on the destination drive. Delete unused files to make sure there is enough free space for installation.
Problem
I get a "file already exists" message when I install OrgPlus.
Possible Solution
Select Yes to All when the message is shown.
Printing
Here are solutions to common problems you may have when printing from OrgPlus.
Problem
Printing garbage characters.
Possible Solution
Reset the printer by turning it off, then back on. Make sure you are using the correct printer driver.
See Also: Page Setup, page D-4.
Problem
Printing slowly.
D-2
Installation
Troubleshooting
APPENDIX D
Possible Solution
Printing graphics can be slow. You can try printing at lower quality but the output wont look as sharp.
Problem
Printing boxes without text.
Possible Solution
Reset your printer by turning it off and then on. Then try printing again. Make sure you can see the text on your screen. Make sure you are using the correct printer driver. See Also: Page Setup, page D-4. Your computer may be running low on memory or resources. Close any other open applications and try again. See Also: Memory and Resources Problems, page D-7.
Problem
Printing text without boxes.
Possible Solution
Reset your printer by turning it off and then on. If you have chosen not to have box borders, they will not print. See if box borders are visible on screen. Make sure you are using the correct printer driver. Your computer may be running low on memory or resources. Close any other open applications and try again.
Problem
Text is printing outside boxes.
Possible Solution
Reset your printer by turning it off and then on. Make sure you are using the correct printer driver. You may be using a font that is not scaling correctly. Try using a TrueType font such as Arial. Your computer may be running low on memory or resources. Close any other open applications and try again.
Problem
Letters are replaced with symbols. Printing D-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Possible Solution
Reset your printing by turning it off and then on. You may be using a symbol font, such as Fences or Wingdings. Try switching to a TrueType font such as Arial.
Problem
Nothing prints.
Possible Solution
Reset your printer by turning it off and then on. You may have incorrect settings in Print Setup. Your computer may be running low on memory or resources. If you are using a network printer, the spooler may not be releasing your print job. Be sure that a time-out is set.
Page Setup
Problem
See previous printing-related problems.
Possible Solution
Make sure that the printer defined in Page Setup from the File menu exactly matches the kind of printer you have. Contact your printer manufacturer or Microsoft for information on obtaining the correct printer driver. Try printing from another Windows program, such as WordPad or Paintbrush. If you experience the same problems, then the cause lies in your printer or Windows setup. Contact Microsoft or your printer manufacturer for assistance. Check your settings in the Windows Control Panel to verify that they match your system. Make sure youre using the most current driver available for your printer. You can check the version by selecting Page Setup from the File menu. Select the Options button and then Advanced button. This displays a screen specific to your printer. Check information about the driver, including the version. Check with your printer manufacturer to see if you have the latest driver. They can also tell you how to find out which version you have if you arent sure. Make sure that the printer driver is for the version of Windows that you are using.
D-4
Printing
Troubleshooting
APPENDIX D
Using OrgPlus with Other Applications

Here are some common problems you may encounter when using OrgPlus with other applications, and the possible solutions.
Problem
A linked chart is not updated in the client application.
Possible Solution
Your update option is set to Manual. Use the Links command in the client application to change your update option to Automatic. You have embedded the chart or used the Paste command. Use the Links command in the client application to see if you linked the chart. Paste Link is not selectable in the client application. You did not save your chart in OrgPlus. Go back into OrgPlus and save your chart. You did not copy your chart to the Clipboard. Select your chart in OrgPlus and use the Copy from the Edit menu.
Problem
You double-clicked a chart object in client application but nothing happened.
Possible Solution
Your application is not an OLE client.
Problem
Chart fonts look different in the client application than in OrgPlus.
Possible Solution
You specified a very small area in which to place your chart in your client document. At high magnification, fonts may look different. Scale or resize the object to see if this problem is corrected. Using a TrueType font may also improve the appearance of the chart.
Problem
Text appears outside of boxes.
Possible Solution
Resize your chart proportionally. For example, if you reduce the size of your chart, make sure you reduce the height and width by the same percentage.
Using OrgPlus with Other Applications
D-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Problem
Cannot import a TIFF image of the chart or the image quality is poor.
Possible Solution
Your application does not support a version of TIFF that is compatible with OrgPlus. Try another graphics file format, such as WMF, BMP, JPG, or PCX.
Calculations
Problem
Computed amounts on your screen look incorrect.
Possible Solution
Hiding boxes and labels does not exclude them from computations even though you cannot see them. Excluding a label or box from calculations does not hide that box or label. Try the following: Some boxes may be hidden. Show all the boxes that you want to include. Select Box Properties from the Format menu. Use the Advanced tab to verify which fields are included in calculations and counts for each box. This is especially important for hidden boxes. Make sure that Auto Recalculation from the Data menu is selected or press <F9> to recalculate formulas.
Problem
OrgPlus is extremely slow when manipulating a chart with over 5,000 boxes.
Possible Solution
Try the following: Use the Sub-chart Wizard (Insert | Sub-chart | Create sub-charts) to break your chart into sub-charts. With large charts, dynamic recalculation of formulas may require to much computational power. Make sure that Auto Recalculation from the Data menu is turned off. When needed, you will need to press <F9> to recalculate formulas.
D-6
Calculations
Troubleshooting
APPENDIX D
Disk Space
Problem
Messages or problems related to a lack of disk space
Possible Solution
Check the disk space available on the drive where OrgPlus saves your files. You generally need to have three times the size of your file available because of the way Windows programs save files. For example, if your file is 400,000 bytes, you actually need 1,200,000 bytes (1.2 MB) available to save it.
Memory & Resources

Problem
Available memory or resources fall too low, and your computer behaves unpredictably.
Possible Solution
Check System Resources by choosing Start | My Computer | Control Panel | System on your Windows desktop. OrgPlus requires that you have at least 256 megabytes of physical memory (512 MB for newer Operating Systems) in your computer. You may be able to free memory by closing other programs. If all other programs are closed and you still dont have enough memory available, exit and restart Windows. You may need to consider buying more memory for your computer
Disk Space
D-7
OrgPlus User Guide
D-8
Memory & Resources
Appendix E Off-line Registration

This appendix describes how to register OrgPlus by email, by fax or by phone. For information about online registration refer to Registration in Chapter 2, Installation and Registration. Once you have entered your product code and email address, OrgPlus tries to detect an Internet connection. If a connection cannot be established, OrgPlus displays the Registration Options dialog box.
You can choose to register by email, by fax, or by phone. You can also choose to register later, in which case you will be given access to a limited version of OrgPlus. Select from: Registering by Email Registering by Fax Registering by Phone page E-2 page E-2 page E-3
E-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Registering by Email
1 2 In the Registration Options dialog box select Register by email and click Next. You are then prompted to enter your registration information. The Registration Information dialog box consists of two pages. Enter the required information and click Next after each page is complete. Fields marked with a "*" must be completed. 3 Click Send email. An email form is opened, containing your registration information. Send the email. HumanConcepts will email your Unlock Code to the email address that you entered. 4 5 Click Next. Click Finish to close the dialog box. Your Unlock Code is sent to you by email from HumanConcepts. 6 7 8 9 After you receive your Unlock Code, double-click the OrgPlus icon desktop. Select the Unlock radio button and then click Next. Enter the unlock code in the Unlock/Product Code field. Enter your unlock code and email address and then click Next. If you entered the code correctly, you are informed that you have successfully unlocked OrgPlus. Click Close to begin using OrgPlus. on your
Registering by Fax
1 2 In the Registration Options dialog box select Register by fax and click Next. You are then prompted to enter your registration information. The Registration Information dialog box consists of two pages. Enter the required information and click Next after each page is complete. Fields marked with an asterisk (*) must be completed. When you have finished, click Print and fax the printout to the indicated fax number. HumanConcepts will fax your Unlock Code to the fax number that you indicated. Note: Allow two business days for responses to fax registration requests. 4 E-2 Click Next. Registering by Email
Off-line Registration
APPENDIX E
Click Finish to close the dialog box. Your Unlock Code is sent to you by fax from HumanConcepts.
6 7 8 9
After you receive your Unlock Code, double-click the OrgPlus icon desktop. Select the Unlock radio button and then click Next. Enter the unlock code in the Unlock/Product Code field.
on your
Enter your unlock code and email address and then click Next. If you entered the code correctly, you are informed that you have successfully unlocked OrgPlus. Click Close to begin using OrgPlus.
Registering by Phone
1 In the Registration Options dialog box select Register by phone and click Next. A list of phone numbers is displayed. Call the phone number corresponding to your country or region. After reaching a telephone representative, click Next. Enter the Unlock Code which the telephone representative gives you and click Next. Click Close to begin using OrgPlus.
2 3 4
E-3
OrgPlus User Guide
E-4
Command Line Reference

APPENDIX F
Appendix F Command Line Reference Overview

A variety of OrgPlus functionality can be executed from the command prompt. This is useful for automating data import, publish and refresh tasks. For simple automation tasks, we recommend using the Scheduler, built into OrgPlus. This section discusses how to use OrgPlus from the command prompt, which enables you to build scripts and complex automation tasks. The following commands can be performed from the command line:
Open Command Import Command Print Command Publish Command Refresh Command page F-2 page F-2 page F-3 page F-4 page F-5
Open Command
F-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Open Command
This section describes the command to open a file.
To open a .opx file:

Orgplus7.exe <Filename.opx> [-pass <password>] <password> = Password for a protected input file [options]: -n Suppress any upgrade messages at launch.
Import Command
This section describes the command to import a file.
To start the Import Wizard:

Orgplus7.exe <Import Filename> [options] The import file must be of a valid type such as.xls or .txt. The chart file created by the imported is saved using the same file name. [options]: -q or -f -y Suppress the import wizard dialog box. Suppress the message already exists. Do you want to replace it?" and replaces the file automatically. Close OrgPlus after import. Specify <Template File> to apply after import. Template flags are detailed in the next table. Insert sub-chart break every <Number> levels. Insert sub-chart breaks based on <Field Name>. Insert sub-chart breaks at levels <Number1>, <Number2>, etc. Set the minimum number of boxes for smart sub-chart breaks. See Sub-chart Wizard section in this chapter. Name sub-charts using field specified in the <Field Name> parameter.
Open Command
-c or -NoLaunch -t[template flags] <Template File> -s1 <Number> -s2 <Field Nane> -s3 <Number1, Number2,..> -ss <Number>
-sn <Field Name>
F-2

APPENDIX F
Template Flags (Example: Orgplus7.exe MyData.xls -tdbo MyTemplate.opxt) a o n d b l i r g p f m h c s Copy all template elements. Overwrite existing elements. Add fields not defined in the current project. Apply design template. Apply branch template. Apply box template. Copy directories. Copy reports. Copy groups. Copy profiles. Copy conditional formats. Copy master page elements. Copy chart rules. Copy constants. Copy searches.
Print Command
This section describes the command to print an .opx file.
To print a .opx file:

Orgplus7.exe p <Filename.opx>
Print Command
F-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Publish Command
This section describes the command to publish a chart.
To publish a chart:
Orgplus7.exe <p*> <input filename> [output filename] [options] [-pass <password>] Where: <-p*> can be one of the following: -po -ppp -pw -phtml -ppdf Publish to OrgViewer Publish to PowerPoint Publish to Word Publish to HTML Publish to PDF
[input filename] = Name of input file [output filename] = Name of alternative output file [options]: -q or -f -y Suppress the publish wizard dialog box. Suppresses the message already exists. Do you want to replace it?" and replaces the file automatically. Do not open the output file after publishing. Close OrgPlus if an error occurs during publish. Uses previous publishing options if republishing to the same input/output file combination. Refresh before publishing. Refresh the input file without updating the original.
-c or -NoLaunch -CloseOnError -u
-r -RefreshToTemp
<password> = Password for a protected input file
F-4
Publish Command

APPENDIX F
Refresh Command
This section describes the refresh command.
To perform a data refresh:

Orgplus7.exe -r <input filename> [output file] [options] Where: [input filename] = Name of input file [output file] = Alternative output filename. Valid only if -RefreshToTemp is specified. [options]: -CloseOnError -RefreshToTemp Suppress error messages. Refresh the input file without updating the original.
Refresh Command
F-5
OrgPlus User Guide
F-6
Refresh Command
Appendix G Glossary
Anchoring
Use anchoring to connect a free-floating object in your Chart to a Chart Box. When a free-floating object is anchored to a chart box, it moves each time the Chart Box moves.
Arrowhead
A directional pointer at the end of a line. Use arrowheads to highlight important information in your Chart or to indicate the flow of procedures or decisions.
Assistant
A box representing an individual who provides administrative assistance, advice, or managerial assistance to their Manager (sometimes referred to as a staff box). Different Assistant Styles are available to show the particular type of relationship between the assistant and Manager.
Assistant Style
A way to represent the relationship of a Manager to an Assistant. Assistant styles are available from the Styles menu.
Banding
Banding ensures that each box stays on its current row when other boxes are added or deleted. This is useful if rows are used to represent seniority.
Bitmap (BMP)
A standard graphics image file format. OrgPlus can copy BMP images to and from the Clipboard. It can also copy or cut any visible portion of your Chart to the Clipboard in this format.
Branch
A box and all its descendants.
G-1
OrgPlus User Guide
Branch Symbol
A small square in the lower right corner of manager boxes. It indicates that the box has Subordinate boxes. Click the branch symbol to show or hide the branch.
Chart
A graphical representation of hierarchical information.
Chart Box
The building block of a Chart. OrgPlus automatically draws Connecting Lines between boxes. The arrangement of chart boxes and the connections between them form a chart.
Chart Page Area

The area occupied by the chart. This area consists of a single page or a number of pages placed side by side to produce a larger rectangular area. Dotted lines indicate the borders between two adjacent pages. For example:
OrgPlus automatically adds and subtracts pages to and from the charts page area as needed to contain the chart. It preserves the basic page orientation specified in the Page Setup dialog box.
Chart Style
The particular arrangement of Subordinate boxes with respect to a Manager. Any Subordinate box can have its own chart style. Chart styles are located in the Chart Styles menu.
Clipboard
A temporary storage place in Windows. Use the cut and copy commands to place items on the Clipboard, and use the paste command to paste items from the Clipboard into your Chart.
G-2
Branch Symbol
GLOSSARY
Co-manager
One or more boxes that share responsibility for a group of subordinates. The highlighted boxes in the figure below are co-managers.
You can show this relationship using the Co-manager style.
Connecting Lines
The lines OrgPlus draws automatically to connect boxes in the Chart.
Co-workers
Boxes with the same Manager. Together, co-workers form a Group.
Demote
You can demote a box to a lower level within a multi-column chart style if the Maintain Banding option is selected.
Dotted-line Relationship
A special reporting relationship between two boxes in the Chart. A dotted line usually indicates that one box has some measure of authority over the other box.
Embed
You can embed an object in an OLE client document. When you embed an object in an OLE client document, you place a copy of the original object into the client document. It is then completely separate from the original chart. You can edit the embedded object independently from the original chart.
Field
An area in a Chart Box where you can type information such as a persons name or salary.
Field Layout
The way Fields are arranged in your Chart Boxes. Different boxes can have different field layouts.
Formula
A field type used for performing calculations in your Chart.
Co-manager G-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Group
All of the boxes reporting to the same Manager, excluding Assistant boxes. A group is also a set of boxes that all meet a specified condition.
Level
The Topmost Box in your chart is at level 1. The boxes reporting directly to it are at level 2. The boxes reporting to them are at level 3, and so on. The black boxes in the figure below are at level 4.
Linking
You can link an object to an OLE client document. When you link an object to an OLE client document, the object appears in the client document. The client document is automatically updated when you make a change to the original OrgPlus document.
Manager
A box that has subordinate boxes reporting to it.
Metafile (WMF)
A standard graphics image file format. Metafiles require less disk space than a regular Bitmap (BMP).
G-4
Group
GLOSSARY
Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

OrgPlus supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE), a feature that lets you create and edit a chart in OrgPlus, and automatically transfer a copy of it to another application. Other applications that support OLE include word processors and desktop presentation programs. Once your chart is linked to or Embedded in a Windows OLE client application, you can double-click to edit the chart from another application.
OLE Client
An application to which you can link or Embed an OLE Object created by a OLE Server application. OrgPlus functions as a server application. An OLE client application, such as Microsoft Word, contains a copy of the chart.
OLE Object
A chart or a portion of a chart you can place in another Windows application using Object Linking and Embedding (OLE).
OLE Server
An application that can create OLE Objects to link or embed in an OLE Client application. An OLE server application such as OrgPlus creates the chart; an OLE client application such as Microsoft Word contains the chart.
Page Lines
Pages lines demarcate header and footer areas, print margins, and page breaks. These lines do not print.
Promote
You can promote a box to a higher level within a multi-column chart style if the Maintain Banding option is selected.
Secondary (or Right) Mouse Button

When you click the secondary mouse button on an object or window, OrgPlus displays a context menu containing commands for that object or window.
Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)
G-5
OrgPlus User Guide
Subgroup
A grouping of boxes within a larger group. In the figure below, a, b, and c belong to one subgroup, and d, e, and f belong to another subgroup. Both of these subgroups belong to the same Group because they have the same Manager.
Subordinate
Any box that reports to another box.
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF)

A graphics image file format supported by many DOS, Windows, and Macintosh applications.
Template
A template defines all the formatting parameters for a chart. Applying a template sets the formats for chart elements, such as boxes and lines. Using templates saves you the effort of formatting each individual chart element. Using templates in OrgPlus is very similar to using templates in Microsoft PowerPoint or Word.
Thumbnail Window
A window containing a miniature of the entire Chart. You can click in the thumbnail window to navigate to any part of your chart.
Topmost Box
The box at the top of the Chart.
Unicode
The universal character encoding, maintained by the Unicode Consortium (http://www.unicode.org/). This encoding standard provides the basis for processing, storage and interchange of text data in any language in all modern software and information technology protocols.
Wrapping
Allowing a phrase or sentence to split or wrap from one line to the next, as opposed to requiring it to fit on a single line. (This paragraph is wrapped.)
G-6 Subgroup
Index
Index
entering, 7-4
A
about file formats used by OrgPlus, 4-3 OrgPlus, 1-2 projects and charts, 4-2 templates, 4-2 Adding fields, 4-17 advanced charting, 7-2 advanced data fields BranchStyle, 9-6 BreakAt, 9-5 CollapseAt, 9-5 Exclude, 9-8, 9-9 IsAssistant, 9-5 Sequence, 9-7 advanced features, 5-6 Advanced Find, 6-10 Advanced Find and Replace, 6-12 advanced hierarchy options, 9-36 advanced search, 1-16 aligning free floating objects, 7-11 analysis tool, 1-5 anchoring, G-1 boxes to free floating objects, 7-9 arrowheads, G-1 Assistant style, G-1 assistants, G-1 adding, 3-5 automatic e-mail distribution, 1-22 automation, 1-20, 11-1 Autotext elements Index
auxiliary lines, 7-13 Auxiliary toolbar, A-17
B
background objects. See free floating objects banding, G-1 basic chart creation, 3-2 binding free floating objects to a page, 7-9 bitmap (BMP), G-1 box layout, 1-7, See Also field layout adding labels to fields, 4-31, 4-33 adding lines, 4-34 adjusting margins, 4-35 creating a column grid, 4-32 editing, 4-31 using the quick chart panel, 4-62 box layout tips extra-wide manager boxes, C-2 modified co-manager style, C-3 modified list style, C-4 multiple charts on a page, C-7 multiple people in a box, C-6 multiple topmost boxes, C-5 repositioning boxes within the same level, C-8 staggering boxes on the same level, C-8 box properties, 3-10 Box templates, 7-21 boxes, G-2 adding, 3-5, 4-6 I-1
OrgPlus User Guide
adding and deleting, 4-6, 4-58 adding fields in, 3-12, 4-28 copying contents and format, 4-65 creating using keyboard shortcuts, B-2 deleting, 3-6, 4-7 designing, 4-31 displaying fields in, 3-13 editing using the quick chart panel, 4-60 fixed size, 4-37 formatting, 3-10, 4-36 formatting using the quick chart panel, 4-60 hiding, 5-5 inserting pictures in, 4-30 moving using the quick chart panel, 4-59 removing fields from, 4-28 selecting using keyboard shortcuts, B-3 shadow style, 4-40 shape, color, lines, 4-39 showing (unhiding), 5-5, 5-6 sorting, 6-8 spacing between, 7-46 branch styles changing using the quick chart panel, 4-63 new, 1-8 Branch symbol, G-2 Branch templates, 7-21 branches, G-1 showing selected, 5-4 BranchStyle field, 9-6 BreakAt field, 9-5
excluding fields from, 7-31 problems and solutions, D-6 using formulas, 7-30 centering charts, 7-47 chart boxes. See boxes chart layout enhancement auxiliary lines, 7-13 centering, 7-47 optimizing, 7-46 spacing between boxes, 7-46 Chart menu, A-12 chart orientation. chart page area, G-2 chart rules, 7-53 creating, 7-53 deleting rules, 7-56 modifying, 7-55 reordering chart rules, 7-56 chart rules editing, 7-55 chart selection tabs, A-30 chart style rules, 1-12 chart styles, G-2 applying, 4-54 changing, 4-55 changing for a branch, 3-7 chart title, 3-15 charts, G-2 about projects and charts, 4-2 advanced techniques, 7-2 combining, 9-53 compare, 1-6 comparing, 6-5 formatting, 4-49 opening, 3-16, 3-27, 3-38 printing, 4-65 utilities, 6-1
C
calculations, 7-28 I-2
Index
viewing, 5-1 working with basic functions, 4-1 charts from external data. See importing chart data clients, G-5 Clipboard, G-2 closing a project, 4-6 cnstants adding, 7-33 CollapseAt field, 9-5 co-managers, G-3 combining charts, 9-53 comments insert, 1-21 inserting, 6-14 Comments, A-30 comparing charts, 6-5 compatibility problems and solutions, D-5 complex hierarchies, 9-36 conditional formats improved, 1-24 modifying, 7-52 conditional formatting, 1-12 creating rules, 7-49 deleting rules, 7-52, 7-53 editing rules, 7-52 conditional formula, 1-13, 7-26 conditions shared, 1-25 configuring OrgPlus project properties, 6-19 protecting projects, 6-18 connecting lines. See lines (connecting) consolidation, 1-12, 9-52 constants, 1-16 deleting, 7-33 Index
referencing, 7-34 using, 7-32 Control key shortcuts, B-7 copying box contents and format, 4-65 co-workers, G-3 creating chart rules, 7-53 customer support, 2-13 electronic support, 2-14 no charge phone support, 2-14 technical support checklist, 2-13 cut, copy, paste, 4-64
D
Data Connection file, 9-11 LDAP, 9-40 ODBC DSN, 9-12 Oracle, 9-13 SQL Server, 9-13 Table/View selection, 9-14 Data Connection wizard, 9-11 Data menu, A-12 data refresh, 9-56 excluding box contents, 9-46 maintaining orphan placement, 8-39 data settings in importing, 9-19 data source for importing file requirements, 9-3 file type selection, 9-16 data source selection in importing Excel (XLS) spreadsheet, 9-17 Text (txt) file, 9-18 data synchronization, 1-15 Date field formatting, 4-21 deleting chart rules, 7-56 demote, G-3 I-3
OrgPlus User Guide
Design templates, 7-20 designing boxes adding labels to fields, 4-31, 4-33 adding lines, 4-34 adjusting margins, 4-35 creating a column grid, 4-32 editing box layout, 4-31 directories, 1-17 adding and deleteing orphans to, 8-20 creating, 3-16, 8-15 deleting, 8-17 displaying, 3-18, 8-18 editing, 8-17 editing chart data using, 3-19, 8-19 emailing chart data from, 8-19 managing, 8-15 working with, 8-12 directory other functions, 8-18 Directory panel, 8-13, A-26 disk space problem and solutions, D-7 dotted line reports, 9-25 dotted-line relationships, G-3, See Also auxiliary lines dotted-line reporting, 1-13 dragging boxes using keyboard shortcuts, B-6 drawing lines, 7-7 shapes (rectangles, octagons), 7-6 duplicate records, 9-25 handling, 4-24 improved reporting, 1-24 dynamic fields defining, 7-24 I-4
E
Edit menu, A-5 editing chart rules, 7-55 electronic support, 2-14 e-mail automatic distribution, 1-22 emailing chart data from directories, 8-19 e-mailing your chart, 10-14 embed, G-3 entering information creating using keyboard shortcuts, B-2 Excel spreadsheet data source requirements in importing, 9-3 data source selection in importing, 9-17 exporting chart data to, 3-23, 9-47 Exclude field, 9-8, 9-9 exporting chart data, 9-47 to Excel, 3-23, 9-47 to other formats, 9-48 Express (OrgPlus), 2-3 Extras toolbar, A-18 extra-wide manager boxes, C-2
F
features of OrgPlus, 1-6 field layout, G-3 fields, G-3 adding and deleting, 4-17 adding in boxes, 3-12 adding labels to, 4-31, 4-33 adding using the quick chart panel, 4-61 defining, 4-17 defining and displaying, 4-17 deleting, 4-24
Index
displaying in boxes, 3-13, 4-28 enhance formatting of numbers, 1-25 entering field text in boxes, 3-4, 4-15 excluding from calculations, 7-31 formatting, 4-19, 4-47 Date fields, 4-21 Name fields, 4-19 Number fields, 4-20 in Hierarchy Mapper display, 9-24 inserting pictures in, 4-30 predefined, 4-23 selecting, 4-9 selecting in reports, 8-4 showing (unhiding), 5-6 file formats used by OrgPlus, 4-3 File menu, A-4 files operations on using keyboard shortcuts, B-4 filtering report data, 8-7 source data in Import process, 9-30, 9-34 Find, 6-9 Find and Replace, 6-11 Advanced Find, 6-10 Advanced Find and Replace, 6-12 Find, 6-9 Find and Replace, 6-11 Find by Photo locating a box using, 5-7 fixed size boxes, 4-37 Format menu, A-10 Format toolbar, A-19 formatting boxes, lines, text, fields, and pictures, 4-35 Index
conditional formatting, 7-49 connecting lines, 4-42 free floating objects, 7-8 pictures, 4-48 text, 4-44 using Box templates, 7-21 using Branch templates, 7-21 using Design templates, 7-20 using Template filess, 7-22 with templates, 3-36 within reports, 8-8, 8-9 formatting boxes, 3-10 resizing, 4-36 shadow style, 4-40 shape, color, lines, 4-39 formatting charts, 1-6, 3-9, 4-49 formatting fields, 4-47 Formula fields, 7-30, G-3 excluding from calculations, 7-31 formula options, 7-30 formulas adding, 7-24 available, 7-27 recalculating automatically, 7-31 free floating objects adding, 7-6 aligning, 7-11 anchoring to boxes, 7-9 binding to a page, 7-9 changing object order, 7-10 drawing or inserting, 7-6 formatting, 7-8 lines (drawn), 7-7 moving. See moving free floating objects shapes (rectangles, octagons), 7-6 free floating text, 7-3 I-5
OrgPlus User Guide
free form tool, 1-13 frequently asked questions about registering and unlocking OrgPlus, 2-10 Full Screen mode, 5-4 Full Screen toolbar, A-19 Function key shortcuts, B-6
hyperlinks adding to objects, 7-12
I
Import wizard, 3-32, 9-16 data setting definition, 9-19 data source selection, 9-16 dotted line reports, 9-25 filtering source data, 9-30, 9-34 Hierarchy Mapper, 9-22 Show Fields feature, 9-24 verifying the hierarchy, 9-20 importing chart data, 1-14, 3-31, 9-2 advanced data fields, 9-4 Data Connection wizard, 9-11 Import wizard, 9-16 refreshing a chart created by, 3-37, 9-42 required source fields, 9-2 required text file format, 9-3 saving a chart created by, 3-37 importing data complex hierarchies, 9-36 Insert menu, A-9 Insert toolbar, A-20 installation problems and solutions, D-2 installation options, 2-5 installing OrgPlus, 2-1, 2-3 from a CD, 2-4 from a network, 2-4 integration Web, 1-20 with Microsoft Office, 1-19 IsAssistant field, 9-5
G
grids, 1-25 grids and rulers displaying, 6-2 using, 6-2 grouping report data, 8-5 groups, 1-13, G-4 applying group filters, 5-11 creating new groups, 5-9 enhanced, 1-25 working with, 5-8 Groups toolbar, A-20
H
Help menu, A-14 hiding boxes, 5-5 levels, 5-7 lines, 5-5 page lines, 5-7 symbols, 5-7 hierarchy verifying in importing, 9-20 Hierarchy Mapper assigning orphans, 9-22 changing displayed fields, 9-24 hotspots, 1-8 improved, 1-25 HTML publishing options, 10-5 I-6
Index
K
keyboard shortcuts, B-2 creating boxes, B-2 dragging boxes, B-6 entering information, B-2 Function and Control keys, B-6 moving free floating objects, B-6 selecting boxes, B-3 text editing, B-5 viewing your chart, B-3 working with files, B-4
managers, G-4 mapped fields, 4-27 margins adjusting within boxes, 4-35 in Page Setup, 4-66 master page, 7-2 Master Page, 1-6 viewing, 7-3 matrix reporting, 1-17 memory/resource problem and solutions, D-7 menus Chart, A-12 Data, A-12 Edit, A-5 File, A-4 Format, A-10 Help, A-14 Insert, A-9 Tools, A-11 View, A-7 Window, A-13 metafile (WMF), G-4 Microsoft Vista, 1-21 modified co-manager style, C-3 modified list style, C-4 modifying chart rules, 7-55 moving, A-30 moving boxes by cut and paste, 4-64 by dragging and dropping, 4-12 moving free floating objects by cut and paste, 4-64 by dragging and dropping, 4-12, 4-13 using keyboard shortcuts, B-6 multi-column charts, 1-12 I-7
L
launching OrgPlus. See starting OrgPlus LDAP Data Connection file, 9-40 Learning OrgPlus, 2-11 legends, 1-10, 7-14 automatic, 1-24 levels, G-4 selecting, 4-10 showing or hiding, 5-7 lines (auxiliary), 7-13 lines (connecting), G-3 formatting, 4-42 hiding, 5-5 selecting, 4-8 showing (unhiding), 5-5, 5-6 lines (drawn), 7-7 within boxes, 4-34 lines (page lines), G-5 showing or hiding, 5-7 linking, G-4 localization, 1-19, 1-20
M
main window. See OrgPlus main window Index
OrgPlus User Guide
multiple charts in a project, 1-17, 7-41 creating, 7-42 deleting, 7-43 navigating, 7-43 renaming, 7-43 multiple charts on a page, C-7 multiple people in a box, C-6 multiple topmost boxes, C-5 multi-record boxes, 1-7, 7-47 and templates, 7-19
creating, 7-57 OLE DB support, 1-14 online help. See Help menu online store, 2-15 opening an existing project, 3-10, 4-2 optimizing chart layout, 1-11, 7-46 optimizing files, 4-16 options setting, 6-15 options panel using, 6-15 Oracle Data Connection file, 9-13 order of free floating objects, 7-10 OrgPlus about, 1-2 approach to learning, 2-11 customer support, 2-13 Express, 2-3, A-4 features, 1-6 Help menu, 2-12 how it works, 1-3 installing, 2-3 launching, 2-11 registering, 2-6 Standard vs Professional, 2-3 starting, 2-11 OrgPlus main window, A-2 chart selection tabs, A-30 menu bars, A-3 panels, A-24 status bar, A-31 toolbars, A-15 OrgPlus options setting, 6-15 OrgPlus plug-in
N
Name field formatting, 4-19 navigating charts advanced features, 5-6 multiple charts in a project, 7-43 showing hidden objects, symbols, page lines, 5-6 sub-charts, 7-37 new charts creatiing, 3-2 New Person function, 8-20 Number field formatting, 4-20 number fields enhanced formatting, 1-25
O
object linking and embedding (OLE), G-5 objects, G-5 moving, 4-12 selecting, 4-7, 4-9 ODBC DSN Data Connection file, 9-12 Office 2007, 1-21 off-line registration. See registering OrgPlus off-line off-page references, 1-24 I-8
Index
options, 10-4 OrgPlus Plulgin security options, 10-13 OrgPlus use with other applications, D-5 OrgTree file creating, 9-52 OrgUnit charts, 1-10 OrgViewer publishing to, 3-39 orpan management data refresh, 8-39 orphan management, 8-38 improved, 1-14 orphans adding and deleting records to a directory, 8-20 assigning with Hierarchy Mapper, 9-22 improved handling, 1-25
PDF page layout in publishing, 10-3 publishing options, 10-5, 10-6 peers grouping, 1-26 photo manager working with, 6-2 Photo Manager, 6-2 picture formatting improved, 1-25 pictures formatting, 4-48 inserting as free floating objects, 7-8 inserting manually in chart fields, 4-30 inserting with Photo Manager, 6-2 PowerPoint page layout in publishing, 10-3 publishing options, 10-3 publishing to, 3-41 predefined fields adding, 4-23 Print Preview, 4-69 Printer page layout in publishing, 10-3 printing enhanced on OrgPlus 7, 1-23 printing charts, 3-9, 3-15, 4-65 Page Setup, 4-66 Print Preview, 4-69 printing, 4-70 problems and solutions, D-2 problems and solutions calculations, D-6 disk space, D-7 installation, D-2 memory/resource, D-7 I-9
P
page lines showing or hiding, 5-7 Page Setup for printing, 4-66 page setup problems and solutions, D-4 panels Directory, A-26 Profile, A-27 quick chart, 4-58 Reports, A-27 Sub-charts, A-28, A-29, A-30 Templates, A-26 Welcome, A-25 Panels Tree, A-29 panning, 5-1 passwords. See protecting projects Index
OrgPlus User Guide
page setup, D-4 printing, D-2 using OrgPlus with other applications, D-5 Product Code, 2-8 what is it?, 2-10 where is it?, 2-10 Professional (OrgPlus), 2-3 Profile panel, 8-21, A-27 profile view more powerful, 1-23 profiles, 1-18 copying, 8-29 creating, 3-24 creating composite, 8-27 creating HTML, 8-28, 8-29 creating standard, 8-23 deleting, 8-29 displaying, 8-30 editing, 8-29 editing data using, 8-22 managing, 8-23 using, 3-26 working with, 8-20 projects about projects and charts, 4-2 closing, 4-6 creating, 4-2 creating new, 4-3 opening, 4-2 protecting, 6-18 saving your work, 4-4 viewing project properties, 6-19 promote, G-5 protecting projects, 6-18 Publish/Import toolbar, A-21 publishing I-10
enhanced in OrgPlus 7, 1-21 OrgPlus Plugin security options, 10-13 publishing options HTML, 10-5 PDF, 10-5, 10-6 PowerPoint, 10-3 scheduling automatic publishing, 11-3 Send as Mail, 10-14 Word, 10-3 publishing your chart, 3-38, 10-1, 10-2 to Microsoft Office, 1-19 to OrgViewer, 3-39 to PowerPoint, 3-41
Q
Quick Chart creator, 1-9 quick chart panel, 4-58 adding fields using, 4-61 applying templates using, 4-63 box layout using, 4-62 changing branch styles using, 4-63 editing boxes using, 4-60 formatting boxes using, 4-60 moving boxes using, 4-59
R
refreshing chart data, 3-37, 9-42 scheduling automatic refresh, 11-3 registering OrgPlus, 2-1, 2-6 frequently asked questions, 2-10 if purchased from HumanConcepts, 2-7 if purchased from other vendors, 2-8 registering OrgPlus off-line by email, E-2 by fax, E-2 by phone, E-3
Index
reordering chart rules, 7-56 report data filtering, 8-7 formatting report elements, 8-8, 8-9 grouping, 8-5 selecting fields, 8-4 sorting, 8-6 reports, 1-16 creating, 3-20, 8-3 deleting, 8-11 displaying, 3-22, 8-11 editing, 8-10 exporting to Excel, 3-23 managing, 8-3 working with, 8-2 Reports panel, 8-2, A-27 reports, profiles, directories, and searches, 8-1 repositioning boxes within the same level, C-8 resizing boxes, 4-36 right-click menus, B-1 rulers, 1-25 rulers and grids displaying, 6-2 using, 6-2
checking tasks, 11-8 deleting tasks, 11-7 editing tasks, 11-7 search advanced, 1-16 search panel, A-28 using, 8-36 search results managing, 8-35 searching charts, 8-34 secondary mouse button, G-5 security OrgPlus Plugin options, 10-13 selecting connecting lines, 4-8 fields, 4-9 levels, 4-10 objects - all of the same type, 4-9 selecting objects, 4-7 Sequence field, 9-7 servers, G-5 shapes (rectangles, octagons), 7-6 showing branches, 5-4 levels, 5-7 showing (unhiding) boxes, 5-5, 5-6 comments, 5-6 lines, 5-5, 5-6 page lines, 5-7 symbols, 5-7 sorting report data, 8-6 sorting boxes, 6-8 source data requirements, 9-2 I-11
S
sample charts OrgPlus 7 enhancements, 1-23 SAP direct access to, 1-14 saving chart after importing, 3-37 saving your project, 3-8, 4-4 scenario analysis, 1-4 scheduling Refresh or Publish tasks Index
OrgPlus User Guide
spacing between boxes, 7-46 spell checking, 6-13 SQL Server Data Connection file, 9-13 staggering boxes on the same level, C-8 Standard toolbar, A-16 starting OrgPlus, 2-11 status bar, A-31 styles applying chart, 4-54 changing chart, 4-54 sub-chart arrow labels, 1-24 sub-charts, 1-13, 1-14, 3-27, 7-36 creating with Sub-chart wizard, 3-28, 7-38 inserting breaks manually, 3-30, 7-37 labeling breaks, 7-37 navigating, 3-29, 7-37 removing breaks, 3-30, 7-37 Sub-charts panel, 7-39, A-28, A-29 subgroups, G-6 subordinates, G-6 adding, 3-6 support. See customer support symbols showing or hiding, 5-7 system requirements, 2-2
Template files, 7-22 templates, 1-9, G-6 about, 4-2 and multi-record boxes, 7-19 applying to a chart, 3-36 applying using the quick chart panel, 4-63 based on existing charts, 7-18 Box, 7-21 Branch, 7-21 creating and modifying, 7-18 Design, 7-20 files, 7-22 learning about, 7-18 modifying, 7-19 OrgPlus 7 enhancements, 1-23 using, 7-20 Templates panel, 7-20, A-26 text Autotext elements, 7-4 editing using keyboard shortcuts, B-5 formatting, 4-44 free floating, 7-3 text boxes inserting, 7-7 Text file data source requirements in importing, 9-3 data source selection in importing, 9-18 Text toolbar, A-22 thumbnails, 5-3, G-6 titles in charts, 3-15 tool free form, 1-13 toolbars Auxiliary, A-17
T
Table/View selection for Data Connection file, 9-14 Tagged Image File format (TIFF), G-6 tasks creating, 11-4 technical support checklist, 2-13 no charge phone support, 2-14 I-12
Index
Extras, A-18 Format, A-19 Full Screen, A-19 Groups, A-20 Insert, A-20 Publish/Import, A-21 Standard, A-16 Text, A-22 Zoom, A-23 Tools menu, A-11 topmost box, G-6 Tree Panel, 1-22 Tree Panel, using, 8-31 trees working with, 8-31, 8-40 troubleshooting, D-1 calculations, D-6 disk space, D-7 installation, D-2 memory/resource, D-7 page setup, D-4 printing, D-2 using OrgPlus with other applications, D-5 tutorials, 3-2
URI off-page references, 1-24 utilities, 6-1
V
View menu, A-7 viewing charts Full Screen mode, 5-4 showing selected branches, 5-4 thumbnails, 5-3 zooming and panning, 5-1 viewing your chart using keyboard shortcuts, B-3
W
Welcome panel, A-25 what if scenario analysis, 1-4 what-if analysis, 1-16 Window menu, A-13 Word page layout in publishing, 10-3 publishing options, 10-3 word wrap enhancements, 1-25 wrapping, G-6
U
unassigned positions. See orphans unhiding. See showing unicode, G-6 Unlock Code, 2-7 what is it?, 2-10 where is it?, 2-10 unlocking OrgPlus. See registering OrgPlus
X
XML support, 1-19
Z
Zoom toolbar, A-23 zooming, 5-1
Index
I-13
OrgPlus User Guide
I-14

Op 7 User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Op 7 User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OrgPlus 7 User Guide

OrgPlus User Guide

OrgPlus User Guide

Program License Agreement

Program License Agreement

OrgPlus User Guide

Program License Agreement

OrgPlus User Guide

Program License Agreement

OrgPlus User Guide

Program License Agreement

OrgPlus User Guide

About This Guide

About This Guide

OrgPlus User Guide

OrgPlus Desktop Products

OrgPlus User Guide

OrgPlus Enterprise Products

OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted

OrgPlus Enterprise Products

OrgPlus User Guide

OrgPlus Enterprise Products

OrgPlus User Guide

Chapter 2, Installation and Registration ................................................... 2-1

Chapter 3, Tutorials................................................................................... 3-1

Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Charting........................................ 4-1

OrgPlus User Guide

Chapter 5, Working with Charts: Navigation and Visualization.................. 5-1

Chapter 6, Working with Charts: Utilities .................................................. 6-1

Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting................................. 7-1

OrgPlus User Guide

Chapter 8, OrgPlus Panels ......................................................................... 8-1

Chapter 9, Importing and Exporting Data.................................................. 9-1

Chapter 10, Publishing your Chart........................................................... 10-1

Chapter 11, Automation .......................................................................... 11-1

OrgPlus User Guide

Scheduling Tasks ................................................................................................ 11-3 OrgPlus Enterprise .............................................................................................. 11-9

Appendix A, Window Structure and Command Reference.......................... A-1

Appendix B, Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts ............................................. B-1

Appendix C, Tips and Tricks....................................................................... C-1

Appendix D, Troubleshooting ....................................................................D-1

Appendix E, Off-line Registration .............................................................. E-1

OrgPlus User Guide

Appendix F, Command Line Reference ...................................................... F-1

Appendix G, Glossary ................................................................................ G-1 Index .........................................................................................................I-1

OrgPlus User Guide

OrgPlus User Guide

The OrgPlus Solution

Communicate Organizational Information to Managers

The OrgPlus Solution

OrgPlus User Guide

Communicate Organizational Information to Employees

Organizational Planning and What If Scenario Analysis

The OrgPlus Solution

The OrgPlus Solution

OrgPlus User Guide

Fast Chart Creation

Powerful Chart Formatting

Sophisticated Box Layout

OrgPlus User Guide

Quick Chart Creator

OrgPlus User Guide

OrgPlus User Guide